Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options

Setup Solution Options Setup Solution Options

Meshing
General Procedure After conductor types, material attributes, boundaries, and sources have been specified,
Starting Mesh choose Setup Solution Options (or Setup Solution/Options if you have purchased
Manual Mesh more than the nominal solution package) from the Executive Commands menu to:
Solver Residual
Solver Choice
Select which finite element mesh is used during the solution process.
Frequency
Optionally, refine the finite element mesh.
Solve For Fields and Param- Specify whether fields and/or executive parameters are computed during a solution.
eters Set the stopping criteria for adaptive field solutions.
Transient Solution Options Specify the frequency at which eddy current, AC conduction, and eddy axial field
Adaptive Analysis simulations take place.
Suggested Values EMpulse only. Define the transient motion solution parameters.
Use Control Program

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 447 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options Meshing
Meshing
Need for a Fine Mesh Representing an electric or magnetic field solution over a relatively large area is a fairly
General Procedure difficult task. Fields cannot be accurately described with a single polynomial expression
Starting Mesh that covers the entire problem region. The approach taken by Maxwell 2D is to divide the
Manual Mesh problem region into many triangles and to represent the field in each triangle (element)
Solver Residual with a separate polynomial. This collection of triangles is referred to as the finite element
Solver Choice mesh.
Frequency
An example of a mesh is shown below. The bottom portion of the figure shows the geom-
Solve For Fields and Param-
etry for a three-conductor microstrip line. The top displays the mesh for the geometry.
eters
Transient Solution Options
Adaptive Analysis
Suggested Values
Use Control Program

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 448 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options Need for a Fine Mesh
Meshing
Need for a Fine Mesh Although this implementation of the finite element method is largely transparent, a gen-
General Procedure eral understanding of the method is necessary to make sure that the field solution (and
Starting Mesh hence the parameters that are computed) are as accurate as possible for a given amount
Manual Mesh of computing resources.
Solver Residual Maxwell 2D only computes the electric and magnetic fields at the nodes (vertices) of tri-
Solver Choice angles. To obtain values for the electric or magnetic field at all other points, it interpolates
Frequency the field from the nodal values of the finite element mesh. For example, in the DC conduc-
Solve For Fields and Param- tion field solver, the value of the electric potential is stored at each node; potentials at
eters points inside the triangles are interpolated from the nodal values.
Transient Solution Options
Adaptive Analysis If the mesh triangles are too large, the fields inside them cannot be interpolated accu-
Suggested Values rately from the nodal values. The optimal mesh for a structure is one that contains enough
Use Control Program triangles to accurately represent a field solution but not so many that the available com-
puting resources are overwhelmed. The initial mesh generated for a structure is rarely the
optimal mesh. The mesh has to be refined; that is, the geometry has to be broken down
into more triangles.
To make the most of the available computing resources, refinement of the finite element
mesh is performed automatically by Maxwell 2D. By performing an adaptive refinement
analysis, it is able to optimize the placement of all new triangles. However, the Setup
Solution Options command enables you to control the adaptive refinement process.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 449 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options General Procedure
Meshing
> To specify the refinement criteria for the various field simulators:
General Procedure
1. Choose Setup Solution Options. The following window appears:
Starting Mesh
Manual Mesh
Solver Residual
Solver Choice
Frequency
Solve For Fields and Param-
eters
Transient Solution Options
Adaptive Analysis
Suggested Values
Use Control Program

2. Choose the Starting Mesh with which to begin the solution process from one of
the following:
Initial. This instructs Maxwell 2D to start with the initial, coarse mesh.
Current. This instructs Maxwell 2D to use the most recently refined mesh. In
general, select this option.
More 3. Optionally, choose Manual Mesh to manually refine the finite element mesh in
areas of interest.
4. Specify the Solver Residual, which indicates how close the field solution must
Go Back come to satisfying the appropriate form of Maxwells Equations. Generally, accept
the default.
5. Specify the Solver Choice, which indicates which type of matrix solver to use to
Contents solve the problem.
6. If you are setting solution criteria for an AC field simulator, specify a frequency in
Index hertz, kilohertz, or megahertz in the Frequency field. All source quantities are

Maxwell Online Help System 450 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options assumed to be sinusoidally oscillating at that frequency.
Meshing 7. Identify the quantities to be solved for during the solution process:
General Procedure Fields Select to generate a field solution.
Starting Mesh Parameters Select to solve for the requested executive parameters (force
Initial Mesh torque, current flow, and so forth).
Current Mesh 8. Choose Adaptive Analysis to request that the finite element mesh be adaptively
Manual Mesh refined in areas with the highest error.
Solver Residual a. Specify what percentage of high-error triangles should be refined during each
Solver Choice iteration by entering a value in the field Percent Refinement Per Pass.
Frequency b. Specify stopping criteria for the solve refine error analysis cycle by
Solve For Fields and Param- entering values for Number of Passes and Percent Error. Maxwell 2D breaks
eters out of the cycle as soon as one of these criteria is satisfied.
Transient Solution Options 9. If you want to reset all fields to their default values, choose Suggested Values.
Adaptive Analysis 10. Choose OK to return to the Executive Commands menu.
Suggested Values
The process of computing a field solution is an iterative one in which the system con-
Use Control Program
verges on a field pattern that satisfies Maxwells equations. In general, you should first
accept the default stopping and refinement criteria. Then, after you generate the desired
field solutions, check their convergence to see if the stopping criteria need to be adjusted.

Starting Mesh
There are two options for specifying the type of mesh with which to start the solution pro-
cess: Initial Mesh and Current Mesh.
Initial Mesh
If you choose Initial Mesh, the system automatically creates a mesh at the start of the
solution process. The initial mesh is a relatively coarse one that, as much as possible,
uses the vertices (object points) of the geometry as the vertices of elements in the mesh.
When using the initial mesh, you should usually perform an adaptive solution that itera-
Go Back tively refines the mesh. Because the elements of an initial mesh are relatively large, a
non-adaptive solution that is based solely on the initial mesh is not likely to yield an accu-
Contents rate parameter or field solution.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 451 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options Current Mesh
Meshing
General Procedure If you choose Current Mesh, the system starts with the finite element mesh that was
Starting Mesh most recently refined. To take advantage of any previous adaptive or manual mesh refine-
Initial Mesh ments, choose Current Mesh as the starting mesh.
Current Mesh
Manual Mesh Manual Mesh
Solver Residual Choose Manual Mesh to manually refine the finite element mesh in areas of interest. The
Solver Choice saved manual mesh then becomes the Current Mesh.
Frequency
Solve For Fields and Param- Solver Residual
eters
Transient Solution Options The Solver Residual specifies how close a field solution must come to satisfying the
Adaptive Analysis appropriate form of Maxwells equations. In most cases, accept the default value. For
Suggested Values magnetostatic problems that contain nonlinear materials, there is both a Linear and a
Use Control Program Nonlinear residual.
The residual is a normalized measure of how close a field solution comes to satisfying the
electromagnetic field equation that is being solved. The solution from each iteration is
plugged back into the field equation. If it happens to be the exact solution, the residual is
zero. Otherwise, the residual is non-zero and a small correction is added to the solution
process for the next iteration. The iterative solution process continues until the residual is
less than the specified target value.
The residual does not affect the finite element mesh. The system attempts to reduce the
residual to the target value while using the same mesh.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 452 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options Solver Choice
Meshing
General Procedure You can specify which type of matrix solver to use to solve the problem. In the default
Starting Mesh Auto position the software makes the choice. In versions of Maxwell 2D before 6.4, this
Manual Mesh option was not available and the software always used an incomplete conjugate gradient
Solver Residual solver (ICCG). In version 6.4, the option to use a direct matrix solver has been added. The
Solver Choice ICCG solver is faster for large matrices, but occasionally fails to converge (usually on
Frequency magnetic problems with high permeabilites and small air-gaps). The direct solver will
Solve For Fields and always converge, but is much slower for large matrices. In the Auto position, the software
Parameters evaluates the matrix before attempting to solve; if it appears to be ill-conditioned, the
Transient Solution Options Direct solver is used, otherwise the ICCG solver is used. Also, if the matrix size is very
Adaptive Analysis small (<1500) the direct solver will be used, since small size matrix normally corresponds
Suggested Values to initial coarse mesh with ill-conditioned matrix (the time difference is negligible for small
Use Control Program matrices). If the ICCG solver fails to converge while the solver choice is in the Auto posi-
tion, the software will fall back to the direct solve automatically.

Frequency
If you are computing an eddy current, AC conduction, or eddy axial solution, specify the
frequency at which the currents, external fields, and voltages oscillate in the Frequency
field. Frequency can be specified in hertz, kilohertz, or megahertz.
The frequency that you choose affects the simulated loss. For example, at high frequen-
cies, the skin effect increases the series resistance by forcing current to the outside of
conductors. Magnetic losses associated with materials that have a non-zero imaginary
relative permeability also increase with frequency.

Solve For Fields and Parameters

Select one or both of the following field quantities to be computed during the solution pro-
cess (in general, leave both options selected):
Go Back
Fields Solves for your models electric or magnetic fields.
Parameters Computes any executive parameters (force, torque, capacitance,
Contents impedance, flux linkage, and so forth) or post-processing macros that
were requested via the Setup Executive Parameters command.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 453 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options Transient Solution Options
Meshing
General Procedure If you have purchased EMpulse and defined a transient model, the Solve Setup window
Starting Mesh for transient analysis appears.
Manual Mesh
To define the solution setup for the transient model, you must specify the motion and solu-
Solver Residual
tion parameters, such as the speed, distance, and time increments of the motion analysis.
Solver Choice
Frequency > To define the transient solution:
Solve For Fields and Param- 1. Choose Setup Solution/Options from the Executive Commands window. The
eters following window appears:
Transient Solution Options
Transient Models
Adaptive Analysis
Suggested Values
Use Control Program

More

Go Back
2. Select the type of Starting Mesh to use in the solution. Current uses the most
Contents recently defined mesh while Initial uses the mesh that was first created.
Optionally, choose Manual Mesh to access the Meshmaker and manually create
and refine the mesh.
Index 3. Enter the solver Residual or accept the default. The residual defines how close a

Maxwell Online Help System 454 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options field solution must come to satisfying the appropriate form of Maxwells equations.
Meshing 4. Select Auto, Direct, or ICCG as the Solver Choice. Auto allows the software to
General Procedure choose the best solver for the model. The Direct solver is used for most projects.
Starting Mesh The ICCG solver is used for significantly larger and more complex meshes in the
Manual Mesh model. If the ICCG solver fails to converge to a result, it will use the direct solver,
Solver Residual which will always converge.
Solver Choice 5. Select Start from time zero or Continue previous solution as the starting point
Frequency of the Solution. The Start from time zero settings forces the motion to begin at its
Solve For Fields and Param- initial conditions while Continue previous solution forces the motion to continue
eters from the last place it stopped moving. The new results are appended to the former
Transient Solution Options results in the Convergence display.
Transient Models 6. Enter the Stop Time. This refers to the values at which the motion will stop.
Adaptive Analysis 7. Enter the Time Step for the analysis. This defines the time increments.
Suggested Values 8. Enter how often the fields will be saved in the Save fields time step field.
Use Control Program 9. For XY models, enter the Model Depth. This refers to how far the object is
displaced from its original position.
10. For XY models, enter the Symmetry multiplier. If you entered only a portion of the
model, enter the value of how many times to multiply the symmetry to complete the
model. For example, if you created only a quarter of the model, enter 4 in this field
to complete the geometry.
11. Optionally, select Use Control Program and define the user control program to
use during the solution generation process.
12. Optionally, select Suggested Values to restore all entered values to their defaults.
13. Choose OK to accept the solution setup or Cancel to ignore the setup and return
to the Executive Commands window.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 455 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options Transient Models
Meshing
General Procedure Transient models are standard geometric models in which one or more objects can be
Starting Mesh displaced with rotational or translational motion. All motion is constrained to occur within a
Manual Mesh defined band object. No motion can occur outside the band object.
Solver Residual For translational problems, the mesh outside the band object and inside the moving
Solver Choice objects remains constant during the motion solution, while the mesh within the band is
Frequency updated and recalculated for the displacement at each time step.
Solve For Fields and Param-
eters Rotational motion models can have only one point of rotation defined in any model. For
Transient Solution Options rotational problems, no remeshing occurs during the solution process.
Transient Models Translational motion models may have one or more objects that move linearly within the
Adaptive Analysis band object. The moving objects are constrained to slide at the same velocity and in the
Suggested Values same direction.
Use Control Program
Models cannot have objects with both rotational and translational motion.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 456 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options Adaptive Analysis
Meshing
General Procedure Select Adaptive Analysis to instruct Maxwell 2D to perform an adaptive solution. During
Starting Mesh this process, the simulator iteratively refines the starting mesh as illustrated here.
Manual Mesh
Solver Residual Start Field Solution
Solver Choice
Frequency
Solve For Fields and Param- Generate Initial
Mesh
eters
Transient Solution Options
Adaptive Analysis
Compute Fields
Percent Refinement Per
Pass Refine Mesh
Stopping Criterion
Number of Requested Perform
Error Analysis
Passes
Percent Error
Suggested Values
Stopping No
Use Control Program
Criteria
Met?

Yes

Stop Field Solution

The following happens when an adaptive analysis is performed.

More
1. Maxwell 2D generates a field solution using the mesh type that you specify.
2. The system computes the field energy and the residual. It then compares the
Go Back computed residual with the residual that you specified as acceptable in the Setup
Solution Parameters step. When the computed residual is less than your
specified value, the field solution process stops.
Contents 3. The simulator computes the Percent Error, which is the percentage of the total
system energy associated with the residual. The process stops if the Percent
Index Error is less than your specified value, or if the specified Number of Passes has

Maxwell Online Help System 457 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options been performed.
Meshing 4. New triangles are added to the finite element mesh in areas of high error
General Procedure (residual).
Starting Mesh 5. Another solution is generated using the refined mesh, and the entire process
Manual Mesh (solve error analysis refine) repeats until the stopping criterion is satisfied.
Solver Residual
Solver Choice
Frequency
Solve For Fields and Param-
eters
Transient Solution Options
Adaptive Analysis
Percent Refinement Per
Pass
Stopping Criterion
Number of Requested
Passes
Percent Error
Suggested Values
Use Control Program

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 458 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options Percent Refinement Per Pass
Meshing
General Procedure The value that you specify as the Percent Refinement Per Pass determines how many
Starting Mesh triangles are added after each iteration of the adaptive refinement process. For instance,
Manual Mesh entering 10 in this field causes the ten percent of the triangles with the highest error to be
Solver Residual refined. Generally, accept the default value.
Solver Choice Stopping Criterion
Frequency
Solve For Fields and Param- Maxwell 2D breaks out of the adaptive solution cycle when one of the following criteria is
eters met.
Transient Solution Options Number of Requested Passes
Adaptive Analysis
Percent Refinement Per Specify the maximum number of refinement cycles (adaptive passes) that you want Max-
Pass well 2D to perform. Typically, use a value between 10 and 15.
Stopping Criterion The size of the finite element mesh and the amount of memory required to generate a
Number of Requested solution grows with each adaptive refinement of the mesh. Setting the Number of
Passes Requested Passes too high can cause Maxwell 2D to request more memory than is
Percent Error available.
Suggested Values
Use Control Program Percent Error
Specify the acceptable Percent Error of the solution. This lets you control the solution
accuracy. In general, accept the default for this field. Smaller values produce more accu-
rate (but slower) solutions; larger values produce less accurate (but faster) solutions.
The system stops the adaptive refinement process when both of the following calculated
values are less than your specified values:
The percent error energy. Maxwell 2D computes the total field energy and the energy
contributed to this total by the error residual. The percent error energy is the
percentage of total energy that the residual contributes. A small percent error energy
Go Back indicates that only a small amount of the total energy is associated with the residual
(error) and that the solution is highly accurate.
The percent change in energy between adaptive passes. Small energy changes
Contents between passes indicate the solution has converged.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 459 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options Suggested Values
Meshing
General Procedure Select this to reset all fields to their suggested values. Doing so gives you a set of solution
Starting Mesh options that enables you to compute a reasonably accurate adaptive solution.
Manual Mesh
Solver Residual Use Control Program
Solver Choice
Frequency User control programs are externally created executables that are called after each time
Solve For Fields and Param- step and allow you to control the source input, circuit elements, mechanical quantities,
eters time step, and when to stop solution generation, based on the updated solutions.
Transient Solution Options The transient solver outputs current time step solutions to a file with a fixed name of solu-
Adaptive Analysis [Link]. The solver maintains a copy of the previous solution in a file called [Link]
Suggested Values because you may need first derivative information for its control purpose.
Use Control Program
Control Program Control Program
Activating a Control Pro-
The user control program uses the file with fixed name [Link] to output control parame-
gram
ters to control the execution of the transient solver. Each file must use a predefined syntax
Control Program File For-
which is flexible enough to cover a wide range of items. The process can be summarized
mat
as:
1. The transient solver reads control parameters from [Link].
2. The transient solver solves the current time step.
3. The transient solver writes out solution information to [Link] and copies the
previous solution to [Link].
4. The transient solver calls the user control program;
5. The user-control program writes control information to file [Link].
6. Return to the transient solver if the control program succeeds with exit status 0 or
fails with exit status non-zero.
7. Go back to step 1 for the next time step.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 460 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options Activating a Control Program
Meshing
General Procedure Use the following steps to access and invoke a user-control program for use with the tran-
Starting Mesh sient solver.
Manual Mesh > To access a user control program:
Solver Residual 1. Select Use Control Program. The control program field becomes active, allowing
Solver Choice you to enter the name of the user control program.
Frequency 2. Choose Setup. The External Control Program Setup window appears:
Solve For Fields and Param-
eters
Transient Solution Options
Adaptive Analysis
Suggested Values
Use Control Program
Control Program
Activating a Control Pro-
gram
Control Program File For-
mat

3. Enter the name of the control program to use in the Control Program field.
4. Enter any arguments needed by the control program in the Arguments [Link]
solver will call the program in the format:
program_name specified_arguments
More 5. Choose Configure. This calls the control program, prepending the -configure flag
to any arguments specified in the Arguments field. This option can be used to
initialize data before the solver is called.
Go Back 6. Optionally, select Call after last time step for post processing. This instructs the
software to invoke the specified user control program after the solution has
completed the final time step. This option prepends the -post flag to the list of
Contents arguments. The solver will call the program in the format:
program_name specified_arguments
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 461 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options The control programm will be called if the solve finished normally without any
Meshing errors or if you choose Stop during the solution process. It will not be called if you
General Procedure choose Abort during the sulution generation.
Starting Mesh 7. Choose OK to accept the configuration or Cancel to ignore the settings. You
Manual Mesh return to the Solve Setup window.
Solver Residual Control Program File Format
Solver Choice
Frequency The user control programs have their own file formats which should be followed when cre-
Solve For Fields and Param- ating control program files.
eters Solution and Previous Control File Formats
Transient Solution Options
Adaptive Analysis The [Link] and [Link] files are created by EMpulse and uses the following
Suggested Values format:
Use Control Program begin_data
Control Program time <current_time>
Activating a Control Pro- forceT <tangential force>
gram forceN <normal force>
Control Program File torque <torque>
Format speed <speed>
position <position>
windingI <winding_name> <current_value>
windingV <winding_name> <voltage_value>
windingEMF <winding_name> <back_emf_value>
windingFlx <winding_name> <flux_linkage_value>
...
...
barI <current_value>
barV <voltage_value>
solidI <object_name> <current_value_for_an_active_solid_conductor>
Go Back ...
...
condPwrLoss <total_power_loss_in_solid_conductor>
Contents end_data

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 462 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options
Setup Solution Options User Control File Format
Meshing The [Link] file is created by the user control program and uses the following format:
General Procedure
Starting Mesh begin_data
Manual Mesh windingSrc <winding_name> <source_value>
Solver Residual windingC <winding_name> <capactiance_value>
Solver Choice windingR <winding_name> <resistance_value>
Frequency windingL <winding_name> <inductance_value>
Solve For Fields and Param- windingConnect <winding_name> <0 or 1>
eters ...
Transient Solution Options ...
Adaptive Analysis objectP <object_name> <polarity_value>
Suggested Values objectSrc <object_name> <source_value_for_solid_conductor>
Use Control Program ...
Control Program ...
Activating a Control Pro- loadTorque <value>
gram loadForce <value>
Control Program File speed <value>
Format damping <value>
stop <0 or 1>
timeStep <value>
loadInertia <value>
CallPost2d <macro_file_name>
end_data

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 463 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Manual Mesh Refinement
2D Meshmaker
Meshmaker Commands Choose Manual Mesh from the Setup Solution Options window to manually refine the
Tool Bar finite element mesh in your model using the 2D Meshmaker
General Procedure
Mesh Refinement
2D Meshmaker
Mesh Menu The 2D Meshmaker appears as shown below:
Refine Menu

Use the Mesh and Refine menus to generate and refine critical areas of the initial mesh.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 464 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Meshmaker Commands
Meshmaker Commands
Tool Bar The following commands appear in the menu bar of the 2D Meshmaker window:
General Procedure File Saves the refined mesh and reads in geometries to be meshed.
Mesh Refinement
Mesh Seeds, creates, displays, shows information about, or deletes the finite ele-
Mesh Menu
ment mesh.
Refine Menu
Refine Allows you to manually refine an existing mesh. You can refine on a point-
by-point basis, inside objects, or in a specific area.
Model Manipulates the parameters associated with the drawing region.
Window Creates and manipulates viewing windows.
Help Accesses the online documentation.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 465 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Tool Bar
Meshmaker Commands
Tool Bar The tool bar serves as a shortcut for executing various commands. Use it to make or
General Procedure delete the mesh, change the way the mesh is displayed, modify object attributes, or
Mesh Refinement change the view into the drawing space.
Mesh Menu
Each button in the tool bar executes a different 2D Meshmaker command as shown
Refine Menu
below. When you click on a button, a brief description of the command appears in the
message bar at the bottom of the screen.

Mesh/Seed/Object

Mesh/Make
Mesh/Delete
Mesh/Display
Mesh/Information

Refine/Object

Model/Measure

Window/Change View/Zoom In
Window/Change View/Zoom Out
Window/Change View/Fit Drawing

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 466 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement General Procedure
Meshmaker Commands
> In general, to manually refine the mesh:
Tool Bar
1. If desired, add seed points to the model using one of the Mesh/Seed commands.
General Procedure
These seed points become the vertices of triangles when you create the finite
Mesh Refinement
element mesh.
Undoing a Refinement
2. Choose Mesh/Make to generate and display the initial mesh.
Mesh Menu
3. Use the Refine commands to add more triangles to the mesh by breaking up the
Refine Menu
larger triangles in the initial mesh into smaller ones increasing the density of the
mesh.

Note: If you delete or refine the mesh after generating a field or parameter solution,
the solution is automatically deleted.

Mesh Refinement
There are several reasons for manually refining a mesh. The mesh that the Maxwell 2D
creates for your geometry is initially very coarse. During the solution process, the sys-
tems adaptive refinement process increases the density of the mesh in areas of high
error energy. However, adaptive refinement does not always adequately refine the mesh
in areas of low energy (and thus low error energy). You may need to manually add trian-
gles to the mesh in these regions to obtain a more accurate field solution. Generally, there
are three basic reasons to manually refine a mesh.
You know where the critical areas are and wish to give the adaptive refinement
process a head start by refining in those areas before starting the solution process.
The area in which you are interested is an area of low energy density and does not
More get refined adequately during the adaptive process.
For example, in structures like magnetic recording heads, you want to simulate the
magnetic field patterns beneath the recording head. However, since the magnetic
Go Back field energy (and thus the error energy) is relatively low in this area, adaptive
refinement may not produce a fine enough mesh to accurately compute field
Contents values. Selectively refining the mesh beneath the recording head produces a
better solution.
You are modeling the skin effect (surface concentration of currents) in a structure via
Index the Eddy Current field solver. The mesh that is initially generated by the 2D

Maxwell Online Help System 467 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Meshmaker is usually too coarse in the region where eddy currents occur in the
Meshmaker Commands conductor.
Tool Bar To get around this problem, refine the mesh between the surface of the conductor
General Procedure and the skin depth (via the Mesh/Seed/Skin command). Refining within this region
Mesh Refinement improves the accuracy of the solution and is especially useful for finding eddy-
Undoing a Refinement current effects in conductors that do not carry source current.
Mesh Menu There is no reason to refine the mesh in areas where the solution does not change rap-
Refine Menu idly. In some areas, such as where the solution is constant, an extremely coarse mesh is
acceptable. For example, in electrostatic problems there is no need to refine the mesh in
an object that is defined as a conductor. The electric potential is the same at all points in
the conductor.
But in a problem region in which, for instance, the magnetic field varies dramatically
such as at the corner of an iron core, in an air gap, or wherever flux is channeled through
narrow areas a mesh containing one or two triangles is not going to be adequate. The
field in such regions cannot be adequately interpolated from a handful of nodal values.
Manually refining the mesh in such areas helps give the adaptive procedure a head start.
Therefore, when manually refining the mesh, your job is to guide the system in refining the
mesh for your particular problem to the level necessary to obtain an accurate solution, but
not so fine that it overwhelms the available computer memory and processing power or
wastes time.
Undoing a Refinement
To reverse the effect of a manual mesh refinement, return to the Setup Solution menu
and choose Initial Mesh as the starting mesh. Maxwell 2D will generate a new mesh at
the beginning of the solution process.
Alternatively, choose Mesh/Delete to delete the current mesh. Then, choose Mesh/Make
to create a new one.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 468 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Mesh Menu
Meshmaker Commands
Tool Bar Use the Mesh commands to create, seed, delete and display information about the finite
General Procedure element mesh. The Mesh commands are:
Mesh Refinement Seed Refines the mesh by adding seed points to the geometric model.
Mesh Menu These seed points become the vertices of triangles when you create
Mesh/Seed the mesh.
Mesh/Seed/Surface
Make Creates and displays the finite element mesh.
Mesh/Seed/Object
Mesh/Seed/Skin Line Match Matches boundary lines.
Mesh/Seed/QuadTree Delete Deletes the mesh.
Mesh/Seed/Delete Display Displays the mesh, object boundaries, and seed points.
Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed Information Displays information about the mesh, including the number of trian-
Mesh Seeding for Para- gles inside each object and the maximum and minimum x- and y-
metric Sweeps coordinates of selected objects.
Mesh/Make
Triangle Aspect Ratios
Mesh/Line Match
Point Placement
Mesh/Delete
Mesh/Display
Mesh/Information
Refine Menu

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 469 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Mesh/Seed
Meshmaker Commands
Tool Bar Before creating the mesh, use the Mesh/Seed commands to add seed points to the geo-
General Procedure metric model. When you generate the coarse initial mesh, these seed points become the
Mesh Refinement vertices of triangles which increases the density of the mesh in the seeded areas.
Mesh Menu > To manually seed the mesh:
Mesh/Seed 1. Examine the existing mesh to determine where it should be more heavily seeded.
Mesh/Seed/Surface (If none exists, choose Mesh/Make to generate an initial mesh.)
Mesh/Seed/Object 2. Choose Mesh/Delete to delete the mesh.
Mesh/Seed/Skin 3. Choose one or more of the Mesh/Seed commands to add seed points where they
Mesh/Seed/QuadTree are needed.
Mesh/Seed/Delete 4. Choose Mesh/Make to generate a new mesh.
Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed
Mesh Seeding for Para- The following Mesh/Seed commands are available:
metric Sweeps Surface Adds seed points on the outside surface of an object.
Mesh/Make Object Adds seed points on a grid inside an object.
Triangle Aspect Ratios Skin Adds seed points to an object in a grid between the surface and the
Mesh/Line Match skin depth.
Point Placement QuadTree Seeds areas near the surfaces of objects by subdividing the problem
Mesh/Delete space around object edges and adding seed points in a grid.
Mesh/Display
Delete Deletes all seed points.
Mesh/Information
Refine Menu SaveSeed Saves the seed points for repeated mesh building in non-interactive
operations

When you use the commands for specifying the generation of seed points, you are actu-
ally building a set of seeding operations which, when executed, generate a set of seed
points for the vertices of additional mesh triangles. If you delete your mesh, the seed
points remain, and are still available for the regeneration of the mesh in the on-line mode.
However, the seed points are not available to non-interactive operations such as paramet-
Go Back ric sweeps. The Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed command enables you to overcome this limitation
by saving the seeding operations information in a file which is available during parametric
sweeps. The meshmaker uses the file to regenerate the seed points for subsequent mesh
Contents building operations. If you make repeated changes to objects within your model and do
repeated mesh generations as in parametric sweeps you do not have to re-specify
Index your seeding operations if you have saved them with this command.

Maxwell Online Help System 470 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Mesh/Seed/Surface
Meshmaker Commands Choose Mesh/Seed/Surface to add seed points on the surface of objects. Use this type
Tool Bar of seeding when you are interested in surface concentrations of current or charge.
General Procedure
Mesh Refinement > To seed the surface of an object:
Mesh Menu 1. Choose Mesh/Seed/Surface. A window appears, listing all objects in the model:
Mesh/Seed
Mesh/Seed/Surface
Mesh/Seed/Object
Mesh/Seed/Skin
Mesh/Seed/QuadTree
Mesh/Seed/Delete
Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed
Mesh/Make
Triangle Aspect Ratios
Mesh/Line Match
Point Placement
Mesh/Delete
Mesh/Display 2. Select the object whose surface is to be seeded.
Mesh/Information 3. Enter the distance between individual seed points in the Seed Value field. The
Refine Menu seed value is entered in the geometric models units (displayed in the UNITS field
in the status bar).
4. Alternatively, choose Suggested Value to let the software specify a seed value
based on the dimensions of the selected object. The seed value is entered in the
geometric models units (displayed in the UNITS field in the status bar).
5. Choose Seed. The seed value appears under Value; the number of seed points to
be added appears under # Points.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each object whose surface is to be seeded.
7. When you are finished, choose OK.
Go Back Note: Re-seeding the same surface deletes old seed points and replaces them
with the number of new seed points that meets your seeding specification. A
Contents seed value of zero deletes all seed points on a selected surface without
replacing them.

Index The system adds the seed points to the objects surface and displays them.

Maxwell Online Help System 471 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Mesh/Seed/Object
Meshmaker Commands Choose Mesh/Seed/Object to add seed points to the inside of an object. The seed points
Tool Bar are added in a rectangular grid. Use this type of seeding if you are interested in modeling
General Procedure charge or current distributions inside objects.
Mesh Refinement
Mesh Menu > To seed the interior of an object:
Mesh/Seed 1. Choose Mesh/Seed/Object. The following window appears, listing all objects in
Mesh/Seed/Surface the model.
Mesh/Seed/Object
Mesh/Seed/Skin
Mesh/Seed/QuadTree
Mesh/Seed/Delete
Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed
Mesh/Make
Triangle Aspect Ratios
Mesh/Line Match
Point Placement
Mesh/Delete
Mesh/Display
Mesh/Information
Refine Menu

2. Select the object that is to be seeded.

3. Enter the distance between individual seed points in the Seed Value field.
4. Alternatively, choose Suggested Value to let the software specify a seed value
based on the dimensions of the selected object. The suggested seed value is in
the geometric models units (displayed in the UNITS field in the status bar).
5. Choose Seed. The seed value appears under Value; the number of seed points to
be added appears under # Points.
Go Back 6. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each object that is to be seeded.
7. When you are finished, choose OK.
Contents The system adds the seed points in a grid inside the selected objects and displays them.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 472 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Mesh/Seed/Skin
Meshmaker Commands Choose Mesh/Seed/Skin to add seed points in a grid between the surface of an object
Tool Bar and its skin depth. Use this type of seeding in AC magnetics problems where you need to
General Procedure model the effects of eddy currents in conductors. Remember, the skin depth of eddy cur-
Mesh Refinement rents in a conductor is given by:
Mesh Menu
Mesh/Seed 2
= ------------------------
Mesh/Seed/Surface 2f r o
Mesh/Seed/Object
Mesh/Seed/Skin where:
Mesh/Seed/QuadTree f is the frequency of the source current in the conductor.
Mesh/Seed/Delete is its conductivity.
Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed r is its relative permeability.
Mesh/Make
0 is the permeability of free space, 410-7 webers/ampere-meter.
Triangle Aspect Ratios
Mesh/Line Match Seeding the mesh to the skin depth creates a very dense mesh in this area, which
Point Placement increases the accuracy of the eddy current simulation.
Mesh/Delete
> To seed the skin depth of an object:
Mesh/Display
1. Choose Mesh/Seed/Skin. The following window appears, listing all objects in the
Mesh/Information
model:
Refine Menu

More

Go Back
2. Select the conductor that is to be seeded.
3. Enter the skin depth seed value in the Seed Value field.
Contents 4. The 2D meshmaker adds seed points in a grid starting at the outer surface of the
object. The seed value specifies the depth and density of the points on this grid.
Index Smaller seed values produce a densely spaced, shallow grid modeling the skin

Maxwell Online Help System 473 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement depth at higher frequencies.
Meshmaker Commands Higher seed values produce a deeper, more widely spaced grid modeling the
Tool Bar skin depth at lower frequencies.
General Procedure 5. Alternatively, choose Suggested Value to let the software compute a seed value.
Mesh Refinement
Mesh Menu Note: Suggested Value does not actually compute the skin depth. Instead, it com-
Mesh/Seed putes a seed value based on the objects dimensions.
Mesh/Seed/Surface
Mesh/Seed/Object
6. Choose Seed. The seed value appears under Value. The number of seed points to
Mesh/Seed/Skin
be added to the object appears under # Points.
Mesh/Seed/QuadTree
7. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each object whose skin depth is to be seeded.
Mesh/Seed/Delete
8. When you are finished, choose OK.
Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed
Mesh/Make The system adds the seed points in a grid based on the seed value you specify, and dis-
Triangle Aspect Ratios plays them. Below is an example of two conductors with different seed values. The con-
Mesh/Line Match ductor on the right is left unseeded to illustrate the difference in the meshes inside the two
Point Placement objects. Because the mesh inside the right conductor is so coarse in the region where
Mesh/Delete eddy currents occur, the rapidly changing magnetic fields that occur there cannot con-
Mesh/Display verge. Seeding the mesh in the left conductor places extra triangles in this area, causing
Mesh/Information the solution there to be more accurate:
Refine Menu File Mesh Refine Model Window

fileset2

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 474 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Mesh/Seed/QuadTree
Meshmaker Commands Choose Mesh/Seed/QuadTree to add seed points to a geometry by subdividing the area
Tool Bar around the outside edges of objects, then adding seed points in a grid based on these
General Procedure subdivisions. Use this type of seeding to produce a uniform mesh around the edges of
Mesh Refinement objects in your model.
Mesh Menu
Mesh/Seed As shown below, the seed value you specify determines how the area is divided up and
Mesh/Seed/Surface seeded. Two identical geometries have been seeded using different values.
Mesh/Seed/Object The geometry on the left side of the figure below was seeded with a value of 4. Since
Mesh/Seed/Skin there are fewer divisions, the seed points are more evenly distributed throughout the
Mesh/Seed/QuadTree problem region.
Mesh/Seed/Delete
Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed
The geometry on the right side of the figure below was seeded with a value of 8. When
you specify a larger seed value, the 2D Meshmaker adds more divisions near the
Mesh/Make
edges of the objects in the geometry producing a dense grid of seed points in these
Triangle Aspect Ratios
areas.
Mesh/Line Match
Point Placement
Mesh/Delete
Mesh/Display
Mesh/Information
Refine Menu

More

Go Back

Contents > To add seed points to the model using the quadtree method:
1. Choose Mesh/Seed/QuadTree. A window appears, prompting you to enter the
Index number of levels (divisions) for the quadtree seeding.

Maxwell Online Help System 475 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement 2. Enter the Number of Levels. Seed values must be between zero and eight.
Meshmaker Commands 3. Choose OK or press Return.
Tool Bar The seed points are added to the model.
General Procedure
Mesh Refinement Mesh/Seed/Delete
Mesh Menu Choose Mesh/Seed/Delete to delete any seed points that have been added to the geo-
Mesh/Seed metric model.
Mesh/Seed/Surface
Mesh/Seed/Object > To delete the seed points:
Mesh/Seed/Skin 1. Choose Mesh/Seed/Delete. A message appears asking you to confirm the
Mesh/Seed/QuadTree deletion.
Mesh/Seed/Delete 2. Choose OK to delete the seed points or Cancel to cancel the deletion.
Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed
Mesh/Make Note: > To delete individual seed points:
Triangle Aspect Ratios 1. Choose one of the Mesh/Seed commands.
Mesh/Line Match 2. Specify a seed value of zero for each point that you want to delete.
Point Placement 3. Re-seed the mesh.
Mesh/Delete Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed
Mesh/Display
Mesh/Information Choose this command to save the seedings of the mesh.
Refine Menu Mesh Seeding for Parametric Sweeps
> To use the same seed points for repeated mesh building in non-interactive operations:
1. Set up seed point operations by using the Mesh/Seed/Surface, Mesh/Seed/
Object, Mesh/Seed/Skin, or Mesh/Seed/Quadtree command.
2. Choose Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed to save the seed point operations for use in the
non-interactive mode.
Deleting Mesh Seeding Operations
> To clear the seed operations file by zeroing its values:
Go Back 1. Choose Mesh/Delete to delete the mesh and thereby enable the Mesh/Seed/
Delete command.
2. Choose Mesh/Seed/Delete to delete the seed points.
Contents 3. Choose Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed to clear all values in the seed operations file.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 476 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Mesh/Make
Meshmaker Commands
Tool Bar Choose Mesh/Make to create a finite element mesh for the model. In addition to the
General Procedure object points used as vertices, any seed points that you have added to the model (using
Mesh Refinement one of the Mesh/Seed commands) are used as vertices of triangles.
Mesh Menu When the 2D Meshmaker finishes generating the mesh, it automatically displays the
Mesh/Seed mesh lines, seed points, and object boundaries.
Mesh/Seed/Surface
Mesh/Seed/Object To cancel the mesh generation, select the Abort Mesh Generation button, which
Mesh/Seed/Skin appears while the system is making the mesh.
Mesh/Seed/QuadTree Triangle Aspect Ratios
Mesh/Seed/Delete
Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed The aspect ratios of the triangles in the mesh the ratio of the base of a triangle to its
Mesh Seeding for Para- height are controlled by the Maxwell 2D Meshmaker. During the mesh refinement pro-
metric Sweeps cess, an aspect ratio for each triangle to be created is automatically calculated. Triangles
Mesh/Make whose aspect ratios are too small are not added to the finite element mesh.
Triangle Aspect Ratios
Mesh/Line Match
Point Placement
Mesh/Delete
Mesh/Display
Mesh/Information
Refine Menu

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 477 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Mesh/Line Match
Meshmaker Commands
Tool Bar Choose Mesh/Line Match to force the mesh points on a slave boundary to match the
General Procedure mesh points on its master boundary. This takes advantage of the periodicity in the prob-
Mesh Refinement lem and forces the mesh along the slave line to use the same number of vertices as on
Mesh Menu the master line.
Mesh/Seed
Mesh/Seed/Surface Warning: Keep the following in mind when using this command:
Mesh/Seed/Object
You must manually line match all matching boundaries defined using
the Setup Boundaries/Sources command.
Mesh/Seed/Skin
Mesh/Seed/QuadTree
For line matching to work, neither the master boundary nor the slave
boundary can lie along the edge of the drawing space. They must
Mesh/Seed/Delete
always border an excluded object (such as the background).
Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed
Mesh/Make
You must select at least one point on the master boundary.
Triangle Aspect Ratios > To match a master and slave boundary:
Mesh/Line Match 1. Choose Mesh/Line Match.
Point Placement 2. Select the first point of the master line. To select the point, click the left mouse
Mesh/Delete button on an object vertex that lies on the line.
Mesh/Display 3. Select the second point of the master line.
Mesh/Information 4. Select the first point of the slave line.
Refine Menu 5. Select the second point of the slave line.
Once you have selected the second point of the slave line, the new mesh will automati-
cally be generated.

Note: On matched lines, the point distributions will always match. However, the tri-
angles that abut the matched lines need not match exactly or even approxi-
mately.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 478 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Point Placement
Meshmaker Commands The order in which the first point and the second point are selected will affect the results
Tool Bar of the line match. The figure below illustrates this. The position of line segment a is dif-
General Procedure ferent on the two slave lines, even though they both are matched to the same master line.
Mesh Refinement This is because the order in which the end points were selected are opposite for the two
Mesh Menu slave lines.
Mesh/Seed
Mesh/Seed/Surface 2 2 1
Mesh/Seed/Object a
Mesh/Seed/Skin
Mesh/Seed/QuadTree
Mesh/Seed/Delete
Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed 1 a 1 a 2
Mesh/Make Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Triangle Aspect Ratios
Mesh/Line Match In general, select the slave line using the same direction that you selected the master line
Point Placement (from left to right, top to bottom, and so forth).
Mesh/Delete
Mesh/Display
Mesh/Delete
Mesh/Information Choose Mesh/Delete to delete the finite element mesh.
Refine Menu
> To delete the current mesh:
1. Choose Mesh/Delete. A message appears asking whether you are sure you want
to delete the mesh.
2. Choose OK to delete the mesh or Cancel to cancel the deletion.

Note: If you delete the mesh, all existing field or parameter solutions will also be
deleted. However, seed points are not deleted.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 479 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Mesh/Display
Meshmaker Commands
Tool Bar Choose Mesh/Display to display the finite element mesh. This command enables you to
General Procedure view or hide the following:
Mesh Refinement The triangles in the finite element mesh.
Mesh Menu Any seed points that have been added to the mesh (using the Mesh/Seed
Mesh/Seed commands).
Mesh/Seed/Surface The outlines of geometric objects.
Mesh/Seed/Object
Mesh/Seed/Skin > To display (or change the display of) the mesh:
Mesh/Seed/QuadTree 1. Choose Mesh/Display. A window appears, listing the following options:
Mesh/Seed/Delete Display Mesh Display triangles in the mesh.
Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed Display Seed Points Display the seed points in the mesh.
Mesh/Make Display Boundary Lines Display the outlines of objects in the model. This allows you
Triangle Aspect Ratios to see objects more clearly when the mesh is displayed.
Mesh/Line Match
Point Placement 2. Do one of the following:
Mesh/Delete To display one of these options, click the left mouse button on it to select it.
Mesh/Display To turn off its display, click the left mouse button on it again to deselect it.
Mesh/Information 3. Choose OK or press Return.
Refine Menu

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 480 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Mesh/Information
Meshmaker Commands
Tool Bar Choose Mesh/Information to view information on the finite element mesh. The following
General Procedure window appears when you select this command:
Mesh Refinement
Mesh Menu
Mesh/Seed
Mesh/Seed/Surface
Mesh/Seed/Object
Mesh/Seed/Skin
Mesh/Seed/QuadTree
Mesh/Seed/Delete
Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed
Mesh Seeding for Para-
metric Sweeps
Mesh/Make
Triangle Aspect Ratios
Mesh/Line Match
Point Placement
Mesh/Delete
Mesh/Display Each object in the model (including background) is listed under Object Name. The num-
Mesh/Information ber of triangles in each object is shown under # Triangles.
Refine Menu
To view the dimensions of an object, click the left mouse button on it to select it. Its dimen-
sions appear in the following fields:
Min (X) The objects minimum x-coordinate.
Min (Y) The objects minimum y-coordinate.
Max (X) The objects maximum x-coordinate.
Max (Y) The objects maximum x-coordinate.
Go Back
When you are done, choose OK to return to the 2D Meshmaker.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 481 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Refine Menu
Meshmaker Commands
Tool Bar Use the Refine commands to refine the finite element mesh. Before using these com-
General Procedure mands, either read in an existing mesh or choose Mesh/Make to generate and display the
Mesh Refinement initial finite element mesh. The Refine commands are:
Mesh Menu Point Adds points to the mesh at the triangle where you click the mouse, which
Refine Menu then become the vertices of new triangles.
Refine/Point
Area Refines the mesh within a rectangular area.
Refine/Area
Aborting an Area Object Refines the mesh within the selected object.
Refinement To abort a refinement, click the left mouse button on the Abort Refinement button, which
Refine/Object appears while the mesh is being refined.
Object Information
Refine Area and Refine
Number
Aborting an Object
Refinement

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 482 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Refine/Point
Meshmaker Commands
Tool Bar Choose Refine/Point to refine the mesh by adding points when you click the mouse. The
General Procedure points you add become the vertices of new triangles, increasing the number of triangles in
Mesh Refinement the mesh.
Mesh Menu Use this refinement method when you only need to add a few triangles to the mesh. If you
Refine Menu need to refine the mesh in a larger area or inside a specific object, use the Refine/Area or
Refine/Point Refine/Object commands.
Refine/Area
Aborting an Area Two methods for adding points to the mesh are available:
Refinement Point added at center of Point added at centroid
circumcircle of triangle
Refine/Object
Object Information
Refine Area and Refine
Number
Aborting an Object
Refinement

Circumcircle Refinement Centroid Refinement

Circumcircle The point is added at the center of a circle whose circumference is

defined by the vertices of the triangle, as shown above.
Centroid The point is added at the center of the triangle, as shown above.
More
In general, circumcircle refinement produces triangles with lower aspect ratios than cen-
troid refinement that is, the triangles added using the circumcircle method have sides
Go Back which are more nearly equal. The computation error in such triangles is generally lower
than in triangles with long, thin sides.

Contents > To refine the mesh on a point-by-point basis:

1. Choose Refine/Point. A window appears, asking you to define the method for
adding triangles to the mesh.
Index 2. Choose Circumcircle or Centroid as the method for adding triangles to the mesh.

Maxwell Online Help System 483 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement 3. Choose OK to begin adding points to the mesh. The cursor changes to a cross.
Meshmaker Commands 4. Click the left mouse button on a triangle to refine it. (Alternatively, select the point
Tool Bar with the keyboard. The 2D Meshmaker adds the point to the mesh, where it forms
General Procedure the vertex of new triangles. (The exact location of the point depends on whether
Mesh Refinement you selected Circumcircle or Centroid refinement.) It then redraws the mesh in
Mesh Menu the area where the point was added, showing the new triangles.
Refine Menu 5. To stop refining the mesh, click the right mouse button.
Refine/Point Refine/Area
Refine/Area
Aborting an Area Choose Refine/Area to refine the mesh in a rectangular area. This type of mesh refine-
Refinement ment is generally done when you want to refine the mesh in areas that:
Refine/Object Are not bounded by a geometric object (for instance, an area within the background
Object Information object where you need accurate field values).
Refine Area and Refine
Number
Overlap several objects.
Aborting an Object
Are too large for point refinement to be effective.
> To refine the mesh in the selected area:
Refinement
1. Choose Refine/Area. The cursor changes to a cross.
2. Click the left mouse button on the first diagonal corner of the rectangle.
(Alternatively, select the point with the keyboard.
3. Click the left mouse button on the second diagonal corner. (Again, as an
alternative, select the point with the keyboard.) The Area Refinement window
appears. The number of triangles that are currently in the mesh appears in the
Number of Triangles field:

More

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 484 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement 4. Enter the total number of triangles in the mesh in the Desired number of
Meshmaker Commands triangles field. The 2D Meshmaker adds points to the mesh until the total number
Tool Bar of triangles reaches the number that you specify. By default, the Desired number
General Procedure of triangles field is set to twice the number of triangles in the current mesh.
Mesh Refinement 5. Select the method for adding points to the mesh. These points then become the
Mesh Menu vertices of new triangles. Two methods for adding points are available:
Refine Menu Circumcircle The point is added at the center of a circle whose circumference is
Refine/Point defined by the vertices of the triangle.
Refine/Area Centroid The point is added at the center of the triangle.
Aborting an Area
Refinement 6. Choose OK or press Return to begin refining the mesh. A window appears,
Refine/Object allowing you to monitor the refinements progress in the following ways.
Object Information Refinement Goal View-only field showing the desired number of triangles in the
Refine Area and Refine mesh (entered in the Desired number of triangles field).
Number
Number of View-only field showing the current number of triangles in the
Aborting an Object
Triangles mesh. Updates periodically as triangles are added.
Refinement
When the 2D Meshmaker reaches the refinement goal, the mesh refinement stops.
Aborting an Area Refinement
You can abort a mesh refinement before it is complete. For instance, you may wish to stop
the refinement if you decide that the mesh in the selected area is sufficiently dense before
the refinement is finished.
> To stop the mesh refinement:
Choose Abort Refinement.
The mesh refinement stops.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 485 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Refine/Object
Meshmaker Commands
Tool Bar Choose Refine/Object to refine the mesh inside specific objects. You may specify either:
General Procedure The desired number of triangles in each object.
Mesh Refinement The minimum area of each triangle.
Mesh Menu
Refine Menu The 2D Meshmaker refines the mesh inside the object until one of these goals is reached.
Refine/Point The following window appears when you select this command:
Refine/Area
Aborting an Area
Refinement
Refine/Object
Object Information
Refine Area and Refine
Number
Aborting an Object
Refinement

More
> To refine the mesh inside an object or objects:
1. Choose Refine/Object.
Go Back 2. Select the desired object.
3. Do one or both of the following:
Enter the maximum area of the objects triangles under Refine Area.
Contents Enter the desired number of triangles inside the object under Refine Number.
4. Choose Accept. The new Refine Area and Refine Number values appear for the
Index selected object.

Maxwell Online Help System 486 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement 5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each object to be refined.
Meshmaker Commands 6. Choose Ok or press Return to begin refining the mesh in the selected objects. A
Tool Bar window appears, showing the current number of triangles in the mesh. It updates
General Procedure periodically as the 2D Meshmaker adds points to the mesh, creating new triangles.
Mesh Refinement By default, the Refine/Object command uses circumcircle refinement. When
Mesh Menu either the Refine Number or Refine Area is reached, the mesh refinement ends.
Refine Menu Object Information
Refine/Point
The view-only fields in this window display the following information for each object:
Refine/Area
Aborting an Area Object Name The name of the object.
Refinement # of Triangles The current number of triangles inside the object.
Refine/Object Goal # The desired number of triangles inside the object (initially set to
Object Information zero). Displays the number entered under Refine Number.
Refine Area and Goal Area The desired area of each triangle (initially set to zero). Displays
Refine Number the area entered under Refine Area.
Aborting an Object
Refinement
Note: If the largest triangle in an area or an object is unrefineable, the refinement
quits prematurely. A triangle becomes unrefineable when it is too small or
when a highly refined region is very close to a coarse region. To continue
with manual refinement after this happens, use the Refine/Point command.

Refine Area and Refine Number

Specify the criteria for refining the mesh inside an object in these two fields:
Refine Area The maximum desired area of each triangle in the selected object,
entered in the units used for the model (shown to the right of the
Enter button on the screen).
Refine Number The desired number of triangles inside the selected object.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 487 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement
Manual Mesh Refinement Aborting an Object Refinement
Meshmaker Commands As with the Refine/Area command, you can abort a mesh refinement for an object before
Tool Bar it is complete. For instance, you may wish to stop the refinement if you decide that the
General Procedure mesh in the selected area is sufficiently dense before the refinement is finished.
Mesh Refinement
Mesh Menu > To stop the mesh refinement:
Refine Menu Choose Abort Refinement.
Refine/Point
The mesh refinement stops.
Refine/Area
Aborting an Area
Refinement
Refine/Object
Object Information
Refine Area and Refine
Number
Aborting an Object
Refinement

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 488 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse EMpulse
Transient Excitation
Transient Motion The transient solver allows you to analyze the magnetic fields, energy, force, power loss,
General Procedure speed, and flux of a model at various time steps of a solution over a specified period of
View Window time. This solver allows for non-sinusoidal current or voltage excitation, as well as rota-
Modifying the Motion Status tional or translational motion defined in the Motion Setup window.
Setup
This solver becomes available only when the EMpulse license has been installed. Solvers
Exiting the Motion Setup
for packages that you have not purchased or have not yet entered an authorization
codeword for cannot be selected and are disabled. See the Maxwell Installation Guide
for instructions on entering codewords for the various solver packages.

Note: Only access the Motion Setup window when you need to define the motion
on objects. For non-sinusoidal input problems, you need to define only the
attributes of the model and generate the solutions as you would for a static
model.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 489 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse Transient Excitation
Transient Excitation
Transient Motion The transient solver allows for non-sinusoidal excitation such as square waves or harmon-
General Procedure ically distorted waveforms. Transient voltage sources can be assigned to solid or stranded
View Window conductors. Transient current sources can be assigned to solid or stranded conductors as
Modifying the Motion Status either a current or current density.
Setup
For example, using the Functions button, you may assign a 120 volt, 60 Hz fundamental
Exiting the Motion Setup
harmonic voltage source with a 20 volt, 5 kHz harmonic waveform superimposed on top.
The resulting wave can then be analyzed at each time step of the solution.

Go Back

Contents
Here, the time-dependent voltage is given byV=120 sin(60*360*t)+20 sin(5000*360*t).
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 490 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse Transient Motion
Transient Excitation
Transient Motion The transient solver allows for the motion of various objects within the model. Transla-
Motion Attributes tional or rotational motion are possible.
Units of Motion
The transient solver assumes the following conditions about the problem:
Motion Setup
General Procedure If motion occurs in the model, no motion occurs outside the band object. The band
View Window object is the object within which all moving objects are contained.
Modifying the Motion Status Only one type of motion (translational or rotational) occurs in the model.
Setup More than one object can be assigned identical motion within the band object.
Exiting the Motion Setup
Motion Attributes
Motion attributes are set by selecting only the band object in the Motion Setup window.
Once an object has been defined as a band, the software automatically determines which
objects are inside and marks them as moving.
Moving objects may possess either translational or rotational motion.

Note: RZ models can only possess translational motion, with their direction of
motion restricted to the z-axis.

Units of Motion
The solver outputs the resulting plots of speed in the units you specified for the motion in
the Mechanical Setup window.
For rotational problems, speed is given in either rpm or degrees/sec, depending on what
you select for the units in the Mechanical Setup window. For translational problems, the
speed is given in the defined unit of length (millimeters, inches, feet, and so forth) per sec-
ond.
Go Back
Similarly, all variables defined in the Motion Setup Symbol Table are evaluated in the
units defined in the Mechanical Setup window. Thus, any functional values you define
Contents retain their units throughout the solution process.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 491 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse Motion Setup
Transient Excitation
Transient Motion If you have purchased the license for the time-stepping analysis package, EMpulse, and
Motion Attributes selected Transient as the solver type, choose Motion Setup from the Setup Solution
Units of Motion menu to do the following:
Motion Setup Define the translational or rotational motion of an object.
General Procedure Specify which objects are mobile and which are stationary.
View Window Analyze the motion at various time steps during the solution.
Modifying the Motion Status
Setup The Motion Setup window appears, showing the current model:
Exiting the Motion Setup

All existing objects and their respective movement attributes are listed in the box on the
left side of the Motion Setup window. This area lists any undefined objects as stationary.
The model appears in the display area in the upper right side of the window. If you select
the name of an object, the object in the viewing window is highlighted and any information
Go Back about the object appears below the viewing window.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 492 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse General Procedure
Transient Excitation
Transient Motion The general procedure for setting up and solving a transient model is as follows.
General Procedure
> To define the transient model:
Mechanical Setup
1. Choose Motion Setup from the Executive Commands menu. The Motion Setup
Functional Mechanical
window appears.
Values
2. Toggle Single Select or Multi Select to define the single or multi-selection.
Deleting Symbols
3. From the Select menu, choose the method of selection. Choose Deselect at any
Functional Parameter
time to deselect all selected objects.
Values
Modifying the Motion
Choose By Area to select the objects in a defined area. To select objects by area:
a. Choose By Area from the menu. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
Setup
b. In the viewing window, click on the first corner of the box in whose area the
Rotational Motion
objects will be selected.
Translational Motion
c. Click on the opposite corner of the box. All objects contained within the box
View Window
are selected.
Modifying the Motion Status
Click the right mouse button at any time to end the command without selecting an
Setup
object.
Exiting the Motion Setup
Choose By Name to select an object by clicking on the name in the object list.
Choose All Objects to select all the objects in the model.
4. Optionally, select the object whose motion is to be defined. For non-sinusoidal
inputs, do not modify the motion attributes of any objects. By default, all objects in
the model are stationary.
5. If motion occurs in the problem, define the object types as follows:
Select Set Band to define the object as a band object. A band object is a
stationary object that contains the moving objects in the model. Once a band
object is selected, all objects within it are given Moving attributes. Select Unset
More Band to make all objects stationary.
For objects with rotational motion, do the following:
a. Select Rotation as the Type of Motion. Rotational motion moves the
Go Back object about a defined point.
b. Choose Set Position. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
Contents c. Double-click on the center of rotation in the viewing window or enter the U
and V coordinates in the coordinates fields at the bottom of the window.
d. Enter the Positive and Negative rotation limits in their respective fields.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 493 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse For objects with translational motion, do the following:
Transient Excitation a. Select Translation as the Type of Motion. Translational motion slides the
Transient Motion object along a defined path.
General Procedure b. For XY models, select x-axis or y-axis as the Direction of Motion or
Mechanical Setup select the angle from a-axis field and enter the angle of translation from
Functional Mechanical the x-axis.
Values c. For RZ models, select either positive z-axis or negative z-axis as the
Deleting Symbols Direction of Motion.
Functional Parameter d. Under Translation Limits enter the Positive and Negative limits of motion.
Values These values refer to the deviation of position from the initial point.
Modifying the Motion 6. Enter the initial position of the point of motion in the Initial Pos field.
Setup 7. Choose Mechanical Setup and define the inertia, torque, and basic motion
Rotational Motion settings.
Translational Motion 8. Choose Exit. A window appears, prompting you to save your settings before
View Window exiting. Do one of the following:
Modifying the Motion Status Choose Yes to save the motion setup and exit.
Setup Choose No to exit the window and ignore any changes.
Exiting the Motion Setup Choose Cancel to remain within the Motion Setup window.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 494 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse Mechanical Setup
Transient Excitation
Transient Motion Choose this to define the mechanical parameters of the motion setup. This allows you to
General Procedure specify the basic physical constraints of motion prior to executing the simulation.
Mechanical Setup > To define the mechanical parameters:
Functional Mechanical 1. Choose Mechanical Setup. The Mechanical Setup window appears.
Values 2. Do one of the following:
Deleting Symbols For rotational motion, leave Consider Mechanical Transient selected to keep the
Functional Parameter setup fields active and enter the following values in their respective fields:
Values The Initial Angular Velocity of the moving object.
Modifying the Motion Optionally, select rpm or degrees/sec as the units for the initial velocity.
Setup This setting also determines in which units to output the velocity.
Rotational Motion The Moment of Inertia on the rotating object in kg/m2.
Translational Motion The Damping, in N.m.s/rad.
View Window The Load Torque on the system, entered in N.m.
Modifying the Motion Status For translational motion, leave Consider Mechanical Transient selected to keep
Setup the setup fields active and enter the following values in their respective fields:
Exiting the Motion Setup The Initial Velocity of the moving object in mm/sec.
The Mass of the moving object in kg.
The Damping, in N.s/m.
The Load Force, in N.
For either motion type, deselect Consider Mechanical Transient when you wish
to define the angular velocity of the system as a constant. Enter the constant value
in the Constant Velocity or Constant Angular Velocity fields.
3. Optionally, choose Options to select any parameters you wish to make functional.
A window appears, prompting you to set the Damping, Load, or Velocity as
functional parameters. Select any values you wish to make functional and choose
OK to accept the options. The window closes.
4. Optionally, choose Functions to access the Motion Setup Symbol Table and
Go Back define any functional values.
5. Choose OK to accept the setup or Cancel to cancel the assignment.

Contents You return to the Motion Setup window.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 495 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse Functional Mechanical Values
Transient Excitation When you choose Functions from the Mechanical Setup window, an expression evalua-
Transient Motion tor appears, listing the defined functions and their values:
General Procedure
Mechanical Setup
Functional Mechanical
Values
Deleting Symbols
Functional Parameter
Values
Modifying the Motion
Setup
Rotational Motion
Translational Motion
View Window
Modifying the Motion Status
Setup
Exiting the Motion Setup
> To define the functions:
1. Select the function from the Name list or enter a new functional symbol in the blank
field to the left of the equals sign. By default, P is the position variable, S is the
speed variable, and T is the time variable.
2. Optionally, choose Dataset and define a set of piecewise linear expressions.
3. Enter the value of the function in the field to the right of the equals sign.
4. Do one of the following:
Choose Update to assign the new definition to an existing variable.
Choose Add to add a newly defined symbol to the table.
5. Choose Done to close the window.

Go Back You return to the Mechanical Setup window.

Deleting Symbols
Contents > To delete a symbol from the expression evaluator:
1. Select the name of the symbol to delete.
2. Choose Delete.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 496 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse Functional Parameter Values
Transient Excitation In EMpulse, the type of conductor in the model determines its range of functional vari-
Transient Motion ables.
General Procedure
Mechanical Setup Source Variables
Functional Mechanical The following range of functional source variables are available for their respective con-
Values ductors:
Deleting Symbols
Functional Parameter Perfect conductor Total current source Func(p,s,t)
Values Solid conductor Current source Func(p,s,t)
Modifying the Motion Voltage source Func(p,s,t)
Setup Stranded conductor Current density Func(x,y,p,t,r,z)
Rotational Motion Current source Func(p,s,t)
Translational Motion
Voltage source Func(p,s,t)
View Window
Modifying the Motion Status Winding Variables
Setup
Exiting the Motion Setup The following range of functional variables are available for windings:
Polarity Func(p,s,t)
Resistance Func(p,s,t)
Inductance Func(p,s,t)
Capacitance Func(p,s,t)

Solid Conductor Variables

The following range of functional variables are available for solid conductors:
End resistance Must be constant.
End inductance Must be constant.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 497 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse Mechanical Transient Variables
Transient Excitation The following functional variables are available for mechanical transient setups:
Transient Motion
General Procedure Initial Velocity Func(p,s,t)
Mechanical Setup Load Force Func(p,s,t)
Functional Mechanical Damping Func(p,s,t)
Values
Deleting Symbols Magnetization and Value Boundary Variables
Functional Parameter The following functional variables are available for the magnetization and value bound-
Values aries in the model:
Modifying the Motion
Setup Value boundary Func(x,y,r,z)
Rotational Motion Magnetization angle Func(x,y,r,z)
Translational Motion Magnet, Hcx Func(x,y,r,z)
View Window Magnet, Hcy Func(x,y,r,z)
Modifying the Motion Status
Setup
Exiting the Motion Setup

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 498 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse Modifying the Motion Setup
Transient Excitation
Transient Motion Once a motion setup has been specified, you can modify its motion attributes.
General Procedure > To modify the existing motion setup for an object:
Mechanical Setup 1. Select the object to modify. The selected object is highlighted in the viewing
Functional Mechanical window.
Values 2. Define the type of object as follows:
Deleting Symbols Choose Set Band to define the object as a band object. The band object is a
Functional Parameter stationary object that contains the moving objects in the model. Once a band
Values object is selected, all objects within it are given Moving attributes, while all objects
Modifying the Motion outside it are given Stationary attributes. Select Unset Band to make all objects
Setup stationary.
Rotational Motion Select Rotation as the Type of Motion. Rotational motion moves the object about
Translational Motion a defined point. For objects with rotational motion, do the following:
View Window a. Choose Set Position. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
Modifying the Motion Status b. Double-click on the center of rotation in the viewing window or enter the U
Setup and V coordinates in the coordinates fields at the bottom of the window.
Exiting the Motion Setup c. Enter the Positive and Negative rotation limits in their respective fields.
Select Translation as the Type of Motion. Translational motion slides the object
along a defined path. For objects with translational motion, do the following:
a. For XY models, select x-axis or y-axis as the Direction of Motion or
select angle from x-axis field and enter the angle of translation from the x-
axis.
b. For RZ models select positive z-axis or negative z-axis as the Direction
of Motion.
c. Under Translation Limits enter the Positive and Negative limits of motion.
These values refer to the deviation of the position from the initial point.
3. Enter the initial position of the moving object in the Initial Pos field.
4. Choose Exit. A window appears, prompting you to save your settings before
Go Back exiting. Do one of the following:
Choose Yes to save the motion setup and exit.
Choose No to exit the window and ignore any changes.
Contents Choose Cancel to remain within the Motion Status Setup window.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 499 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse Rotational Motion
Transient Excitation
Transient Motion Use rotational motion for objects that rotate about a specified point in a system. The rotat-
General Procedure ing object must be contained within a band object. No part of the rotating object may
Mechanical Setup come in contact with the band object.
Functional Mechanical > To define the rotational motion of an object:
Values 1. Select the Moving object for which to define the motion.
Deleting Symbols 2. Select Rotation as the type of motion.
Functional Parameter 3. Choose Set Position. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
Values 4. Define the center of rotation in one of the following ways:
Modifying the Motion Double-click on the center of rotation in the viewing window.
Setup Enter the U and V coordinates in their respective fields and choose Enter.
Rotational Motion 5. Enter the Positive and Negative rotation limits in their respective fields.
Translational Motion 6. Enter the initial position of the object in the Initial Pos field.
View Window
Modifying the Motion Status An X appears in the viewing window, marking the point around which the selected object
Setup rotates.
Exiting the Motion Setup Translational Motion
Use translational motion for objects that move from one point to another along a specified
path. Objects with translational motion are constrained to move within a surrounding band
object.
> To define the translational motion of an object:
1. Select the Moving object for which to define the motion.
2. Select Translation as the type of motion.
3. For XY models, select x-axis or y-axis as the Direction of motion or select angle
from x-axis field and enter the angle of translation from the x-axis.
4. For RZ models select positive z-axis or negative z-axis as the Direction of
Motion.
Go Back 5. Under Translation Limits enter the Positive and Negative limits of motion. These
values refer to the deviation from the initial position.
6. Enter the initial position of the object in the Initial Pos field.
Contents
An arrow appears in the viewing window, indicating both the direction and distance of the
displacement.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 500 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse View Window
Transient Excitation
Transient Motion The view window allows you to see the various objects in the model as you assign materi-
General Procedure als to them.
View Window
Changing the View of
Changing the View of the Geometric Model
the Geometric Model Once the model appears on the screen, use the commands that appear beneath the win-
Modifying the Motion Status dow to change your view of it.
Setup
Exiting the Motion Setup Zoom In
> To zoom in on a section of the geometric model:
1. Choose Zoom In.
2. Click the left mouse button on a point at one corner of the area to enlarge.
3. Click the left mouse button on the diagonal corner of the area.
The system then expands the portion of the structure in the selected region to fill
the view window. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modeler
Window/Change View/Zoom In command.
Zoom Out
> To zoom out of a section of the geometric model:
1. Choose Zoom Out.
2. Click the left mouse button on a point at one corner of the area to reduce.
3. Click the left mouse button on the diagonal corner of the area.
The system then redraws the screen and shrinks the model to fit in the selected
region. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modelers Window/
Change View/Zoom Out command.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 501 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse Fit All
Transient Excitation Choose Fit All to view the entire geometric model in the display area. The Maxwell 2D
Transient Motion automatically adjusts the field of view, making all objects as large as possible while keep-
General Procedure ing the entire structure visible. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modelers
View Window Window/Change View/Fit All command.
Changing the View of
the Geometric Model Fit Drawing
Modifying the Motion Status Choose Fit Drawing to display the entire drawing region. The drawing region is defined
Setup using the command Model/Drawing Size. This command works in the same way as the
Exiting the Motion Setup 2D Modelers Window/Change View/Fit Drawing command.
Fill Solids
Choose Fill Solids to display closed geometric objects as filled-in solids. By default, only
the outlines of object borders are displayed. Choosing Fill Solids for complex geometries
allows you to better visualize the relationships between each object in the model.
The Fill Solids and Wire Frame commands work in the same way as the 2D Modelers
Window/Change View/Fill Solids and Window/Change View/Wire Frame commands.
Wire Frame
After you choose Fill Solids, its button toggles to Wire Frame. Choose Wire Frame to
switch back to a wire frame view of the geometric model.
Window Commands
The Motion Setup windows Window commands do the following:
Measure Displays the distance between two selected points.
Grid Defines the grid settings in the viewing window.
SnapTo Mode Toggles the snap mode on and off for grids and vertices.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 502 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse Window/Measure
Transient Excitation Choose this command to measure the distances between two points.
Transient Motion
General Procedure > To measure the distances:
View Window 1. Choose Window/Measure. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
Changing the View of 2. Select the first point from which to measure.
the Geometric Model 3. Select the second point. The Measurement window appears, listing the selected
Modifying the Motion Status points, offset, distance, and relative angle.
Setup 4. Choose OK to close the window.
Exiting the Motion Setup 5. Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
Window/Grid
Choose this command to define the grid settings for the viewing window.
> To define the grid settings:
1. Choose Window/Grid. The Grid Settings window appears.
2. Select Cartesian or Polar and enter the spacing values for dU and dV or dR and
dTheta.
3. Optionally, choose Suggested Spacing to use the default grid values if they have
been modified.
4. Toggle Grid Visible to select whether the grid is visible in the viewing window. The
grid is visible by default.
5. Toggle Draw Key to select whether the coordinate arrows (or draw key) are
visible. The draw key is visible by default.
6. Choose OK to accept the grid settings or Cancel to cancel the grid changes.
Window/SnapTo Mode
Choose this command to define the snap-to settings. Snaps define how close a point
comes to touching a grid point or axis point.
> To define the snap-to settings:
Go Back 1. Choose Window/SnapTo Mode. The SnapTo Mode window appears.
2. Toggle Snap to grid on or off to set the snaps on or off the grid lines.
3. Toggle Snap to vertex on or off to set the snaps on or off the vertices.
Contents 4. Choose OK to accept the snap-to settings or Cancel to cancel the changes.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 503 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D EMpulse
EMpulse Modifying the Motion Status Setup
Transient Excitation
Transient Motion If you choose Motion Setup after generating a field solution, the following message
General Procedure appears:
View Window
If you make changes to the motion status setup and save those
Modifying the Motion Sta-
changes, the transient solution data will be deleted and will
tus Setup
have to be recomputed. Pick View Only if no changes are to
Exiting the Motion Setup
be saved, Modify if changes are to be saved or Cancel to
cancel this operation.
> Do one of the following:
Choose View Only to access EMpulse in view-only mode. You will be able to select
and view all motion parameters; however, you will not be able to change them.
Choose Modify to change the existing motion parameters. Note that you must re-
solve the problem after doing so.
Choose Cancel to return to the Executive Commands menu.
Exiting the Motion Setup
Once the motion setup is complete, exit the Motion Setup window and save your set-
tings.
> To save the motion settings and exit:
1. Choose Exit. A window appears, prompting you to save your settings before
exiting.
2. Do one of the following:
Choose Yes to save the motion setup and exit.
Choose No to exit the window and ignore any changes.
Choose Cancel to remain within the Motion Setup window.
The Motion Setup window closes. You return to the Executive Commands window.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 504 Copyright 1998-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Solution Setup
Setting up a Parametric Setting up a Parametric Solution
Solution
Setup Solution/Options Maxwell 2D with parametrics has two commands for setting up the solution process.
Setup Solution/Variables Choose them from Setup Solution in the Executive Commands menu.
Parametric Solution
Options Commands Setup Solution/Options
Parametric Solution
Options Tool Bar This window is visually identical to the one described in the nominal solution documenta-
General Procedure tion. The functional differences are as follows:
Selecting Cells Choosing Current as the starting mesh will allow variable solutions to be completed
Editing Individual Cells faster. Choosing Initial causes the solver to use the initial mesh to begin solving each
Setup Solution/Variable Con- variation. When Current is selected, the solver will use the most refined mesh
trol available if the project geometry has not changed from a previous variation.
Configuring the Control Set- Manual meshing only affects the basic (or nominal) setup. It has no meaning for
tings variable solutions.
Motor Configuration Solve for: Fields is always considered to be turned on, regardless of the state of the
Optimization Configuration checkbox.
Adaptive Analysis is always considered to be turned on, regardless of the state of
the checkbox.
Frequency is always considered a variable, and can be used during a parametric
solution. The frequency you specify here will be used as the nominal value.
You may wish to request fewer solution passes, since the solver will attempt that many
passes for each variation.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 505 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Solution Setup
Setting up a Parametric Setup Solution/Variables
Solution
Setup Solution/Options Choose this command to access the parametric table, which allows you to:
Setup Solution/Variables
Parametric Solution
Define which variables to use for a variable solution.
Options Commands
Display the current list of variables and their values
Parametric Solution When you choose Setup Solution/Variables from the Executive Commands menu, the
Options Tool Bar following window appears:
General Procedure
Selecting Cells
Editing Individual Cells
Setup Solution/Variable Con-
trol
Configuring the Control Set-
tings
Motor Configuration
Optimization Configuration

The icons in the tool bar execute commands that are also on the menus.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 506 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Solution Setup
Setting up a Parametric Parametric Solution Options Commands
Solution
Setup Solution/Options The following menus are available when setting up a parametric solution:
Setup Solution/Variables File Use the File commands to open existing files, to save the spread-
Parametric Solution sheet being created to disk files, and to exit.
Options Commands Edit Lets you edit cells in the table and insert or delete rows (parametric
Parametric Solution setups).
Options Tool Bar Variables Lets you add, delete, animate, and view variables in the parameter
General Procedure sweep.
Selecting Cells Data Lets you specify variable values for a parameter sweep.
Editing Individual Cells
Window Use the Window commands to select the active project window, to
Setup Solution/Variable Con-
create new subwindows, and to manipulate project windows and sub-
trol
windows.
Configuring the Control Set-
tings Parametric Solution Options Tool Bar
Motor Configuration
Optimization Configuration The icons in the tool bar execute commands that are also on the menus. The definitions
of the tool bar icons are shown below:

Data/Fill
Data/Sweep
Data/Sort

Edit/Deselect All

Variables/Animate

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 507 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Solution Setup
Setting up a Parametric General Procedure
Solution
> The general procedure for creating a table of values for parametric solutions is as
Setup Solution/Options
follows:
Setup Solution/Variables
1. Choose Setup Solution/Variables from the Executive Commands menu.
Parametric Solution
2. Use the Variables/Add command in the table editor to add variable columns to the
Options Commands
table for each variable you wish to vary in the parametric solution.
Parametric Solution
3. Use the Data/Sweep command in the table editor to add rows to the table for each
Options Tool Bar
setup you wish to solve.
General Procedure
4. Save the table, and exit the table editor using the commands on the File menu.
Selecting Cells
Editing Individual Cells
Setup Solution/Variable Con-
Selecting Cells
trol You can select cells in a variety of ways:
Configuring the Control Set-
tings Click Select a single cell.
Motor Configuration Click & Drag Select a rectangular region of cells.
Optimization Configuration Shift-click Extend the rectangular selection to include the target cell.
Control-click Add a disconnected cell to the selection.
Control-click & Drag Add a disconnected rectangular region to the selection.

Performing the above actions on a column or row heading selects those columns or rows.
When working with the table, commands are only executed on the current selection. For
instance, if you select the Variables/Animate command with five rows selected, only
those five rows are animated. If no cells are selected, the command operates on all the
rows in the table.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 508 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Solution Setup
Setting up a Parametric Editing Individual Cells
Solution
Setup Solution/Options Once you have an individual cell selected, you can edit its contents by directly replacing
Setup Solution/Variables the value in the cell, or with the fields at the bottom of the active window:
Parametric Solution
Options Commands
Parametric Solution
Options Tool Bar > To change the values manually:
General Procedure 1. Select the cell or cells you wish to edit. The value of that cell appears in the entry
Selecting Cells field. The coordinates of the cell appear to the right of the entry field.
Editing Individual Cells 2. Do one of the following:
Setup Solution/Variable Con-
trol
Double-click on the selected cell and enter a new value for it.
Configuring the Control Set-
Use the Value field to edit the value:
a. Click in the Value field at the bottom of the window and enter a new value
tings
for the cell. If you are editing a boolean (yes/no) cell of the table, only a Y
Motor Configuration
registers as a yes. Any other letter or number registers as a no.
Optimization Configuration
b. Choose Enter. If the value you have entered is not legal for any of the
selected cells (for instance, if you have both boolean and numeric cells
selected) then Enter will not be enabled.
The value of the cell is now changed.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 509 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Solution Setup
Setting up a Parametric Setup Solution/Variable Control
Solution
Setup Solution/Options Once the parametric table has been defined, choose this command to define the control
Setup Solution/Variables program to use during the solution.
Parametric Solution
> To define the control program:
Options Commands
1. Define the parametric table.
Parametric Solution
2. Choose Setup Solution/Variable Control. The following window appears:
Options Tool Bar
General Procedure
Selecting Cells
Editing Individual Cells
Setup Solution/Variable
Control
Configuring the Control Set-
tings
Motor Configuration
Optimization Configuration

3. Select Use control program to activate the fields and commands and define the
table control settings.
4. Optionally, choose Motor to use the default motor control program. Once you
choose Motor, the control program name appears in the Program Name field.
5. Optionally, choose Optimize to use the default optimization program. Once you
choose Optimize, the optimization program name appears in the Program Name
field.
6. Optionally, choose Configure to configure the selected control program settings.
7. Choose OK to accept the control settings.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 510 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Solution Setup
Setting up a Parametric Configuring the Control Settings
Solution
Setup Solution/Options Once you have selected a control program, you can configure it for more appropriate set-
Setup Solution/Variables tings.
Parametric Solution
Options Commands
Motor Configuration
Parametric Solution If you selected Motor as the control program, choose Configure to define the motor set-
Options Tool Bar tings. Note that you must have a license for Maxwell EMSS for this command to become
General Procedure active.
Selecting Cells
Editing Individual Cells > To define the motor settings:
Setup Solution/Variable Con- 1. After selecting Motor as the type of control program, choose Configure. The
trol EMSS Motor Setup window appears.
Configuring the Control 2. Select the Machine Type to use from the pull-down menu. The core specifications
Settings for the motor appear in the Value list.
Motor Configuration 3. Optionally, select Do Transient Parameters to perform a time-stepping parametric
Optimization Configura- analysis for the motor.
tion 4. Enter a Description for the program in the blank field.
5. Select Wye or Delta as the type of winding used in the motor.
6. Choose OK.
Optimization Configuration
If you selected Optimize as the control program, choose Configure to define the optimi-
zation settings.
> To define the motor settings:
1. After selecting Optimize as the type of control program, choose Configure. The
Optimization Program window appears.
2. Select the Objective from the pull-down menu. This allows you to locate the root,
minimum, or maximum value for the optimization.
3. Select the Input Variable from the pull-down menu.
Go Back 4. Select the Output Variable.
5. Enter the Minimum and Maximum values for the optimization range.
Contents 6. Enter the Target Value for the solution.
7. Enter the acceptable Percent Error for the convergence of the solution.
8. Choose OK. The optimization settings are now defined.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 511 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Solve
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- Once you have specified the solution options, choose Solve (or Solve/Nominal Prob-
cess lem, if you have a license for the Parametrics or Transient modules) from the Maxwell 2D
Monitoring the Solution Pro- Executive Commands menu. The system then starts to generate a solution for your prob-
cess lem.
Aborting the Solution Pro-
This chapter describes the general solution process. It also describes how to:
cess
Stopping and Restarting the Monitor the solution to verify that it is converging.
Solution Process View the matrices, forces, torques, and other solutions that are computed.
Refreshing the Plot Monitor the computing resources that were used in the solution process.
Viewing the Geometric View the geometric model.
Model If you have a parametrics license, view the parametric solutions.
Viewing Executive Parame-
ter Solutions Use the Variables, Convergence, Solutions, Profile, and Model buttons (which appear
Viewing Convergence Data at the top of the Executive Commands window) to perform these tasks.
Viewing Profile Data
Note: Forces and torques are computed after each adaptive pass of the general
field solution; inductance, impedance, conductance and capacitance are
computed using the final mesh generated during the field solution. There-
fore, adequate refinement of the mesh during the field solution increases the
accuracy of executive parameter solutions.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 512 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Generating Solutions
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- Once you have setup the solutions, you can generate them.
cess
> To compute a solution, do one of the following:
Monitoring the Solution Pro-
cess
If you do not have the license for the parametrics module, choose Solve.
Aborting the Solution Pro- If you have the license for the parametrics module, choose Solve/Nominal Problem.
cess Maxwell 2D then begins the process of adaptively refining the finite element mesh and
Stopping and Restarting the computing the requested field and parameter solutions. The exact solution process
Solution Process depends on the options you selected under Setup Solution and Setup Executive
Refreshing the Plot Parameters. (For instance, you can perform a single, non-adaptive field or parameter
Viewing the Geometric solution.) The general adaptive solution process is described below.
Model
Viewing Executive Parame- If no finite element mesh exists, the simulator creates one. Initially, this mesh is very
ter Solutions coarse. When an adaptive solution is performed, the mesh is refined (broken down
Viewing Convergence Data into smaller triangles) in areas of high error.
Viewing Profile Data The simulator then solves for the electric or magnetic field in the model, using the field
solver you selected. During the solution, it computes the field at each node (triangle
vertex) in the mesh. Field values inside the triangles are interpolated from these nodal
values, allowing you to treat the solution as being continuous over the problem region.
If you requested a force, torque, current flow or flux linkage solution under Setup
Executive Parameters, the simulator computes these quantities next. Additionally, if
an eddy current, eddy axial, DC conduction, or AC conduction field solution is being
performed, the simulator computes the total power loss. This lets you see whether
these quantities are converging along with the field solution.
After the field and parameter solutions are complete, the simulator performs an error
analysis in each triangle in the mesh. The triangles with the highest energy error are
broken down into smaller triangles producing a more accurate solution in these
areas.

Go Back The simulator repeats this process until the convergence criteria you specified under
Setup Solution Options are satisfied either by completing the specified number of
adaptive passes (solve refine cycles) or by meeting the error energy stopping criterion.
Contents If you requested a matrix solution under Setup Executive Parameters, the simulator
computes it when the adaptive solution process is finished.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 513 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Completing the Solution Process
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution After all nominal and parametric solutions have been computed, a window appears, telling
Process you that the solution process is complete.
Monitoring the Solution
Choose OK to close the window and return to the Executive Commands menu.
Process
Aborting the Solution Pro-
cess
Monitoring the Solution Process
Stopping and Restarting the As the field solutions and parameter solutions are being generated, the following progress
Solution Process bars appear in the Solution Monitoring area:
Refreshing the Plot
Viewing the Geometric Making Initial Mesh indicates that the initial finite element mesh is being created.
Model Solving Fields Indicates that the simulator is generating a field solution. A
Viewing Executive Parame- progress bar appears for each adaptive pass or non-adaptive
ter Solutions solution. Messages describing the steps the field solver per-
Viewing Convergence Data forms during the solution appear beneath the progress bar.
Viewing Profile Data Refining Mesh Indicates that the simulator is adaptively refining the finite ele-
ment mesh based on the error residual of the last field solu-
tion. This progress bar appears once for each adaptive pass.
Solving For: Indicates that the adaptive analysis is complete and that the
Matrix/ simulator is now computing one of the parameters requested
Force/Torque/ under Setup Executive Parameters. Messages describing
Flux Linkage/ the steps the field solver performs during the parameter solu-
Current Flow/ tion appear beneath the progress bar. The solver selected by
Number Registers/ the user and the model determine which parameters are avail-
Transient able for solution

> To view information about a solution as its being computed, do the following:
To monitor information such as the total energy, the percent error energy, and so
forth, choose Convergence from the top of the Executive Commands window after
Go Back the first adaptive solution is complete.
To monitor information such as CPU time and memory usage, choose Profile from the
Contents top of the Executive Commands window after the first adaptive solution is complete.
When the solution process is complete, a message appears. Press Enter or choose OK
Index to close the message window.

Maxwell Online Help System 514 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Aborting the Solution Process
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- Choose Abort to abort the solution process. The Abort button appears in the Solution
cess Monitoring area of the screen once the solution process has begun.
Monitoring the Solution Pro-
cess Note: When you choose Abort, Maxwell 2D stops the solution process and deletes
Aborting the Solution Pro- all incomplete intermediary solution data. Any intermediary data that was
cess already complete such as refined meshes, previous adaptive field solu-
Stopping and Restarting tions and previous parameter solutions are saved. For example, if you
the Solution Process abort the solution between the third and fourth adaptive passes, the solu-
Refreshing the Plot tions from the third pass are still available.
Viewing the Geometric
Model Stopping and Restarting the Solution Process
Viewing Executive Parame-
ter Solutions EMpulse - Transient Solver only.
Viewing Convergence Data
You can stop the transient solution at any time by choosing Stop.
Viewing Profile Data
When you choose Stop, a window appears informing you that the solver will stop generat-
ing the solution once it has completed the current pass.
Once stopped, the transient solution can be restarted, resuming the solution generation
from its last completed pass, and continuing to refine the solution until the specified error
has been achieved.

Refreshing the Plot

EMpulse - Transient Solver only.
Choose Refresh during the solution process to refresh any visible plots from the Solu-
tions menu. The plots are redrawn to their most recent values.

Go Back Viewing the Geometric Model

After displaying solution, convergence, or profile information, choose Model from the top
Contents of the Executive Commands window to view the geometric model again.
Use the Zoom In, Zoom Out, Fit All, Wire Frame, Fill Solids, and Fit Drawing buttons
Index to change your view of the model.

Maxwell Online Help System 515 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Viewing Executive Parameter Solutions
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- After the solution process is done, choose Solutions from the Executive Commands win-
cess dow to view the final matrix, force, torque, flux linkage, or current flow results. The follow-
Monitoring the Solution Pro- ing commands appear in the Solutions menu:
cess
Aborting the Solution Pro-
Matrix
cess
Force/Torque
Stopping and Restarting the Flux Lines
Solution Process Flux Linkage
Refreshing the Plot Current Flow
Viewing the Geometric Core Loss (Eddy Current only).
Model Number Registers
Viewing Executive Param- Transient Data (EMpulse only).
eter Solutions
Choose the parameter to view the solution for. Depending on which field solver you
Viewing Convergence Data
selected for the model, some of these parameters may not appear. Those for which no
Viewing Profile Data
solutions have been computed are greyed out and cannot be accessed.

Note: The Solution menu does not allow you to view or analyze the field solution.
Choose Post Process from the Executive Commands menu to analyze solu-
tion data.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 516 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Solutions/Matrix
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- If a matrix solution was computed, choose Solutions/Matrix to display the results. For
cess example, the following capacitance matrix was computed for a three-conductor microstrip
Monitoring the Solution Pro- line:
cess
Aborting the Solution Pro-
cess
Stopping and Restarting the
Solution Process
Refreshing the Plot
Viewing the Geometric
Model
Viewing Executive Param-
eter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data
Viewing Profile Data

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 517 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Viewing a Matrix
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- The name of each conductor in the matrix is displayed in the appropriate row and column.
cess The units for each type of matrix are:
Monitoring the Solution Pro- Farads for capacitance.
cess Henries for inductance.
Aborting the Solution Pro- Siemens/meter for conductance.
cess Impedance is given in the form Z=(R,L), where R is in ohms and L is in henries. All
Stopping and Restarting the impedances are complex numbers in the form Z=R+jL, where is 2 times the
Solution Process frequency of the AC voltages and currents during the solution.
Refreshing the Plot Admittance is given in the form Y=(G,C), where G is in mhos per meter and C is in
Viewing the Geometric farads per meter. All admittances are complex numbers in the form Y=G+jC, where
Model is 2 times the frequency of the AC voltages during the solution.
Viewing Executive Param-
eter Solutions If more values than can fit on the screen are available, use the scroll bars on the bottom
Viewing Convergence Data and right side of the display area to view the rest of the matrix. For more information on
Viewing Profile Data capacitance, inductance, impedance, conductance, and admittance matrices, click here.
Distributed Maxwell
Initially, distributed matrix values the per meter capacitance, inductance, impedance,
admittance or conductance values are displayed. The Distributed label appears after the
matrix name at the top of the display.
Lumped Maxwell
Choose Lumped to display lumped matrix values that is, the total capacitance, induc-
tance, admittance, impedance or conductance for the actual length of the structure. This
enables you to determine the net coupling.
> To display the lumped matrix values:
1. Choose Lumped. A window appears.
Go Back 2. Enter the length of the structure. For instance, if a device is 2 mm in length, enter
.002. All matrix values will then be multiplied by .002 meters. The Lumped label
appears after the matrix name at the top of the display area when a lumped matrix
Contents is being displayed. The length of the structure is also indicated.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 518 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Distributed SPICE
Generating Solutions Select this to view the distributed SPICE matrix.
Completing the Solution Pro-
cess > To view the matrix:
Monitoring the Solution Pro- Choose Distributed SPICE from the pull-down menu
cess
The Distributed SPICE Matrix appears.
Aborting the Solution Pro-
cess Lumped SPICE
Stopping and Restarting the
Select this option to view the lumped SPICE matrix.
Solution Process
Refreshing the Plot > To view the matrix:
Viewing the Geometric Choose Lumped SPICE from the pull-down menu
Model
The Lumped SPICE matrix appears.
Viewing Executive Param-
eter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data
Viewing Profile Data

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 519 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Coupling Coefficient
Generating Solutions Choose this to display normalized matrix values. This option and the Matrix Norm display
Completing the Solution Pro- are useful when analyzing the results of a capacitance, inductance, impedance, conduc-
cess tance or admittance matrix computation. The coupling coefficient indicates the degree of
Monitoring the Solution Pro- coupling between conductors. Coupling is a measure of the interaction between the elec-
cess tric or magnetic fields of the conductors in the model. The type of coupling (inductive or
Aborting the Solution Pro- capacitive) depends upon the model and is indicated in parentheses after Coupling
cess Coefficient.
Stopping and Restarting the
Solution Process The values in a coupling coefficient matrix are calculated as follows:
Refreshing the Plot m ij
Viewing the Geometric M k = ------------------
-
Model m ii m jj
Viewing Executive Param-
where:
eter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data k is the coupling coefficient for each term in matrix M.
Viewing Profile Data M is the capacitance, inductance, impedance, conductance or admittance matrix.
m ij is an individual value in the matrix.
Coupling coefficient values are always between zero and one.
For instance, in the following capacitive coupling coefficient matrix, the diagonal repre-
senting the structures self-capacitance is equal to one. The coupling between conduc-
tors s2 and s3 (Mk23), 0.15751, is about 20 times that of conductors s1 and s3 (Mk13),
0.00746.
ground s1 s2 s3
ground 1.00000 0.34060 0.35230 0.34125
s1 0.34060 1.00000 0.15855 0.00746
s2 0.35230 0.15855 1.00000 0.15751
Go Back
s3 0.34125 0.00746 0.15751 1.00000
Contents Generally, it is easier to evaluate matrices using the result of the Matrix Norm calculation,
which is a single global value for the matrix.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 520 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Operations
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- The following operations can be used to export or modify the solution.
cess Export
Monitoring the Solution Pro-
cess Choose Operations/Export to export the solution as a text file.
Aborting the Solution Pro- > To export the solution:
cess 1. Choose Operations/Export. A file browser appears.
Stopping and Restarting the 2. Enter the name of the file to export.
Solution Process 3. Select In SI units to export the file in SI units.
Refreshing the Plot 4. Choose OK.
Viewing the Geometric
Model The file is saved and exported.
Viewing Executive Param- Set Units
eter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data Select Operations/Set Units to specify the units in the solution.
Viewing Profile Data > To specify the units:
1. Choose Operations/Set Units. The Select Units Preferences window appears.
2. Select the Quantity you wish to modify.
3. Select the Conversion of the new units.
4. Choose OK.
The units have been converted to the newly specified values.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 521 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Matrix Norm
Generating Solutions The Matrix Norm value allows you to quickly estimate how much coupling exists between
Completing the Solution Pro- the conductors in the model. It gives you a single, or average, value to use in comparing
cess the coupling coefficient matrices of several versions of the model.
Monitoring the Solution Pro-
cess Basically, the matrix norm is equivalent to the length of the matrix, and it is calculated in
Aborting the Solution Pro- the same way as the length of a vector. It is given by the following relationship:
cess n n

2
Stopping and Restarting the Norm = m ij
Solution Process i= 1 j= 1
Refreshing the Plot
Viewing the Geometric where:
Model
Viewing Executive Param- i is the column in the matrix.
eter Solutions j is the row in the matrix.
Viewing Convergence Data n is the size of the matrix.
Viewing Profile Data mij is the matrix entry.
Usually, a smaller Matrix Norm means less coupling. If the matrix norms for several ver-
sions of the model are virtually identical, or if you want to view conductor-specific data,
use the Coupling Coefficient command.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 522 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Solutions/Force/Torque
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- If a force solution or torque solution was computed, choose Solutions/Force/Torque to
cess display the results. Information such as that shown below appears:
Monitoring the Solution Pro-
cess
Aborting the Solution Pro-
cess
Stopping and Restarting the
Solution Process
Refreshing the Plot
Viewing the Geometric
Model
Viewing Executive Param-
eter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data
Viewing Profile Data

Note: For cartesian models:

Force is given in newtons per meter depth.
Torque is given in newton-meters per meter depth or in newtons.
For axisymmetric models, force is given in newtons. Torque is not available
for axisymmetric models.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 523 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Force
Generating Solutions The following information is displayed if a force solution has been computed:
Completing the Solution Pro-
cess Force Setup Lists all the objects that you selected for the force computation, using
Monitoring the Solution Pro- Objects the Setup Executive Parameters/Force command. If more objects
cess than can fit in the list box have been selected, use the scroll bar to view
Aborting the Solution Pro- the rest of the objects.
cess Force Value The results given under this heading represent the net force acting on
Stopping and Restarting the all the objects listed under Force Setup Objects. All force values are
Solution Process given in newtons.
Refreshing the Plot F(x) The component of force in the x direction.
Viewing the Geometric F(y) The component of force in the y direction.
Model Mag(F) The magnitude of the force acting on the objects. This value is also dis-
Viewing Executive Param- played when you choose Convergence.
eter Solutions
Angle(F) The angle (in degrees) at which the force is acting.
Viewing Convergence Data
Viewing Profile Data Torque
The following information is displayed if a torque solution has been computed:
Torque Setup Lists all the objects that you selected for the torque computation using
Objects the Setup Executive Parameters/Torque command. If more objects
than can fit in the list box have been selected, use the scroll bar to view
the rest of the objects.
Anchor Point Displays the coordinates of the anchor point you selected for the torque
computation. The torque on the objects is computed about this point.
Torque Value The net torque (in newton-meters) acting on the objects. This value is
also displayed when you choose Convergence.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 524 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Solutions/Flux Lines
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- If a flux line solution was computed, choose Solutions/Flux Lines to display the results.
cess Use this command to view the flux linkage across the individual lines you specified; the
Monitoring the Solution Pro- net flux linkage across all lines is displayed when you choose Convergence. Information
cess such as that shown below appears:
Aborting the Solution Pro-
cess
Stopping and Restarting the
Solution Process
Refreshing the Plot
Viewing the Geometric
Model
Viewing Executive Param-
eter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data
Viewing Profile Data

The following information is listed for each flux linkage line that you drew using the Setup
Executive Parameters/Flux Lines command:
Line Name The name of the flux linkage line.
First Point The coordinates of the first point in the line.
Second Point The coordinates of the second point in the line.
More Flux Linkage The results of the flux linkage solution.

For cartesian (XY) models, the flux that crosses the line per meter of depth in the z
Go Back direction is displayed.
For axisymmetric (RZ) models, the total flux that crosses the surface made by rotating
the line 360 about the z-axis is displayed.
Contents Magnetostatic flux linkage is given in webers.
Electrostatic flux linkage is given in coulombs per square meter.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 525 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve If more values than can fit on the screen are available, use the scroll bars on the right side
Generating Solutions of the display area to view the rest of the solution data.
Completing the Solution Pro-
cess
Monitoring the Solution Pro-
cess
Aborting the Solution Pro-
cess
Stopping and Restarting the
Solution Process
Refreshing the Plot
Viewing the Geometric
Model
Viewing Executive Param-
eter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data
Viewing Profile Data

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 526 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Solutions/Flux Linkage
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- If a flux linkage solution was computed, choose Solutions/Flux Linkage to display the
cess results. When you choose Convergence, information such as the following appears:
Monitoring the Solution Pro-
cess
Aborting the Solution Pro-
cess
Stopping and Restarting the
Solution Process
Refreshing the Plot
Viewing the Geometric
Model
Viewing Executive Param-
eter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data
Viewing Profile Data

The following information is listed for each flux linkage line that you drew using the Setup
Executive Parameters/Matrix/Flux command:
Object Name The name of the object on which the flux was computed.
Calculated Flux The calculated flux on the object.
Turns The number of flux turns in the object.
Total Flux The total flux on the object at a depth of one default unit.

More For cartesian (XY) models, the flux that crosses the line per meter of depth in the z
direction is displayed.
For axisymmetric (RZ) models, the total flux that crosses the surface made by rotating
Go Back the line 360 about the z-axis is displayed.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 527 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Modifying Turns and Depth
Generating Solutions Once a flux linkage solution has been generated, you can modify the number of turns and
Completing the Solution Pro- model depth to obtain a new value for the total flux of the object.
cess
Monitoring the Solution Pro- > To modify the number of turns for an object:
cess 1. Select the row for the object to modify. The existing number of turns appears in the
Aborting the Solution Pro- Number of Turns field.
cess 2. Enter the new Number of Turns for the object.
Stopping and Restarting the 3. Choose Set. The value is updated in the solution window.
Solution Process When the new number of turns and the model depth are updated, the Total Flux is recal-
Refreshing the Plot culated and appears in the solutions window.
Viewing the Geometric
Model Operations
Viewing Executive Param- Choose the Operations commands to define the units of the solution
eter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data Export
Viewing Profile Data Choose Export from the Operations pull-down menu to export the solutions to a set of
text files.
> To export the solution:
1. Choose Export. The Save As window appears.
2. Enter the file name in the Save flux linkage data in file field and choose OK.
The data file is exported to the defined file.
Set Units
Choose Set Units from the Operations pull-down menu to define the units of the solu-
tion.
> To define the units:
1. Choose Operations/Set Units. The Set Unit Preferences window appears, listing
Go Back the current Quantity you are modifying.
2. Select the new units from the list.
Contents 3. Choose OK.
The new units are accepted, and the values in the window are recalculated for the new
Index setting.

Maxwell Online Help System 528 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Solutions/Current Flow
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- If a current flow solution was computed, choose Solutions/Current Flow to display the
cess results. Use this command to view the current flow across the individual lines you speci-
Monitoring the Solution Pro- fied; the total current flowing across all lines is displayed when you choose Convergence.
cess Information such as that shown below is displayed:
Aborting the Solution Pro-
cess
Stopping and Restarting the
Solution Process
Refreshing the Plot
Viewing the Geometric
Model
Viewing Executive Param-
eter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data
Viewing Profile Data

The following information is listed for each current flow line that you drew using the Setup
Executive Parameters/Current Flow command:
Line Name The name of the current flow line.
First Point The coordinates of the first point in the line.
Second Point The coordinates of the second point in the line.
Current Flow The results of the current flow solution.
Go Back
For cartesian (XY) models, the current flow across the line in amperes per meter of
depth in the z-direction is displayed.
Contents For axisymmetric (RZ) models, the total current in amperes flowing through the
surface made by rotating the line 360 about the z-axis is displayed.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 529 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve If more values than can fit on the screen are available, use the scroll bars on the right side
Generating Solutions of the display area to view the rest of the solution data.
Completing the Solution Pro-
Solutions/Core Loss
cess
Monitoring the Solution Pro- Choose Solutions/Core Loss to view the results of the core loss calculations you defined
cess for your eddy current problem.
Aborting the Solution Pro-
cess > To view the core loss solutions:
Stopping and Restarting the Choose Solutions/Core Loss. The core loss results appear:
Solution Process
Refreshing the Plot
Viewing the Geometric
Model
Viewing Executive Param-
eter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data
Viewing Profile Data

Solutions/Number Registers
Choose Solutions/Number Registers to view the results of any Post Processor macro
solutions that wrote number registers to a file. Information like the following appears:
Filename Value
ampfile -0.983014
fluxfile -1.77616E-07
To view the results of a post-processing macro using this command, you must have first
saved the registers containing the results.
> To save the registers, do the following while defining the macro:
Go Back 1. Choose Post Process/Calc/Number.
2. Choose Roll to move the first register that is to be saved to the top of the stack.
3. Choose Write.
Contents 4. At the Filename prompt, enter a name to use for saving the register, then choose
Execute. The name appears as the filename when the register values are viewed.
5. Repeat the process for each register that is to be saved.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 530 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Solutions/Transient Data
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- EMpulse only.
cess If you have created and solved a Transient motion problem, choose Solutions/Transient
Monitoring the Solution Pro- Data to view the plots of the transient solutions. A window similar to the following one
cess appears:
Aborting the Solution Pro-
cess
Stopping and Restarting the
Solution Process
Refreshing the Plot
Viewing the Geometric
Model
Viewing Executive Param-
eter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data
Viewing Profile Data

> To observe the plots:

1. Select the plot to view from the Plots list. The selected plot appears.
2. Use the View commands below the plot to change the view of the plotted data.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 531 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Show Coords
Generating Solutions Choose this command to display the coordinates of a selected point.
Completing the Solution Pro-
cess > To display plot coordinates:
Monitoring the Solution Pro- 1. Choose Show Coords. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
cess 2. Select a point in the plot window. The Coordinates window appears, listing the
Aborting the Solution Pro- coordinates of the selected point.
cess 3. Continue selecting points until you have seen the coordinates of all the desired
Stopping and Restarting the points.
Solution Process 4. Click the right mouse button.
Refreshing the Plot The crosshairs return the default cursor.
Viewing the Geometric
Model Settings
Viewing Executive Param- Choose the Settings commands to define the format of the axes and graphs of the plots.
eter Solutions Choose from the following commands:
Viewing Convergence Data
Viewing Profile Data Format Axes Specifies axis scales, labels, plot headings, and minimum and
maximum signal values to be plotted along with axis tick mark and
grid settings. This command functions identically to the Paramet-
rics Post Processor Plot/Format/Axes command.
Format Graphs Specifies the color, line thickness, and line style of a previously
plotted line. Also determines the type of markers displayed at solu-
tion data points, and whether the graph is visible on the plot. This
command functions identically to the Parametrics Post Processor
Plot/Format/Graphs command.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 532 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Viewing Convergence Data
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- Choose Convergence from the top of the Executive Commands window to monitor how
cess the solution is converging and view information about it or, if the solution is complete, to
Monitoring the Solution Pro- verify that it did converge. Information such as that shown below is then displayed. If more
cess values than can fit on the screen are available, use the scroll bars on the bottom and right
Aborting the Solution Pro- side of the display area to view the rest of the convergence data.
cess
Stopping and Restarting the
Solution Process
Refreshing the Plot
Viewing the Geometric
Model
Viewing Executive Parame-
ter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data
Number of Passes
Convergence Criteria
Frequency
Convergence Data
Convergence Display
Viewing Profile Data
Number of Passes
The fields below indicate the solution status in terms of how many adaptive passes (solve
error analysis refine cycles) are completed.
Completed Displays the number of adaptive passes that have been completed.
Remaining Displays the number of adaptive passes that have yet to be completed.

Go Back The total Number of Passes is set using the Setup Solution Options command.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 533 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Convergence Criteria
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- These fields show how close the current solution is to meeting the convergence criteria
cess entered under Setup Solution.
Monitoring the Solution Pro- Target Error Displays the target percent energy error the percent energy error to
cess achieve for the solution, entered with the Setup Solution command.
Aborting the Solution Pro- Energy Error Displays the percent energy error of the last completed solution.
cess Delta Energy Displays the percent change in the total energy between the last two
Stopping and Restarting the adaptive passes.
Solution Process
Refreshing the Plot When the Energy Error and the Delta Energy fall below the Target Error value, the Max-
Viewing the Geometric well 2D stops the adaptive solution process even if the desired number of adaptive
Model passes has not been reached.
Viewing Executive Parame-
ter Solutions Frequency
Viewing Convergence Data If an AC field quantity is being computed, this field displays the frequency at which cur-
Number of Passes rents, voltages, and fields oscillate.
Convergence Criteria
Frequency
Convergence Data
Convergence Display
Viewing Profile Data

More

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 534 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Convergence Data
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- The system displays the following information for each solution:
cess Pass The adaptive pass number. Only displayed for adaptive field solutions.
Monitoring the Solution Pro- Triangles The number of triangular elements in the finite element mesh that were
cess used during the solution. Note that this may be different than the total
Aborting the Solution Pro- number of triangles. For instance, in an electrostatic, magnetostatic or
cess eddy current solution, no fields are computed inside perfect conductors
Stopping and Restarting the thus, these triangles are not included in the count displayed in this
Solution Process field.
Refreshing the Plot Torque The net torque (in newton-meters) on the objects selected using Setup
Viewing the Geometric Executive Parameters/Torque, computed about the specified anchor
Model point. Appears only if torque is computed during the solution, allowing
Viewing Executive Parame- you to see if it is converging.
ter Solutions Flux The total flux linkage computed across the line(s) you specified using
Viewing Convergence Data Setup Executive Parameters/Flux Linkage. Flux linkage values are
Number of Passes given in webers (magnetostatic) or coulombs per square meter (elec-
Convergence Criteria trostatic). Appears only if flux linkage is computed during the solution,
Frequency allowing you to see if it is converging.
Convergence Data
Current The total current flow (in amperes) computed across the line(s) you
Convergence Display
specified using Setup Executive Parameters/Current Flow. Appears
Viewing Profile Data
only if current flow is computed during the solution.
Total Power The net power loss (in watts) for the model. Power loss is automatically
Loss computed during DC conduction, AC conduction, eddy current, and
eddy axial field solutions.

After a solution is complete, use the Energy Error to determine if additional adaptive
passes are needed to increase the accuracy of the solution. If the Energy Error is still
declining from pass to pass, additional adaptive passes may increase the accuracy of the
Go Back field solution. If the Energy Error has leveled off, additional adaptive passes may not be
useful.

Contents Note: Note that the final force, torque, flux linkage and current flow solutions can
also be viewed using the Solutions command.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 535 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Convergence Display
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- The Convergence Display button appears on the bottom of the Convergence menu.
cess Use it to display convergence information graphically. Click the left mouse button on it to
Monitoring the Solution Pro- access a menu with the following commands:
cess Table Displays convergence information in a table (the default).
Aborting the Solution Pro- Plot Triangles Plots the number of triangles in the mesh for each field solution
cess (adaptive or non-adaptive).
Stopping and Restarting the Plot Total Plots the total energy for each field solution (adaptive or non-adap-
Solution Process Energy tive).
Refreshing the Plot Plot Percent Plots the percent energy error for each field solution (adaptive or non-
Viewing the Geometric Error Energy adaptive).
Model
Plot Force If force is computed, plots the total force for each adaptive solution.
Viewing Executive Parame-
ter Solutions Plot Torque If torque is computed, plots total torque for each adaptive solution.
Viewing Convergence Data Plot Flux If flux linkage is computed, plots the total flux linkage for each adap-
Number of Passes tive solution.
Convergence Criteria Plot Current If current flow is computed, plots the total current flow for each adap-
Frequency tive solution.
Convergence Data Plot Total If an AC conduction, DC conduction, eddy current or eddy axial field
Convergence Display Power Loss simulation is being performed, plots the total power loss for each field
Viewing Profile Data solution (adaptive or non-adaptive).

If you display a convergence plot while an adaptive solution is being computed, the plot
automatically updates to show the new data points from each adaptive pass.
Choose the desired information to be plotted. A plot like the following one is then
drawn. In this example, the energy error for each adaptive solution was plotted, using
the Convergence Display/Plot Percent Error Energy command. As can be seen
below, the plot approaches zero as the number of adaptive passes rises indicating
Go Back that the solutions accuracy is increasing. The dotted line on the plot shows the target
energy error (entered via the Setup Solution command).
Use the Zoom In, Zoom Out and Fit All buttons to change your view of the plot.
Contents After plotting convergence data, select Convergence Display/Table to return to a
tabular display of convergence information.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 536 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro-
cess
Monitoring the Solution Pro-
cess
Aborting the Solution Pro-
cess
Stopping and Restarting the
Solution Process
Refreshing the Plot
Viewing the Geometric
Model
Viewing Executive Parame-
ter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data
Number of Passes
Convergence Criteria
Frequency
Convergence Data
Convergence Display
Viewing Profile Data

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 537 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Viewing Profile Data
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- Choose Profile from the top of the Executive Commands window to see the computing
cess resources used in the solution process. Information such as that shown below appears:
Monitoring the Solution Pro-
cess
Aborting the Solution Pro-
cess
Stopping and Restarting the
Solution Process
Refreshing the Plot
Viewing the Geometric
Model
Viewing Executive Parame-
ter Solutions
Viewing Convergence Data
Viewing Profile Data
Command/Info
Real Time and CPU Time
Memory Size
Number of Elements
The profile data is a log of the tasks performed by the Maxwell 2D during the field and
parameter solutions, how long they took, and how much RAM/disk memory was required.
For example, the profile of an adaptive pass of a nonlinear magnetostatic solution in
which both fields and parameters were computed might look like this:
Command/Info Real Time CPU time Mem size Number of elements
Pass 4
mesh2d_adap 00.03.09 00.02.16 1801K 6320 triangles
Go Back nl2d_solve 00.09.37 00.09.02 8362K 6272 triangles
nl2d_torque 00.00.09 00.00.08 8362K 6272 triangles
Contents nl2d_force 00.00.10 00.00.08 8362K 6272 triangles

Notice that all computations performed during the adaptive pass including the pass-by-
Index pass force and torque solutions are listed.

Maxwell Online Help System 538 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Solve
Solve Command/Info
Generating Solutions
Completing the Solution Pro- Lists the software module that performs a task during the solution process, and the type
cess of task that was performed. For example, mesh2d_adap is the software module that
Monitoring the Solution Pro- adaptively refines the finite element mesh. nl2d is the nonlinear magnetostatic field simu-
cess lator. The listings nl2d_solve, nl2d_torque, and nl2d_force identify the resources used
Aborting the Solution Pro- during the field, torque and force solutions, respectively.
cess Real Time and CPU Time
Stopping and Restarting the
Solution Process These two fields indicate how much real time that is, the amount of time that a clock
Refreshing the Plot would indicate and how much CPU time was required to perform the task.
Viewing the Geometric Memory Size
Model
Viewing Executive Parame- This field indicates how much RAM/virtual memory was required to complete the task.
ter Solutions This memory is freed for other uses after the task is complete.
Viewing Convergence Data
Viewing Profile Data Number of Elements
Command/Info This field indicates how many of the triangular elements in the mesh were used during the
Real Time and CPU Time solution. The resources needed to compute the solution grow with the number of ele-
Memory Size ments because the electromagnetic equation being solved has to be solved in each ele-
Number of Elements ment separately.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 539 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solving a Problem with Variables
Solving a Problem with Solving a Problem with Variables
Variables
Solve/Nominal Problem Maxwell 2Ds Parametric Analysis module has two commands for launching the solution
Solve/Variables process. Choose them from the Solve menu.
Solution Process
Aborting a Solution Solve/Nominal Problem
Errors in Parametric Solu-
tions Choose Solve/Nominal Problem to generate a nominal solution for the model on which
Displaying Solution Informa- the parametric problem is based. This command operates the same way as the Solve
tion command for the non-parametric version of the software.
Variables
Model
Solutions
Convergence
Profile

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 540 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solving a Problem with Variables
Solving a Problem with Vari- Solve/Variables
ables
Solve/Nominal Problem Choose Solve/Variables to generate a solution for the parametric sweep you defined
Solve/Variables using the Setup Solution/Variables command.
Solution Process
Aborting a Solution
Solution Process
Errors in Parametric Solu- To generate a solution for the parametric sweep, Maxwell 2D performs the steps listed
tions below. This process is summarized below:
Displaying Solution Informa-
tion Start parametric sweep
Variables
Model
Solutions Set variables to values
specified for current
Convergence parametric setup
Profile

Generate electric or
magnetic field solution

Generate parameter
solutions (force, torque,
inductance, and so on)

Run post-processor
macros

More Yes
Additional
setups?

Go Back No

Stop parametric sweep

Contents
1. The variables you selected for the sweep are set to the values specified in the first
Index unsolved parametric setup listed on the spreadsheet.

Maxwell Online Help System 541 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Solving a Problem with Variables
Solving a Problem with Vari- 2. Maxwell 2D generates an electric or magnetic field solution for the setup. The
ables solution parameters you specified using the Setup Solution/Options command
Solve/Nominal Problem control how the field solution is generated for example, whether an adaptive
Solve/Variables solution is performed.
Solution Process If you changed the value of a geometric constraint, the system generates a finite
Aborting a Solution element mesh based on the geometrys new dimensions prior to computing fields.
Errors in Parametric Solu- Otherwise, the mesh used for the solution is the initial mesh.
tions
Displaying Solution Informa- Note: The field solution is saved only if you specified Y under Save Fields when
tion setting up the parametric sweep.
Variables
Model 3. The simulator then generates solutions for any executive parameters force,
Solutions torque, capacitance, inductance, flux linkage, and so forth that you specified
Convergence using the Setup Executive Parameters commands.
Profile 4. After completing the executive parameter solutions, the system executes any post-
processing macros that you selected via the Setup Executive Parameters/Post
Processor Macros command.
The system repeats this process until solutions are generated for all parametric setups.
Progress bars appear to show the status of each step. When the parametric sweep is
completed, a message appears, informing you that the solution is complete.
Choose OK to return to the Executive Commands menu.

Note: If the setup fails to converge before the Number of requested passes crite-
rion specified in Setup Solution Parameters is reached, the solution pro-
cess for this setup stops and the next one begins. A setup that has been
stopped without converging will show a Y(yes) in both the Solved and Solve
columns of the variables table.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 542 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solving a Problem with Variables
Solving a Problem with Vari- Aborting a Solution
ables
Solve/Nominal Problem Choose Abort to stop a parametric sweep. Be aware of the following:
Solve/Variables Parametric setup solutions that were computed prior to the one that was aborted are
Solution Process still available.
Aborting a Solution The solutions that are available for the current setup depend on when you aborted the
Errors in Parametric parametric sweep. For instance, if you stopped the solution while a post-processing
Solutions macro was executing, the field and parameter solutions computed for that setup are
Displaying Solution Informa- still available.
tion
Variables If you select Solve/Variables again after aborting a solution, Maxwell 2D resumes the
Model parametric sweep. The system computes fields and parameters and runs any post-pro-
Solutions cessor macros for the parametric setup whose solution was aborted, regardless of
Convergence whether they were computed earlier.
Profile Errors in Parametric Solutions
If a problem occurs during a parametric solution such as the creation of overlapping or
self-intersecting objects when a geometric constraint is set to a new value the paramet-
ric sweep is aborted and an error message appears. Before continuing the parametric
solution, change the value of the variable that caused the problem. Solutions for paramet-
ric setups that were computed before the error condition occurred are still available.
To check for errors with geometric constraints, choose Variables/Animate while setting
up the solution. If a constraint error exists, an error message appears while you are exe-
cuting this command.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 543 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solving a Problem with Variables
Solving a Problem with Vari- Displaying Solution Information
ables
Solve/Nominal Problem Use the following menus to view information about parametric and nominal solutions.
Solve/Variables
Solution Process
Variables
Aborting a Solution Choose Variables to do the following:
Errors in Parametric Solu-
tions View parametric setups during the solution process.
Displaying Solution Infor- View the final error energy, solution energy, and number of triangles for each
mation parametric solution.
Variables Display the results of any executive parameter solutions (force, capacitance, current
Model flow, and so forth) or post-processing macros that were computed during the
Solutions parametric sweep.
Convergence Display solution, profile, and convergence information for individual parametric setups.
Profile The following figure shows the solution information for the setup of a sweep on the vari-
able Source (a variable specifying the amount of current flowing through the coil in a
plate). Note that you cannot view field solutions for completed setups while a parametric
sweep is in progress:

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 544 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solving a Problem with Variables
Solving a Problem with Vari- Model
ables
Solve/Nominal Problem Use the Model command to view the geometric model. In parametric problems, this com-
Solve/Variables mand is generally used to display the geometries that result when a geometric variable is
Solution Process constrained to different values. You can change your view of the geometry if you need to.
Aborting a Solution Nominal Geometry
Errors in Parametric Solu- > To view the geometric model for the nominal problem, do one of the following:
tions If the Executive Commands window is displayed, choose Model.
Displaying Solution Infor- If the parametric spreadsheet is displayed,
mation 1. Choose Return to Nominal Problem.
Variables 2. Choose Model.
Model
Parametric Geometry
Solutions
> To view the geometric model for a parametric setup, do the following:
Convergence
1. Choose Variables to display the parametric spreadsheet.
Profile
2. Select the setup whose geometry you wish to view.
3. Choose Model. The geometric model used during that parametric solution
appears.
4. To return to the Executive Commands window, choose Return to Nominal
Problem.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 545 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solving a Problem with Variables
Solving a Problem with Vari- Solutions
ables
Solve/Nominal Problem Use the Solutions commands to view the following for the nominal problem or the
Solve/Variables selected parametric solution:
Solution Process All components of force and torque solutions.
Aborting a Solution A complete inductance, capacitance, impedance, admittance, or conductance matrix.
Errors in Parametric Solu- Current flow and flux linkage solutions, including the lines over which the solutions
tions were computed.
Displaying Solution Infor- Number registers containing the output of any post-processor macros.
mation
Nominal Solutions
Variables
> To view executive parameter solutions for the nominal model,
Model
Solutions If the Executive Commands window is displayed, choose one of the following
Convergence Solutions commands:
Profile Matrix Displays any inductance, capacitance, impedance, admit-
tance, or conductance matrix solutions.
Force-Torque Displays all components of any force or torque solutions.
Current Flow Displays any current flow solutions.
Flux Linkage Displays any flux linkage solutions.
Core Loss Displays any core loss solutions.
Number Register Displays the contents of the number register, if a post-
processing macro was run.
Modal Characteristic Displays the modal characteristic impedance matrix.
Impedance

If the parametric spreadsheet is displayed, you can:

Choose Return to Nominal Problem.
Choose one of the Solutions commands listed above.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 546 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solving a Problem with Variables
Solving a Problem with Vari- Parametric Solutions
ables > To view executive parameter solutions for a parametric setup:
Solve/Nominal Problem 1. Choose Variables to display the parametric spreadsheet.
Solve/Variables 2. Select the desired parametric setup.
Solution Process 3. Choose one of the Solutions commands to view executive parameter solutions for
Aborting a Solution the selected setup.
Errors in Parametric Solu- 4. To return to the Executive Commands window, choose Return to Nominal
tions Problem.
Displaying Solution Infor-
mation
Variables
Model
Solutions
Convergence
Profile

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 547 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solving a Problem with Variables
Solving a Problem with Vari- Convergence
ables
Solve/Nominal Problem Use the Convergence command to view the following:
Solve/Variables The number of completed adaptive passes (if an adaptive field solution was
Solution Process performed).
Aborting a Solution The stopping criteria entered via the Setup Solution/Options command.
Errors in Parametric Solu- The energy, error energy, and number of triangles for each field solution (adaptive or
tions non-adaptive).
Displaying Solution Infor- The results of any force, torque, flux linkage, or current flow solutions (adaptive or
mation non-adaptive).
Variables
Nominal Convergence
Model
> To view convergence information for the nominal model:
Solutions
Convergence If the Executive Commands window is displayed, choose Convergence.
Profile If the parametric spreadsheet is displayed:
1. Choose Return to Nominal Problem.
2. Choose Convergence.
Parametric Convergence
> To view convergence information for a parametric setup:
1. Choose Variables to display the parametric spreadsheet.
2. Select the desired setup.
3. Choose Convergence. Convergence information for the field solution associated
with that setup appears.
4. To return to the Executive Commands window, choose Return to Nominal
Problem.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 548 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solving a Problem with Variables
Solving a Problem with Vari- Profile
ables
Solve/Nominal Problem Two different types of solution statistics can be viewed using the Profile menu.
Solve/Variables General Profile Statistics
Solution Process > To view the computing resources used during all solutions (whether parametric or
Aborting a Solution nominal):
Errors in Parametric Solu- If the Executive Commands window is displayed, choose Profile.
tions If the parametric spreadsheet is displayed:
Displaying Solution Infor- 1. Choose Return to Nominal Problem.
mation 2. Choose Profile.
Variables
Model Information such as the following is displayed for parametric sweeps:
Solutions Command/Info Real Time CPU Time Mem Size Num Elements
Convergence Parametric solution
Profile setup1 [Link] [Link] 839K 146 triangles
setup2 [Link] [Link] 839K 146 triangles
setup3 [Link] [Link] 839K 168 triangles
setup4 [Link] [Link] 839K 168 triangles
Total [Link] [Link] 839K 168 triangles

The total memory and CPU time for each variable setup that was solved during the solu-
tion process is listed. Totals are given for the entire parametric sweep. The number of tri-
angles represents the highest number of triangles in the mesh for that setups field
solution and for the entire sweep.

Note: In the Microsoft Windows version of the software, the CPU time is equal to
the real time and memory usage information is not available.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 549 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Solving a Problem with Variables
Solving a Problem with Vari- Parametric Profile Statistics
ables > To view the computing resources used during a single parametric solution:
Solve/Nominal Problem 1. Choose Variables to display the parametric spreadsheet.
Solve/Variables 2. Select the desired parametric setup.
Solution Process 3. Choose Profile. Information such as that shown below is displayed:
Aborting a Solution
Errors in Parametric Solu-
tions
Displaying Solution Infor-
mation
Variables
Model
Solutions
Convergence
Profile

4. To return to the Executive Commands window, choose Return to Nominal

Problem.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 550 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D 2D Post Processor
Post Process Post Process
Post Processor
Post Process/Nominal Prob- Choose the Post Process commands from the Executive Commands menu to access the
lem post processors. The post processors allow you to:
Post Processor Units
Post Process/Fields
Plot and analyze nominal field solutions.
Deleting Time Steps
Plot parametric and variables field solutions.
(EMpulse only). Plot the transient, time-stepping field solutions.
The post processors only become active after their respective solutions have been gener-
ated for the problem.

Post Processor
The Post Processor has the following commands that allow you to perform the following
functions:
Nominal Problem Accesses the 2D Post Processor.
Fields EMpulse only. Solves the nominal field solutions for the transient
solution.
Variables Accesses the parametrics post processor and displays the para-
metric table.
Transient Data EMpulse only. Accesses PlotData for plotting transient solutions.

When you choose one of the Post Process commands, its respective post processor
appears.

Note: If you have only the basic license installed for Maxwell 2D, only one Post
Process command appears, allowing you to analyze the nominal solutions
only.

While you are accessing a post processor, the Maxwell 2D Executive Commands menu
Go Back remains active. This lets you inspect material properties, boundary conditions, conver-
gence information, and so forth while viewing the field solution. If you exit Maxwell 2D
Contents while the Post Processor is being accessed, the software gives you the option of continu-
ing to view the field solution even after youve exited the main program, or of exiting from
both software modules.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 551 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D 2D Post Processor
Post Process Post Process/Nominal Problem
Post Processor
Post Process/Nominal Choose this command to access the 2D Post Processor.
Problem
The 2D Post Processor for the nominal and field solutions has the following menus that
Post Processor Units
allow you to view and analyze the your project and its solution:
Post Process/Fields
Deleting Time Steps File Opens and saves post processing macros. Also allows you to load a solution
into the 2D post processor.
Global Sets and displays the global display parameters, such as color, units, and
grid spacing.
Window Defines the window settings.
Show Displays information about the finite element mesh.
Post Plots common field quantities on lines and planes. Also defines field regis-
ters to use with the line calculator.
Calc Computes derived quantities from the general field solutions.
Help Accesses the online documentation.

Post Processor Units

The units of the model are specified in the 2D Modeler and cannot be modified in the 2D
Post Processor.
The unit of length has no effect on the units used for electromagnetic quantities that are
referenced in the Post Processor. Electromagnetic quantities are always expressed in SI
(MKS) units. For instance, even though the geometry of a problem is entered in millime-
ters, energy density is still displayed in joules/meter2, not joules/mm2.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 552 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D 2D Post Processor
Post Process Post Process/Fields
Post Processor
Post Process/Nominal Prob- EMpulse only.
lem
Choose this command to access the fields Post Processor. The Post-Process Saved
Post Processor Units
Fields window appears, allowing you to select the field to analyze in the Post Processor:
Post Process/Fields
Deleting Time Steps

> To select the fields to analyze:

1. Select the time at which you will analyze the field from the Time list.
2. Choose Post Process to access the 2D Post Processor and analyze the field at
the selected time, or Cancel to cancel the analysis and return to the Executive
Commands window.
Deleting Time Steps
You can also delete unwanted time steps that are not needed in the analysis.
Go Back > To delete any time steps:
1. Select the time step to delete from the Time list.
Contents 2. Choose Delete.
The time step is deleted. Deleted time steps cannot be recovered without regenerating a
Index transient solution.

Maxwell Online Help System 553 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D File Menu (Post Processor)
File Menu File Menu
File Commands
File/Open Use the Post Processors File commands to:
File/Trans
File/Trans/Start
Load solution files into the Post Processor.
File/Trans/Stop
Create and run Post Processor macros, recorded sequences of commands that
enable you to automate various post-processing operations.
File/Trans/Execute
File/Trans/Delete Exit the Post Processor.
File/Exit When you choose File from the Post Processor menu bar, the following menu appears:

File Commands
The commands on the File menu are:
Open Loads a solution into the Post Processor.
Trans Lets you record, execute, and delete macros.
Go Back Exit Exits the Post Processor.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 554 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D File Menu (Post Processor)
File Menu File/Open
File Commands
File/Open Choose File/Open to open and read a solution file into the Post Processor. This com-
File/Trans mand operates like the File/Open command in the 2D Modeler, except that solution files
File/Trans/Start (*.sob) are automatically displayed.
File/Trans/Stop
File/Trans/Execute File/Trans
File/Trans/Delete
File/Exit In the post processor, you can use transcripts to record a sequence of commands, and
then execute those commands again later as a macro. Once created, a macro can be
executed at any time in the Post Processor.
Use macros to save yourself a lot of time and effort. For example, calculating a specific
quantity (such as the inductance of a transmission line) can take several keystrokes and
involve a number of commands. If you store that series of commands and keystrokes in a
macro, you can calculate the quantity with a single command.
Use the File/Trans commands to create and execute macros. The following commands
are available:
Start Begin recording a sequence of commands.
Stop Finish recording commands, and save the macro into a transcript file.
Execute Execute a macro by its name.
Delete Remove a macro from the File/Trans menu.

Previously defined macros may also appear in the menu.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 555 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D File Menu (Post Processor)
File Menu File/Trans/Start
File Commands
File/Trans/Stop
File/Open
File/Trans Use these two commands in conjunction to define a macro and save it to a transcript file.
File/Trans/Start The macro may also be added to the File/Trans menu.
File/Trans/Stop
File/Trans/Execute > To define a macro:
File/Trans/Delete 1. Choose File/Trans/Start to begin recording.
File/Exit 2. Enter the name you would like to give to the macro.
3. Choose Continue.
4. Perform all of the actions that you wish to be recorded in the macro.
5. Choose File/Trans/Stop to finish recording the macro.
6. You now have the option of adding the macro to the menu.
If you wish to add the macro to the File/Trans menu, set the option to Yes.
If you do not wish to add the macro to the File/Trans menu, set the option to No
(the default).
7. Choose Continue.
The macro is now complete and has been saved to a transcript file with the current
project. The name of the file is the macro name you specified plus the .trn file extension.
If you chose to add the macro to the menu, it will now appear on the File/Trans menu,
and can be executed by choosing the name from the menu. If you did not add the name to
the menu, you can still execute it using the File/Trans/Execute command.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 556 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D File Menu (Post Processor)
File Menu File/Trans/Execute
File Commands
File/Open Use the File/Trans/Execute command to execute a previously defined command by
File/Trans entering its name. If the macros name has been added to the menu, you may also exe-
File/Trans/Start cute it by choosing the name from the menu.
File/Trans/Stop > To execute a command by entering its name:
File/Trans/Execute 1. Choose File/Trans/Execute.
File/Trans/Delete 2. Enter the macros name.
File/Exit 3. Choose Continue. If the macro is not currently listed on the menu, you now have
the option of adding it to the menu.
If you wish to add the macro to the File/Trans menu, set the option to Yes.
If you do not wish to add the macro to the File/Trans menu, set the option to No
(the default).
The entire sequence of recorded actions is replayed exactly as it was recorded. For exam-
ple, if you created a macro to display an arrow plot of the E vector superimposed on a
contour plot of the voltage, those commands will be executed, and the plots will be dis-
played.
File/Trans/Delete
Use the File/Trans/Delete command to remove a macro name from the menu. This does
not delete the transcript file, and the macro may still be invoked by name using the File/
Trans/Execute command.
> To delete a macros name from the menu:
1. Choose File/Trans/Delete.
2. Enter the name of the macro you wish to remove. (If you do not wish to remove
any macro from the menu, do not enter a name.)
3. Choose Continue.
The macros name will be removed from the menu after you exit the Post Processor.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 557 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D File Menu (Post Processor)
File Menu File/Exit
File Commands
File/Open Choose File/Exit to exit the Post Processor.
File/Trans
> To exit the Post Processor:
File/Trans/Start
File/Trans/Stop
Choose File/Exit. A message appears asking you whether you would like to exit.
File/Trans/Execute Choose Yes to return to the Executive Commands window.
File/Trans/Delete Choose No to remain in the Post Processor.
File/Exit

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 558 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Global Menu
Global Menu Global Menu
Global Commands
Global Settings Use the Global commands to do the following:
Displaying Objects
Mouse Behavior
Specify which objects are to be displayed.
Units
Change the colors of objects.
Zoom, Fill, and Set Clear and refresh all viewing windows.
Executing Commands Set global parameters such as the desired unit of length, the grid spacing, and the
Global/Display method of selecting points.
Object Lists When you choose Global from the Post Processor menu bar, the following menu
Display Object(s) appears:
Fill View
Displaying Objects
Adjusting the View
Global/Recolor
Recolor Object(s)
New Color(s)
Changing the Color of
Selected Objects
Global/Refresh
Global/Defaults
Units
Grids
Mouse
Setting Defaults

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 559 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Global Menu
Global Menu Global Commands
Global Commands
Global Settings The function of each Global command is as follows:
Displaying Objects Display Displays the objects set to Yes. Objects set to No do not appear on
Mouse Behavior screen.
Units
Recolor Allows you to change the color in which objects are displayed.
Zoom, Fill, and Set
Executing Commands Refresh Clears all viewing windows and redraws any object that was on
Global/Display screen when the command was chosen.
Object Lists Defaults Allows you to do the following:
Display Object(s) Specify the desired unit of length.
Fill View Specify default names for axes, lines, planes, objects, and
Displaying Objects other entities that are assigned names.
Adjusting the View Adjust the field of view by entering a convenient scale for grids
Global/Recolor and axes.
Recolor Object(s) Define the snap-to-point behavior of the cursor when points
New Color(s) are selected from the screen.
Changing the Color of Enable or disable keyboard entry.
Selected Objects
The Global commands are used in conjunction with the Window commands to adjust
Global/Refresh
viewing windows and system parameters. The Global commands affect all viewing win-
Global/Defaults
dows at once, while the Window commands affect one viewing window at a time.
Units
Grids
Mouse
Setting Defaults

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 560 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Global Menu
Global Menu Global Settings
Global Commands
Global Settings The following settings can be applied globally to the problem.
Displaying Objects
Mouse Behavior
Displaying Objects
Units Choose Global/Display to specify which objects to display. The objects appear in all
Zoom, Fill, and Set viewing windows. It is not possible to display different sets of objects in different windows.
Executing Commands
Global/Display Use the Global/Recolor command to change the colors of displayed objects.
Object Lists Mouse Behavior
Display Object(s)
Fill View Choose Global/Defaults to specify how mouse generated points are interpolated.
Displaying Objects Options are Object snap and Grid snap (both of which are selected by default), You can
Adjusting the View alternatively enter points from the keyboard by using the Keyboard entry option.
Global/Recolor
Units
Recolor Object(s)
New Color(s) Choose Global/Defaults to change the unit of length in which coordinates are displayed
Changing the Color of and entered. The new unit of length has no effect on the display size of objects. For exam-
Selected Objects ple, if an object display is 2 millimeters wide before the unit of length is changed to mils, its
Global/Refresh display remains 2 millimeters wide afterwards. The only difference is that the dimension is
Global/Defaults now expressed as 78.44 mils.
Units
Grids Zoom, Fill, and Set
Mouse If the geometric model of a structure has already been loaded into the simulator, a view of
Setting Defaults that model appears in the Global/Display and Global/Recolor menus. Use the Zoom
(similar to Window/Zoom), Fill (similar to Fit Drawing), and Set (similar to Window/
Setup/Settings) commands to modify the view of the structure.
Executing Commands
Go Back The Global/Display and Global/Recolor commands can be executed as follows:
Choose Execute and Return to execute the command and return to the main display.
Contents Choose Execute to execute the command and remain in the window of the current
command. Use this option to view the results of the changes made by the command
before returning to the main display.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 561 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Global Menu
Global Menu Global/Display
Global Commands
Global Settings Choose Global/Display to specify which objects to display on the screen. The following
Displaying Objects window appears after you choose this command:
Mouse Behavior
Units
Zoom, Fill, and Set
Executing Commands
Global/Display
Object Lists
Display Object(s)
Fill View
Displaying Objects
Adjusting the View
Global/Recolor
Recolor Object(s)
New Color(s)
Changing the Color of
Selected Objects
Global/Refresh
Global/Defaults
Units
Grids Object Lists
Mouse
Choose the name of an object list to set all objects in that list to Yes. The following object
Setting Defaults
lists are predefined:
all Includes all objects.
all-2d Includes 2D objects only.

Display Object(s)
Go Back
The names of all objects currently in memory appear in the list. Set the objects that you
wish to display to Yes.
Contents
The objects that are on the screen when the command is chosen are preset to Yes. To set
them all to No, set all in the Objects Lists list box to No.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 562 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Global Menu
Global Menu Fill View
Global Commands
Global Settings Set this field to Yes to make objects appear as large as possible without extending
Displaying Objects beyond the window. In the process, several grid and mouse options are automatically
Mouse Behavior revised. Choose Global/Defaults to manually reset them.
Units Displaying Objects
Zoom, Fill, and Set > To specify which objects of the geometric model are displayed:
Executing Commands 1. Set the objects that you wish to display to Yes by doing one of the following:
Global/Display
Object Lists
Set one of the names of the object lists in the Object Lists list box to Yes.
Display Object(s)
Set the objects listed in the Display Object(s) list box to Yes.
2. Set Fill View to Yes or No.
Fill View
3. Execute the command.
Displaying Objects
Adjusting the View To change the color in which objects are displayed, choose Global/Recolor.
Global/Recolor
Recolor Object(s) Adjusting the View
New Color(s) If an object that you request to display does not appear on the screen after Execute or
Changing the Color of Execute and Return is chosen, it is possible that the object is outside the field of view or
Selected Objects that the field of view is not set wide enough to include the object. For example, if the field
Global/Refresh of view associated with a window is 0.1 mm wide, it is impossible to see objects that are
Global/Defaults 10 mm wide.
Units
Grids Choose Global/Display and set Fill View to Yes to automatically adjust the field of view
Mouse to include all of the objects selected for display.
Setting Defaults Similarly, if two small objects are separated by a large distance relative to their size, set-
ting Fill View to Yes scales the field of view to include both objects. However, because of
their small size relative to the required field of view, they may not be visible. Be aware of
this problem when displaying small objects separated by large dimensions.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 563 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Global Menu
Global Menu Global/Recolor
Global Commands
Global Settings Choose Global/Recolor to change the color of objects. The following window appears:
Displaying Objects
Mouse Behavior
Units
Zoom, Fill, and Set
Executing Commands
Global/Display
Object Lists
Display Object(s)
Fill View
Displaying Objects
Adjusting the View
Global/Recolor
Recolor Object(s)
New Color(s)
Changing the Color of
Selected Objects
Global/Refresh
Global/Defaults
Units
Grids Recolor Object(s)
Mouse The names of all objects appear in the window. Select the objects that are to be recolored
Setting Defaults by setting them to Yes. After you do, the default color appears in a box next to the object
name.
New Color(s)
The palette of colors appears in the New Color(s) column next to the object.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 564 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Global Menu
Global Menu Changing the Color of Selected Objects
Global Commands > To assign a new color to an object:
Global Settings 1. Select the object to which you want a new color assigned.
Displaying Objects 2. Click the left mouse button on the color box that appears next to the desired object.
Mouse Behavior A color palette with 16 colors appears.
Units 3. Click the left mouse button on one of the colors.
Zoom, Fill, and Set 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each object you want to recolor.
Executing Commands 5. Execute the command.
Global/Display
Object Lists Note: If you recolor objects while you are creating a geometric model and then
Display Object(s) save your files, objects are saved in their new colors. However, if you recolor
Fill View objects while using the Post Processor, the new colors are only in effect until
Displaying Objects you quit the Post Processor.
Adjusting the View
Global/Recolor Global/Refresh
Recolor Object(s)
New Color(s) Choose Global/Refresh if the screen gets too cluttered with temporary information that is
Changing the Color of no longer needed. The system erases all objects, lines, and other data from all viewing
Selected Objects windows and then immediately redraws the objects and lines. Only the objects and lines
Global/Refresh that are on screen when the command is chosen are redrawn.
Global/Defaults
Units Temporary information includes such things as plots, shaded views of objects, and
Grids meshes that are displayed with commands in the Post Processor. To refresh one viewing
Mouse window at a time, choose Window/Refresh.
Setting Defaults

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 565 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Global Menu
Global Menu Global/Defaults
Global Commands
Global Settings Choose Global/Defaults to do the following:
Displaying Objects
Mouse Behavior
Specify the desired unit of length.
Units
Adjust the field of view by entering a convenient scale for grids and axes.
Zoom, Fill, and Set Define the snap-to-point behavior of the cursor when points are selected from the
Executing Commands screen.
Global/Display Enable or disable keyboard entry.
Object Lists When you choose this command, the following window appears:
Display Object(s)
Fill View
Displaying Objects
Adjusting the View
Global/Recolor
Recolor Object(s)
New Color(s)
Changing the Color of
Selected Objects
Global/Refresh
Global/Defaults
Units
Grids
Mouse
Setting Defaults

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 566 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Global Menu
Global Menu Units
Global Commands
Global Settings The Units field displays the current units of the model, specified in the 2D Modeler. Ini-
Displaying Objects tially, all length dimensions are expressed in millimeters.
Mouse Behavior
Units Note: The unit of length has no effect on the units used for electromagnetic quanti-
ties that are referenced in the Post Processor. Electromagnetic quantities are
Zoom, Fill, and Set
always expressed in SI (MKS) units. For instance, even though the geometry
Executing Commands
of a problem is entered in millimeters, energy density is still displayed in
Global/Display
joules/meter2, not joules/mm2.
Object Lists
Display Object(s) Grids
Fill View
Displaying Objects Change the fields under Grids to display or modify the spacing associated with grids,
Adjusting the View axes, and axis divisions. Object dimensions are not affected by these fields. The dis-
Global/Recolor played values are always in the current unit of length.
Recolor Object(s)
This changes the field of view for all windows. Use the Window commands to change the
New Color(s)
field of view for one window without altering the global parameters.
Changing the Color of
Selected Objects 2D Grid Division
Global/Refresh
Use the 2d grid division field to control the distance (in the current unit of length)
Global/Defaults
between two adjacent grid points in 2D viewing windows. For example, a value of
Units
2.000e+00 indicates that the distance between two adjacent grid points represents 2 milli-
Grids
meters (assuming that millimeters is the current unit of length).
Mouse
Setting Defaults If you use the Window/Zoom command to zoom in or out on an object in a particular 2D
window, the spacing of the grid in that window changes. When you zoom in, the dots on
the grid get further apart. When you zoom out, they get closer together. However, the dis-
tance represented by neighboring grid points remains constant; that is, if the neighboring
grid points are 2 millimeters apart before the zoom, they are also 2 millimeters apart after
the zoom.
Go Back
Enter a new value to change the distance represented by adjacent grid points. Although
adjusting the value of the 2d grid division field changes the apparent size of objects on
Contents screen, the dimensions associated with objects do not change. An object that is modeled
as 3 inches long before the spacing was changed remains 3 inches long after the com-
Index mand is executed.

Maxwell Online Help System 567 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Global Menu
Global Menu Mouse Grid Spacing
Global Commands Use the Mouse grid spacing field to specify the spacing of the grid to which the cursor
Global Settings snaps when points are selected with the mouse in the 2D window.
Displaying Objects
Mouse Behavior The mouse grid is invisible and can be set independently of the 2D grid that is displayed
Units on the screen. The default mouse grid setting is half of the distance between displayed 2D
Zoom, Fill, and Set grid points.
Executing Commands
Mouse
Global/Display
Object Lists Change the fields under Mouse to alter the way in which points are selected with the
Display Object(s) mouse. When selecting points from the screen, you typically move the cursor to the
Fill View desired point and click the left mouse button. The system snaps to the closest mouse grid
Displaying Objects point or object point and uses the coordinates of that point rather than the exact location
Adjusting the View of the cursor.
Global/Recolor
Recolor Object(s) The mouse grid is invisible. It can be set independently of the grids that are displayed on
New Color(s) screen.
Changing the Color of Object Snap
Selected Objects
Global/Refresh Set the Object snap field to Yes to force the system to grab an object point whenever you
Global/Defaults click a mouse button near an object point. If the Grid snap mode is also in effect, the sys-
Units tem snaps to either an object point or a grid point, depending on which is closer.
Grids An object point is any point on the boundary of an object that is used to define the object.
Mouse Typically, object points are located at corners (vertices). For example, a cube has eight
Setting Defaults object points.
Grid Snap
Set the Grid snap field to Yes to force the system to grab the nearest point on the mouse
grid. If Object snap is also in effect, the system snaps to either an object point or a grid
point, depending on which is closer.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 568 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Global Menu
Global Menu Keyboard Entry
Global Commands Set the Keyboard entry field to Yes only if you wish to type in the coordinates of each
Global Settings point you select. If this field is set to Yes, each time a point is selected fields with u- and v-
Displaying Objects coordinates are displayed in the current unit of length. Accept them or enter new values. If
Mouse Behavior either Grid snap or Object snap is selected, the default coordinates are those associ-
Units ated with the closest grid or object point.
Zoom, Fill, and Set
Executing Commands In commands involving a series of points, such as Sketch/Line, points other than the first
Global/Display can be selected by entering the coordinates directly or by entering u- and v-offsets.
Object Lists Therefore, an Offset From prompt appears after the Sketch/Line command is chosen.
Display Object(s) Offset From indicates to what point, previous or first, the offset is relative.
Fill View
Displaying Objects Note: If the Object snap, Grid snap, and Keyboard entry fields are all set to No,
Adjusting the View the system is in free mode and selects whatever screen point you click a
Global/Recolor mouse button on, regardless of its coordinates. This mode is not recom-
Recolor Object(s) mended for use in creating objects because it is very difficult to select the
New Color(s) same point twice to complete an object.
Changing the Color of
Selected Objects Setting Defaults
Global/Refresh > To set the global defaults:
Global/Defaults 1. Set the fields in the Grids and Mouse list boxes.
Units 2. Choose Execute to complete the command.
Grids After you do, all dimensions and coordinates are displayed in the new unit of length, and
Mouse you must specify all subsequent dimensions and coordinates in the new units.
Setting Defaults

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 569 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Window Menu (Post Processor)
Window Menu Window Menu
Window Commands
Windows and Subwindows Use the Window commands to do the following:
Window/Setup
Window/Zoom
Zoom, shift, magnify, and refresh the view in the active subwindow.
Window/UnZoom
Add, subtract, or change the sizes of subwindows.
Window/Shift Display the distance between two points.
Window/Magnify
Window/Refresh
Window/Measure

Window Commands
The function of each Window command is as follows:
Setup Allows viewing windows to be added, removed, and resized. Viewing
parameters associated with the active window can also be adjusted with
this command.
Zoom Zooms in on an area of the active window.
Go Back UnZoom Returns the view in the active window to what it was before zooming.
Shift Shifts the field of view in the active window by the specified amount.
Contents Magnify Magnifies the view in the active window by the specified amount.
Refresh Refreshes the active window by redrawing all objects and lines.
Measure Displays the distance between two points.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 570 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Window Menu (Post Processor)
Window Menu Windows and Subwindows
Window Commands
Windows and Subwindows Windows and subwindows in the Post Processor are handled similarly to those in the 2D
Post Processor Win- modeler.
dows
Active Subwindow
Post Processor Windows
Manipulating Windows The Post Processor Window commands do not operate in the same manner as the Win-
Field of View dow commands in the 2D Modeler.
Resizing and Reposition-
ing Windows The Post Processor is actually a modified version of a general Post Processor capable of
Window/Setup displaying and manipulating 3D field quantities. Therefore, not all of the subwindow fea-
Window/Zoom tures that are present in the Post Processor will be applicable for your 2D applications.
Window/UnZoom For example, the viewing angles of the various subwindows can be modified to display the
Window/Shift model from any angle. This feature, which makes sense for 3D models, has little use in
Window/Magnify viewing 2D models except perhaps for displaying raised contour plots from a different
Window/Refresh angle.
Window/Measure
Active Subwindow
Initially, the Post Processor screen provides you with one active subwindow, which is dis-
played fully expanded on the screen. This subwindow is window 3, and is the active sub-
window. To display other subwindows, choose Window/Setup/OnOff. In general, the
Window commands operate on the active subwindow without affecting the other subwin-
dows.
Once you have displayed several subwindows at once, click on the subwindow you wish
to make the active subwindow.
The active window frame and the window itself may change color when it is selected. This
depends on how you have set up the following:
On workstations, the Maxwell*activeBackground and Maxwell*borderBackground
Go Back options in your .Xdefaults file.
On PCs, the Active Border option in the Windows Control Panel Color utility.
Contents The active window is automatically moved to the top of the stack and remains active until
you select a new one.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 571 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Window Menu (Post Processor)
Window Menu Manipulating Windows
Window Commands
Windows and Subwindows For even finer control over the position and size of windows than the Window commands
Post Processor Windows allow, use the window frames of the subwindows.
Active Subwindow Field of View
Manipulating Windows
Field of View The field of view refers to the section of the problem region that is being viewed. To mag-
Resizing and Reposi- nify or shift the field of view, use the Window/Shift, Window/Magnify, and Window/
tioning Windows Zoom commands.
Window/Setup Resizing and Repositioning Windows
Window/Zoom
Window/UnZoom A subwindow can be turned off or expanded to fill a larger portion of the screen. New sub-
Window/Shift windows can also be added to the screen. Use the Window/Setup/OnOff, Window/
Window/Magnify Setup/FullScreen, and Window/Setup/QuadScreen commands to manipulate the sub-
Window/Refresh windows in this way.
Window/Measure
If you are using a PC, you can gain even finer control of the position and size of subwin-
dows than the Window commands allow using the Motif or Microsoft Windows frame to
resize or move the windows.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 572 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Window Menu (Post Processor)
Window Menu Window/Setup
Window Commands
Windows and Subwindows Choose Window/Setup to change the view into the problem space, re-arrange viewing
Window/Setup windows, and turn windows on or off. The following commands are available:
Window/Setup/Settings Settings Sets viewing parameters for the active window such as the line of
Window/Setup/Full Screen sight, whether keys, axes and grids are displayed, and so forth.
Window/Setup/Quad
Full Screen Expands the active window to the full size of the screen.
Screen
Window/Setup/Quad All Quad Screen Returns the active window to its original size and location.
Window/Setup/On-Off Quad All Returns all windows to their original size and location.
Window/Zoom On-Off Allows viewing windows to be added to the screen.
Window/UnZoom
Window/Shift The Settings, Full Screen, and Quad Screen commands only affect the active window.
Window/Magnify Therefore, select the active window by clicking on it before choosing one of these com-
Window/Refresh mands.
Window/Measure

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 573 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Window Menu (Post Processor)
Window Menu Window/Setup/Settings
Window Commands
Windows and Subwindows Choose Window/Setup/Settings to alter the viewing parameters associated with the
Window/Setup active window. Altering these parameters allows you to redefine the line of sight from
Window/Setup/Settings which objects are viewed and to specify whether or not keys, grids, and axes should be
Window/Setup/Full Screen displayed.
Window/Setup/Quad When you choose this command, the following window appears:
Screen
Window/Setup/Quad All
Window/Setup/On-Off
Window/Zoom
Window/UnZoom
Window/Shift
Window/Magnify
Window/Refresh
Window/Measure

> To change the settings for a window:

1. Set the desired window settings.
2. Choose Execute to complete the command.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 574 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Window Menu (Post Processor)
Window Menu Theta and Phi
Window Commands The line of sight is the direction from which the problem space is viewed. As shown below,
Windows and Subwindows the direction is specified by two angles:
Window/Setup
Window/Setup/Settings The angle from the z-axis (Phi).
Window/Setup/Full Screen The angle from the x-axis (Theta).
Window/Setup/Quad
Visualize the line of sight when Phi =0 and Theta =0 as coinciding with the z-axis. Then,
Screen
to determine where the line of sight is for other values of Phi and Theta, first rotate the
Window/Setup/Quad All
line of sight away from the z-axis (pivoting around the y-axis) by Phi degrees. Then, rotate
Window/Setup/On-Off
the line of sight away from the x-axis (pivoting around the z-axis) by Theta degrees.
Window/Zoom
Window/UnZoom
Z
Window/Shift
Window/Magnify Line of Sight
Window/Refresh
Window/Measure
Phi

Theta

X
For 2D models, keep the defaults Phi=0, and Theta=270. In this way, a front-on view of
the model will always be displayed.
Show Axis
Go Back Set this field to No to prevent the x-, y-, and z-axes from being displayed in the active win-
dow.
Contents Show Grid
Set the Show xy grid, Show xz grid, and/or Show yz grid fields to Yes to display grids in
Index one or all of the corresponding planes.

Maxwell Online Help System 575 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Window Menu (Post Processor)
Window Menu Show Octant Only
Window Commands Initially, only the positive x-, y-, and z-axes are displayed. To display the negative portions
Windows and Subwindows of the axes as well, set this field to Yes. If an object that is being displayed falls outside the
Window/Setup positive octant, the negative axes are automatically displayed.
Window/Setup/Settings
Window/Setup/Full Show Key
Screen Set this field to No to prevent the grid key from appearing in the corner of the active view-
Window/Setup/Quad ing window.
Screen
Window/Setup/Quad All Show Section Key
Window/Setup/On-Off Set this field to No to prevent the uv section key from appearing in the active viewing win-
Window/Zoom dow. This section key shows the orientation of the plane that currently defines the cross
Window/UnZoom section viewed in 2D windows.
Window/Shift
Window/Magnify Window/Setup/Full Screen
Window/Refresh
Window/Measure Choose Window/Setup/Full Screen to expand the active window to the full size of the
screen.

Note: If you plan to work with one viewing window expanded to the full screen size
for a long period of time, choose Window/Setup/On-Off to turn off the win-
dows that are hidden from view. Otherwise, the system continues to draw
objects in the windows underneath, slowing the system down.
The same holds true if you use the Print option in the Maxwell Control Panel
to print screen captures on PostScript printers: turn off the hidden windows.
Otherwise, the system creates a screen description that includes the under-
lying windows, resulting in files that are larger than necessary.

Window/Setup/Quad Screen
Choose Window/Setup/Quad Screen to return the active window to its original size and
Go Back position. The windows initial position depends on its number. For example, the initial posi-
tion of Window 1 is in the upper left corner of the screen.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 576 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Window Menu (Post Processor)
Window Menu Window/Setup/Quad All
Window Commands
Windows and Subwindows Choose Window/Setup/Quad All to return all windows to their original size and position.
Window/Setup Only those windows that have been turned on with the Window/Setup/On-Off command
Window/Setup/Settings are displayed.
Window/Setup/Full Screen Window/Setup/On-Off
Window/Setup/Quad
Screen Choose Window/Setup/On-Off to add or subtract viewing windows from the screen. A
Window/Setup/Quad All pop-up window listing all available windows appears, as shown below (the default settings
Window/Setup/On-Off for the windows are shown).
Window/Zoom
Window/UnZoom
Window/Shift
Window/Magnify
Window/Refresh
Window/Measure

> To enable or disable a particular window:

1. To display a window, set the window to Yes. Windows set to No do not appear on
the screen.
2. Choose Execute to complete the command.
Go Back
Note: Window 3, the window that is displayed on many command menus, is the
only window that cannot be turned off.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 577 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Window Menu (Post Processor)
Window Menu Window/Zoom
Window Commands
Windows and Subwindows Choose Window/Zoom to zoom in on a region of the active window.
Window/Setup
> To zoom in on an area of the window:
Window/Zoom
1. Choose Window/Zoom.
Window/UnZoom
2. Select a point at one corner of region that is to be zoomed.
Window/Shift
3. Select the point in the diagonal corner.
Window/Magnify
Window/Refresh The system then expands the selected region to fill the active window.
Window/Measure
Note: The Window/Magnify command does not operate while a window is in a
zoomed state. Choose Window/UnZoom before attempting to use this com-
mand.

Window/UnZoom
Choose Window/UnZoom to set the field of view of the active window back to the size it
was before any zooming was performed. The settings associated with the unzoomed
state are those that were defined when the Global/Defaults and Window/Magnify com-
mands were last chosen.

Window/Shift
Choose Window/Shift to shift the field of view in the active window horizontally or verti-
cally. You will specify a reference point and its new location.
> To shift the field of view in the active window:
1. Choose Window/Shift.
2. Click the left mouse button on a point in the active window to select the reference
point.
Go Back 3. Click the left mouse button on a point in the active window to select the new
location for the reference point.
After you pick the two points, the field of view is shifted so that the reference point
Contents appears in the new location.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 578 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Window Menu (Post Processor)
Window Menu Window/Magnify
Window Commands
Windows and Subwindows Choose Window/Magnify to magnify the view in the active window by a specified
Window/Setup amount. This command also expects you to select a reference point and a new position
Window/Zoom for the reference point so that the objects of interest remain inside the field of view.
Window/UnZoom
> To magnify the view in the active window:
Window/Shift
1. Choose Window/Magnify. A window appears, showing the Multiple field.
Window/Magnify
2. Enter a value for the multiple. A number greater than 1 causes objects to appear
Window/Refresh
larger. A number less than 1 causes objects to appear smaller, resulting in a wider
Window/Measure
field of view. For example, a 2 results in objects appearing twice as large. A .5
results in objects appearing half as large.
3. Choose Execute.
4. Click on a point in the active window to select a reference point.
5. Click on a point to select the new location of the reference point.
The magnified image then appears on the screen. Objects appear larger or smaller,
depending on the value you specified. The reference point you selected appears at the
desired location.

Note: The command Window/Magnify does not operate while a window is in a

zoomed state. Choose Window/UnZoom before attempting to use this com-
mand.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 579 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Window Menu (Post Processor)
Window Menu Window/Refresh
Window Commands
Windows and Subwindows Choose Window/Refresh if the active viewing window gets too cluttered with temporary
Window/Setup information that is no longer needed. The system erases all objects, lines, and other data
Window/Zoom from the active viewing window and then immediately redraws the objects and lines. Only
Window/UnZoom the objects and lines that are on screen when the command is chosen are redrawn.
Window/Shift
Temporary information includes such things as plots, shaded views of objects, and
Window/Magnify
meshes that are displayed with the post-processing commands.
Window/Refresh
Window/Measure To refresh all viewing windows simultaneously, choose Global/Refresh.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 580 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Window Menu (Post Processor)
Window Menu Window/Measure
Window Commands
Windows and Subwindows Choose Window/Measure to display the distance between two selected points in the
Window/Setup active viewing window. The following window appears:
Window/Zoom
Window/UnZoom
Window/Shift
Window/Magnify
Window/Refresh
Window/Measure
Level of Precision

> To display the distance between two points in the active window:
1. Choose mouse associated with the first point.
2. Move the cursor to an object point in the active window and click the left mouse
button to pick the point. The coordinates of the point appear in the menu.
3. Choose mouse for the second point and pick the second point in the same way as
the first. The value that appears in the field distance represents the distance
between the two points.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to choose additional points for which you wish to display
the distances.
Go Back 5. Choose Return to exit the command.

Contents Note: Choose Global/Defaults to determine the snap-to behavior of the mouse.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 581 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Window Menu (Post Processor)
Window Menu Level of Precision
Window Commands
Windows and Subwindows Fifteen significant digits are displayed for distances and for the coordinates of object
Window/Setup points. Displaying this level of precision is required if you plan to use the data to specify
Window/Zoom the position of objects.
Window/UnZoom For example, if you use a distance as input to another command such as a command
Window/Shift on the Edit menu be sure to use the full level of precision. Otherwise, it is possible to
Window/Magnify end up with two objects that look like they are aligned but are actually offset by a small
Window/Refresh amount. In some cases, the difference will be enough to cause problems when attempting
Window/Measure to unite the objects or when attempting to mesh the objects.
Level of Precision
Note: In general, whenever you explicitly type in coordinates as input to commands
which control the position of objects, use as much precision as is available.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 582 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Show Menu
Show Menu Show Menu
Show Commands
Show/WireMesh Use the Show commands to inspect the finite element mesh associated with a structure
Show/ShadMesh and to display shaded views of objects.
Show/InfoMesh
Maximum and Minimum
Total Triangles
Vertex Points
Largest and Smallest Tri-
angle (By Object)

The Show commands are available when analyzing the solution.

Show Commands
The function of each Show command is as follows:
WireMesh Displays a wireframe model of the entire finite element mesh.
ShadMesh Displays a shaded view of the entire mesh, including the elements
in the interior of objects. The system shrinks the triangles before
displaying them, allowing the interior of the mesh to be partially
visible.
InfoMesh Displays information about the mesh, including the largest and
smallest triangles for each object.

These commands are used to inspect the mesh in the Post Processor.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 583 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Show Menu
Show Menu Show/WireMesh
Show Commands
Show/WireMesh Choose Show/WireMesh to display a wire model of the finite element mesh such as the
Show/ShadMesh one shown below. In this example, mesh lines have been drawn for the triangles that lie
Show/InfoMesh inside the objects in the model:
Maximum and Minimum
Total Triangles
Vertex Points
Largest and Smallest Tri-
angle (By Object)

More

Go Back
> To display a wire mesh:
1. Choose Show/WireMesh. A menu similar to the following one appears, displaying
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 584 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Show Menu
Show Menu the names of all the objects in the model:
Show Commands
Show/WireMesh
Show/ShadMesh
Show/InfoMesh
Maximum and Minimum
Total Triangles
Vertex Points
Largest and Smallest Tri-
angle (By Object)

2. Set Draw mesh to Yes for the objects that you wish to display.
3. For better quality screen captures, set Better Hardcopy to Yes.
On workstations, set this to Yes only if you are printing a screen capture to a
PostScript printer or saving it to a PostScript file. The system stores the plotted
image thats displayed on the screen as a bitmap, allowing you to make better
quality PostScript screen captures.
On PCs, set this to Yes to improve the quality of your screen captures, regardless
of the printer type.
Doing so requires additional memory.
4. Choose Execute to complete the command.
A wire model of the finite element mesh inside the selected objects is then displayed. The
Go Back edges of the triangles are displayed in an unshaded view.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 585 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Show Menu
Show Menu Show/ShadMesh
Show Commands
Show/WireMesh Choose Show/ShadMesh to display shaded views of the triangles that make up the finite
Show/ShadMesh element mesh. An example of such a view is shown below. In this example, only the trian-
Show/InfoMesh gles that lie inside the objects are shown:
Maximum and Minimum
Total Triangles
Vertex Points
Largest and Smallest Tri-
angle (By Object)

More

Go Back > To display a shaded view of the mesh:

1. Choose Show/ShadMesh. A menu similar to the one shown here appears, listing
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 586 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Show Menu
Show Menu the names of all objects:
Show Commands
Show/WireMesh
Show/ShadMesh
Show/InfoMesh
Maximum and Minimum
Total Triangles
Vertex Points
Largest and Smallest Tri-
angle (By Object)

2. Set Draw interior mesh to Yes for the objects for which to display the mesh.
3. For better quality screen captures of the mesh, set Better Hardcopy to Yes.
On UNIX workstations, set this to Yes only if you are printing a screen capture to a
PostScript printer or saving it to a PostScript file. The system stores the plotted
image thats displayed on the screen as a bitmap, allowing you to make better
quality PostScript screen captures.
On PCs, set this to Yes to improve the quality of your screen captures, regardless
of the printer type.
Doing so requires additional memory.
4. Choose Execute to complete the command.
A shaded view of the triangles inside the selected objects is then displayed. For purposes
Go Back of clarity, the triangles are shown slightly smaller than they actually are so that their
boundaries are obvious.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 587 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Show Menu
Show Menu Show/InfoMesh
Show Commands
Show/WireMesh Choose Show/InfoMesh to display information about the mesh. A window similar to the
Show/ShadMesh following one appears:
Show/InfoMesh
Maximum and Minimum
Total Triangles
Vertex Points
Largest and Smallest Tri-
angle (By Object)

Maximum and Minimum

The maximum and minimum coordinates of the extents of the problem space are dis-
played in the fields Maximum X, Maximum Y, Maximum Z, Minimum X, Minimum Y,
and Minimum Z. Minimum and maximum z-coordinates are displayed by default. They
are always zero.
Total Triangles
The Total Triangles field shows the total number of triangles in the finite element mesh.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 588 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Show Menu
Show Menu Vertex Points
Show Commands
Show/WireMesh The Vertex Points field shows the total number of vertex points in the finite element
Show/ShadMesh mesh. Each triangle has six vertex points, sharing each point with multiple neighbors.
Show/InfoMesh Largest and Smallest Triangle (By Object)
Maximum and Minimum
Total Triangles An indication of how uniformly the mesh has been refined in each object is given by the
Vertex Points size of the largest and smallest triangle in that object. The values shown are areas stated
Largest and Smallest in the current units.
Triangle (By Object)

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 589 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Post Menu
Post Commands
Plotting Solutions Use the Post commands shown below to do the following:
Line Segments
Plotting Common Field
Display shaded, contour, vector, and quantity versus distance plots of common field
quantities.
Quantities
Plotting Derived Field
For an electrostatic simulation, you can plot the electric potential, (x,y,z), the
electric field, E(x,y,z), and the electric flux density, D(x,y,z).
Quantities
Plotting Derived Quanti- For a magnetostatic or eddy current simulation, you can plot the current density,
ties Along a Line J(x,y,z), the magnetic field, H(x,y,z), and the magnetic flux density, B(x,y,z).
Analyzing Saturation Lev- For an eddy axial simulation, you can plot the electric field, E(x,y,z), the current
els in Nonlinear Materials density, J(x,y,z), and the z-component of the H-field.
Aborting Plots For a conduction (AC or DC) simulation, you can plot the electric potential, (x,y,z),
Post/Plot the electric field, E(x,y,z), and the current density, J(x,y,z).
Values Define field registers for use with the line calculator.
Type of Plot Display shaded, contour, vector, and quantity versus distance plots of field quantities
Location of Plot stored in plane and line registers.
Window When you choose Post from the Post Processor menu bar, the following menu appears:
Color
Better Hardcopy
Phase

Note: For simplicitys sake, the information here is written with cartesian (x,y,z)
geometries in mind. It applies as well to axisymmetric geometries (r,,z).
Go Back Coordinates are expressed as 3 dimensional points. In Maxwell 2D, z will be
set to zero for cartesian geometries, and will be set to zero for axisymmet-
ric geometries.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 590 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Post Commands
Post Commands
Plotting Solutions The function of each Post command is as follows:
Line Segments Plot Displays vector plots, contour plots, shaded plots, and value versus
Plotting Common Field distance graphs of common field quantities.
Quantities
Line Enters lines as registers in the line calculator and plots the field
Plotting Derived Field
quantity in the top line register as a function of distance along a line.
Quantities
Plotting Derived Quanti- Plane Enters planes as registers in the plane calculator and displays con-
ties Along a Line tour, arrow, and shaded plots of the field quantity in the top register
Analyzing Saturation Lev- of the plane calculator.
els in Nonlinear Materials BH Examine (Magnetostatic problems with nonlinear materials only.) Allows you
Aborting Plots to compute the B and H values for selected points in a nonlinear
Post/Plot material.
Values BH Plot (Magnetostatic problems with nonlinear materials only.) Allows you
Type of Plot to plot the location of the points that were selected with the Post/BH
Location of Plot Examine command on a nonlinear materials BH-curve. This
Window enables you to analyze saturation levels.
Color
Better Hardcopy The Post/Plot command accesses an interface for plotting basic field quantities. The
Phase Post/Line and Post/Plane commands allow you to plot quantities in the top registers of
the calculators that are derived from the basic field quantities using the Calc commands.
Together, these commands provide you with powerful post-processing features that let
you display, manipulate, and analyze the field solution.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 591 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Plotting Solutions
Post Commands
Plotting Solutions Use the Post commands to plot field quantities either common field quantities, such as
Line Segments D, B, E, and H, or derived quantities from the solution calculators.
Plotting Common Field
Quantities
Line Segments
Plotting Derived Field To do any kind of plotting along a path, you first need to define the line segment over
Quantities which the plot is to be displayed. For example, to display a graph of how the magnitude of
Plotting Derived Quanti- the voltage varies along a given path, first define a line segment that follows the desired
ties Along a Line path using the Post/Line/Define command.
Analyzing Saturation Lev-
els in Nonlinear Materials Plotting Common Field Quantities
Aborting Plots Use the Post/Plot command to display a common quantity such as the B-field, H-field, J-
Post/Plot field, and so forth. You can specify whether to plot over the entire problem region or along
Values a path defined by the Post/Line/Define command.
Type of Plot
Location of Plot Plotting Derived Field Quantities
Window
Color Maxwell 2D supports a set of calculators that allow you to load basic field quantities into
Better Hardcopy registers and to compute and then plot derived quantities from the basic fields. For exam-
Phase ple, because the current density field, J(x,y,z), is equal to the curl of the H-field,
J = H

you can compute the current density field by loading H into the plane calculator and taking
its curl. You can perform other functions using the plane calculator such as integrating
a quantity in the problem region.
To display a shaded, contour, or arrow plot of a derived field quantity in the problem
region, use the Post/Plane command.

Go Back Note: Remember that you can only choose the Post/Plane/Contour and Post/
Plane/Shade commands when you have a scalar value in the top register of
the plane calculator. For this example, if you choose magnitude before exit-
Contents ing the plane calculator, you can then choose either of these commands to
plot this scalar value.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 592 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Plotting Derived Quantities Along a Line
Post Commands
Plotting Solutions It is also possible to plot value versus distance graphs of a derived quantity along a line.
Line Segments To plot along a line, use the Post/Line command. You can perform other functions using
Plotting Common Field the line calculator such as integrating a field quantity over a line.
Quantities Analyzing Saturation Levels in Nonlinear Materials
Plotting Derived Field
Quantities To view saturation levels in nonlinear materials, use the Post/BH Examine command to
Plotting Derived Quanti- select the points at which you want to determine the level of saturation. Then, use the
ties Along a Line Post/BH Plot command to see where the B and H values of these points lie on the mate-
Analyzing Saturation rials BH-curve.
Levels in Nonlinear Aborting Plots
Materials
Aborting Plots Choose Abort from the progress bar to stop a plot that is currently in progress.
Post/Plot
Values
Type of Plot
Location of Plot
Window
Color
Better Hardcopy
Phase

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 593 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Post/Plot
Post Commands
Plotting Solutions Choose Post/Plot to display vector plots, contour plots, shaded plots, and value versus
Line Segments distance graphs. The following window appears:
Plotting Common Field
Quantities
Plotting Derived Field
Quantities
Plotting Derived Quanti-
ties Along a Line
Analyzing Saturation Lev-
els in Nonlinear Materials
Aborting Plots
Post/Plot
Values
Type of Plot
Location of Plot
Window
Color
Better Hardcopy
Phase

> The general procedure for using this command is as follows:

1. If appropriate, define the line over which the field quantity is to be plotted. Use the
Post/Line/Define command.
2. Choose Post/Plot to display the Plot Menu.
3. Set the Value (the field quantity) that is to be plotted to Yes. For example, set Mag
More E to Yes to display a plot of the E-fields magnitude.
4. Set the desired Plot Type to Yes. For example, set Shaded to Yes to display a
shaded plot.
Go Back 5. Choose the Location in the problem space where the field quantity is to be plotted.
For example, to display the magnitude of a field quantity over a line, set Line to
Contents Yes, then choose the desired line segment.
6. Set the Window in which to display the plot to Yes. In general, leave this option set
to the default (Window 3, the main window that is displayed in the Post Processor).
Index 7. Do one of the following to set the color for the plot:

Maxwell Online Help System 594 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu To display a single-color plot, leave Spectrum set to No and choose a color by:
Post Commands a. Clicking the left mouse button on the square next to Color. A palette of 16
Plotting Solutions colors appears.
Line Segments b. Select the color you want. The new color appears in the square.
Plotting Common Field To display a spectrum plot, set Spectrum to Yes.
Quantities 8. (AC solvers only.) Set the Phase field to the phase angle at which the selected
Plotting Derived Field field quantity is to be plotted.
Quantities 9. Choose Execute.
Plotting Derived Quanti-
The plot appears in the selected window.
ties Along a Line
Analyzing Saturation Lev- The Plot Menu only allows you to plot common field quantities. To plot quantities that
els in Nonlinear Materials have been computed using the calculators, use Post/Plane and Post/Line.
Aborting Plots
Post/Plot
Values
Values You can plot field quantities, material properties, energy, and power, depend on the solver
Type of Plot selected for the model.
Location of Plot
Window Note: For AC solvers, the phase angle at which these quantities are plotted is
Color entered in the Phase field.
Better Hardcopy
Phase When you plot a material property for an anisotropic material, you are shown
the value of the property in a single direction. For XY problems, value of
material properties in the x direction are plotted; for RZ problems, in the z
direction. For isotropic materials, the value of a property is the same in all
directions.

The following material properties are available for plotting:

permeability (r0)
permittivity (r0)
conductivity ()
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 595 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Electrostatic Field Quantities
Post Commands The following values may be plotted for an electrostatic field simulation:
Plotting Solutions
Line Segments Voltage Scalar field representing the electric potential, (x,y,z).
Plotting Common Field E Vector Vector field representing the electric field, E(x,y,z).
Quantities D Vector Vector field representing the electric flux density, D(x,y,z).
Plotting Derived Field Mag E Scalar field representing the magnitude of the electric field,
Quantities |E|(x,y,z).
Plotting Derived Quanti- Mag D Scalar field representing the magnitude of the electric flux density,
ties Along a Line |D|(x,y,z).
Analyzing Saturation Lev-
epsilon_x Permittivity.
els in Nonlinear Materials
Aborting Plots energy Stored electric field energy.
Post/Plot AC and DC Conduction Field Quantities
Values
Type of Plot The following values may be plotted for AC or DC conduction field simulations:
Location of Plot Voltage Scalar field representing the electric potential, (x,y,z,t).
Window E Vector Vector field representing the electric field, E(x,y,z,t).
Color
J Vector Vector field representing the current density field, J(x,y,z,t).
Better Hardcopy
Phase Mag E Scalar field representing the magnitude of the electric field,
|E|(x,y,z,t).
Mag J Scalar field representing the magnitude of the current density
|J|(x,y,z,t).
epsilon_x Permittivity (AC Conduction).
sigma_x Conductivity.
power Power dissipated.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 596 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Magnetostatic, Transient, and Eddy Current Field Quantities
Post Commands The following values may be plotted if a DC magnetic (magnetostatic), transient, or AC
Plotting Solutions magnetic (eddy current) field simulation has been performed:
Line Segments
Plotting Common Field Flux Lines Scalar field representing the z-component of the magnetic vector
Quantities potential, A. Because all current is assumed to flow perpendicular
Plotting Derived Field to the cross section, plotting equipotential contours of A is equiva-
Quantities lent to plotting magnetic flux lines.
Plotting Derived Quanti- B Vector Vector field representing the magnetic flux density, B(x,y,z).
ties Along a Line
H Vector Vector field representing the magnetic field, H(x,y,z).
Analyzing Saturation Lev-
els in Nonlinear Materials Mag B Scalar field representing the magnitude of the magnetic flux density,
Aborting Plots |B|(x,y,z).
Post/Plot Mag H Scalar field representing the magnitude of the magnetic flux density,
Values |H|(x,y,z).
Type of Plot
Mu_x Permeability. This is Mu_z for RZ problems.
Location of Plot
Window Epsilon_x Permittivity (Eddy Current). This is Epsilon_z for RZ problems.
Color Sigma_X . This is Sigma_z for RZ problems.
Better Hardcopy 1
Phase Energy For linear materials, the actual energy defined by --- B HdV .
2V
For nonlinear materials, the energy given by dB HdV .
V
Coenergy For nonlinear materials, the energy given by B ( dH ) ( dV ) .
V
1
App Egy For nonlinear materials, the apparent energy given by --- B HdV .
2V
Power Power dissipated (Eddy Current).

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 597 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Eddy Axial Field Quantities
Post Commands The following values may be plotted if an eddy axial field simulation has been performed:
Plotting Solutions
Line Segments H(z) Scalar field representing the z-component of the magnetic field,
Plotting Common Field Hz(x,y,z,t).
Quantities J Vector Vector field representing the current density field, J(x,y,z,t).
Plotting Derived Field E Vector Vector field representing the electric field, E(x,y,z,t).
Quantities Mag J Scalar field representing the magnitude of the current density |J|(x,y,z,t).
Plotting Derived Quanti- Mag E Scalar field representing the magnitude of the electric field, |E|(x,y,z,t).
ties Along a Line
epsilon_x Permittivity.
Analyzing Saturation Lev-
els in Nonlinear Materials mu Permeability.
Aborting Plots sigma_x Conductivity.
Post/Plot energy Stored electric field energy.
Values power Power dissipated.
Type of Plot
Location of Plot Type of Plot
Window
Choose the Plot Type from the Plot Menu. The available options are:
Color
Better Hardcopy Arrow Displays arrows representing the magnitude and direction of a vector field
Phase quantity.
Shaded Displays colors representing the magnitude of a scalar field quantity.
Contour Displays the contours of equal value associated with a scalar field quan-
tity.
Graph Displays a graph of the desired field quantity versus the distance along a
line.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 598 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Arrow Plot
Post Commands Set Arrow to Yes to plot a vector field quantity. Arrows are used to represent the direction
Plotting Solutions (and optionally, the magnitude) of the field quantity. The following figure shows the E-field
Line Segments for two striplines on a substrate:
Plotting Common Field
Quantities
Plotting Derived Field
Quantities
Plotting Derived Quanti-
ties Along a Line
Analyzing Saturation Lev-
els in Nonlinear Materials
Aborting Plots
Post/Plot
Values
Type of Plot
Location of Plot
Window
Color
Better Hardcopy
Phase

Go Back To redisplay the arrow plot with different scaling options, choose Post/Plane/Arrow.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 599 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Shaded Plot
Post Commands Set Shaded to Yes to display a shaded plot of a scalar field quantity. The magnitude of
Plotting Solutions the quantity being plotted is represented by a range of colors. A color scale showing the
Line Segments range of values also appears on the screen. A black and white rendering of a shaded plot
Plotting Common Field of voltages for a cracked plate is shown below. Only scalar quantities can be displayed as
Quantities shaded plots.
Plotting Derived Field
Quantities
Plotting Derived Quanti-
ties Along a Line
Analyzing Saturation Lev-
els in Nonlinear Materials
Aborting Plots
Post/Plot
Values
Type of Plot
Location of Plot
Window
Color
Better Hardcopy
Phase

To redisplay a shaded plot that is scaled differently, choose Post/Plane/Shade.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 600 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Contour Plot
Post Commands Set Contour to Yes to display the equal value contours of a scalar field quantity. A con-
Plotting Solutions tour plot of the electric field is shown below. Only scalar quantities can be displayed as
Line Segments contour plots.
Plotting Common Field
Quantities
Plotting Derived Field
Quantities
Plotting Derived Quanti-
ties Along a Line
Analyzing Saturation Lev-
els in Nonlinear Materials
Aborting Plots
Post/Plot
Values
Type of Plot
Location of Plot
Window
Color
Better Hardcopy
Phase

Go Back To redisplay a contour plot that is scaled differently, choose Post/Plane/Contour.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 601 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Graph (Line Plots)
Post Commands Set Graph to Yes to display a value versus distance plot of a scalar field quantity over a
Plotting Solutions path (line).
Line Segments
Plotting Common Field The following figure shows a line plot in which the magnitude of the electric potential is
Quantities plotted along a line that cuts through the middle of a structure. From the plot, you can see
Plotting Derived Field that the magnitude of the electric potential starts off negative on one side of the structure,
Quantities increases to zero volts in the middle, and continues to increase on the other side of the
Plotting Derived Quanti- structure.
ties Along a Line
Analyzing Saturation Lev-
els in Nonlinear Materials
Aborting Plots
Post/Plot
Values
Type of Plot
Location of Plot
Window
Color
Better Hardcopy
Phase

Unlike shaded, contour, and vector plots which display the portion of a scalar field
quantity that lies in the problem region a graph displays the portion of a field quantity
Go Back that lies along a path. Therefore, when displaying a line graph you must first identify a line.
Create the desired line segment with the command Post/Line/Define.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 602 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Adjusting a Line Graphs Display
Post Commands After a line plot is displayed, you can adjust the way in which a line plot is displayed or
Plotting Solutions view coordinates for points by using the following commands in the Plot Options menu:
Line Segments
Plotting Common Field Plot Settings Specifies axis scales, labels, plot headings, and the minimum and
Quantities maximum field values to be plotted. Also determines the axis tick
Plotting Derived Field mark and grid settings. For more details, see the description of
Quantities the Plot/Format Axes command.
Plotting Derived Quanti- Graph Settings Specifies the color, line thickness, and line style of a trace on a
ties Along a Line plot. Also determines the type of markers displayed at solution
Analyzing Saturation Lev- data points, and whether the trace is visible on the plot. For more
els in Nonlinear Materials details, see the description of the Plot/Format Graphs command.
Aborting Plots Zoom In Magnifies a specific portion of the graph.
Post/Plot Zoom Out Reduces a section of the graph.
Values Fit All Shows all of the available data on the graph.
Type of Plot
Show Coordinates Shows the coordinates of a point on the graph.
Location of Plot
Window Save As Save the current plot to a file.
Color Zoom In
Better Hardcopy > To zoom in on a portion of the graph:
Phase 1. Choose Zoom In from the Plot Options menu.
2. Click the left mouse button at one corner of the rectangular region you want to
magnify.
3. Drag the mouse until the rectangle drawn on the screen represents the region in
which you are interested.
4. Click the left mouse button again.
The selected region is shown at the appropriate magnification. To cancel the zoom opera-
tion while selecting the region, click with the right mouse button.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 603 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Zoom Out
Post Commands > To zoom out of a portion of the graph:
Plotting Solutions 1. Choose Zoom Out from the Plot Options menu. Click the left mouse button at
Line Segments one corner of the rectangular region you want to reduce.
Plotting Common Field 2. Drag the mouse until the rectangle encloses the region you are interested in.
Quantities 3. Click the left mouse button again. The selected region is shown at the appropriate
Plotting Derived Field magnification.
Quantities To cancel the zoom operation while selecting the region, click with the right mouse button.
Plotting Derived Quanti-
ties Along a Line Fit All
Analyzing Saturation Lev- > To redisplay the entire plot on the graph:
els in Nonlinear Materials Choose Fit All from the Plot Options menu. The entire plot, as defined by Plot
Aborting Plots Settings, is displayed.
Post/Plot Show Coordinates
Values > To display the coordinates of a point on the graph:
Type of Plot 1. Choose Show Coordinates from the Plot Options menu.
Location of Plot 2. Click the left mouse button on the desired point to display its coordinates.
Window 3. Continue to click the left mouse button on additional points.
Color
Better Hardcopy When you are done, click the right mouse button.
Phase Save As
> To display the coordinates of a point on the graph:
1. Choose Save As from the Plot Options menu.
2. Enter the path and the filename where you want to save the plot.
3. Choose OK.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 604 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Location of Plot
Post Commands
Plotting Solutions After choosing the type of plot, choose whether to display the plot over the entire problem
Line Segments region or over a line segment.
Plotting Common Field Plane
Quantities
Plotting Derived Field Displays a field quantity over the entire problem region. Plane can only be used with
Quantities Shaded or Contour plot types.
Plotting Derived Quanti- Line
ties Along a Line
Analyzing Saturation Lev- Displays a quantity versus distance graph. The names of all lines that have been defined
els in Nonlinear Materials with the command Post/Line/Define are displayed. Choose one, and then choose Exe-
Aborting Plots cute. After you do, the system plots the selected scalar value as a function of distance
Post/Plot along the line. Line can only be used with the plot type Graph.
Values Window
Type of Plot
Location of Plot Choose the subwindow in which to display the plot by setting the desired window to Yes.
Window Window 3 the main subwindow in the Post Processor is selected by default. To dis-
Color play additional windows from which to choose, use the Window/Setup/On-Off command.
Better Hardcopy Color
Phase
Select the color of the plot in one of the following ways:
Set Spectrum to Yes to display a plot of several different colors. In general, areas with
low field values are plotted in blue, and areas with high field values are plotted in red.
Choose a single color to display a plot using different shades of one color. The lowest
field values are plotted in the darkest shade of the color, and the highest field values
are plotted in the lightest. To do so:
1. Set Spectrum to No.
2. Click the left mouse button on the color box. A color palette appears.
Go Back 3. Choose the desired color.

Contents Note: If your computer has a black and white screen or you are printing a black and
white screen capture, plot field quantities using a single color. Choosing
Spectrum results in the plot being a single shade of gray because all colors
Index are displayed at the same intensity.

Maxwell Online Help System 605 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post Menu Better Hardcopy
Post Commands
Plotting Solutions Improves the quality of printed plots.
Line Segments On UNIX workstations, set this to Yes only if you are printing a screen capture to a
Plotting Common Field PostScript printer or saving it to a PostScript file. The system stores the plotted image
Quantities on the screen as a bitmap, allowing you to make better quality PostScript screen
Plotting Derived Field captures.
Quantities On PCs, set this to Yes to improve the quality of your screen captures, regardless of
Plotting Derived Quanti- the printer type.
ties Along a Line
Analyzing Saturation Lev- Be aware that this uses more computer memory than if an ordinary plot is drawn.
els in Nonlinear Materials Phase
Aborting Plots
Post/Plot (AC Conduction, Eddy Axial, Eddy Current)
Values All AC field quantities oscillate at the frequency specified when you generated a solution
Type of Plot for the model. The Maxwell 2D represents these quantities as phasors. For instance, the
Location of Plot magnetic flux density, B, can be represented as:
Window
B ( x, y, t ) = B ( x, y ) cos ( t + )
Color
Better Hardcopy
where:
Phase
is the angular frequency at which the magnetic field and source currents are
oscillating, specified during the solution.
is the phase angle (the offset from a cosine wave that peaks at t=0).
To view field quantities at different points in their cycle, enter a different value for the
phase angle, , in the Phase field. Enter it in degrees.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 606 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Post/Line
General Procedure
Post/Line/Define Choose Post/Line to define line segments, enter line segments as registers in the line
Post/Line/Entry calculator and display value versus distance graphs of the field quantity in the top register
Post/Line/Display of the line calculator.
Post/Line/Plot
The following commands appear when you choose Post/Line:
Post/Line/Value
Post/Plane Define Allows you to specify a line segment over which a field quantity is to be
General Procedure plotted or integrated.
Scale to Window or Scale Entry Enters line segments as registers in the line calculator.
to Problem Display Displays the location of any line segment that has already been entered
Post/Plane/Contour as a line register.
Post/Plane/Contour Dis- Plot Plots a value versus distance graph of the scalar field quantity in the top
play line register.
Post/Plane/Shade Value Maps values from the top plane register to the top line register.
Post/Plane/Arrow
Post/Plane/Arrow Region The Post/Line commands are graphical support commands for the line calculator. They
Post/Plane/Arrow Display allow you to plot value versus distance graphs of field quantities that have been manipu-
Post/Plane/Max-Min lated with the line calculator.
Post/Plane/Value
Post/BH-Examine General Procedure
Things to Consider > The general procedure for using the Post/Line commands to display value versus
Post/BH Plot distance plots is as follows:
Plot Options 1. Choose Post/Line/Define to create the path in which you are interested.
2. Choose Post/Line/Entry to declare the line segment as a register.
3. Choose Calc/Plane to gain access to the plane calculator.
4. Use the appropriate plane calculator commands to load a field quantity (such as B
More or H) into a plane register. Then manipulate that quantity to obtain the desired
results. For example, take the dot product of B and H to obtain the energy density
field.
Go Back 5. Choose Calc/Line to gain access to the line calculator.
6. Choose Calc/Line/value to map the field quantity that is in the top register of the
Contents plane calculator to the top register of the line calculator.
7. Choose Post/Line/Plot to plot the value of the field quantity in the top line register
versus distance along the selected line.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 607 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Only use this procedure to plot field quantities that need to be manipulated in the line cal-
General Procedure culator. To plot common field quantities that do not need to be manipulated, use the com-
Post/Line/Define mand Post/Plot instead.
Post/Line/Entry
Post/Line/Define
Post/Line/Display
Post/Line/Plot Choose Post/Line/Define to identify a line segment over which a field quantity is to be
Post/Line/Value plotted or used as a line calculator register. The following window appears:
Post/Plane
General Procedure
Scale to Window or Scale
to Problem
Post/Plane/Contour
Post/Plane/Contour Dis-
play
Post/Plane/Shade
Post/Plane/Arrow
Post/Plane/Arrow Region
Post/Plane/Arrow Display
Post/Plane/Max-Min
Post/Plane/Value
Post/BH-Examine
Things to Consider
Post/BH Plot
Plot Options

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 608 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Defining Line Segments
General Procedure > To define a line segment:
Post/Line/Define 1. Choose Post/Line/Define.
Post/Line/Entry 2. Do one of the following:
Post/Line/Display Draw a line consisting of one or more straight line segments.
Post/Line/Plot Draw an arc.
Post/Line/Value Define the outside edge of an object as a line.
Post/Plane If necessary, use the Zoom, Fill, Set, and Refresh buttons at the bottom of the
General Procedure menu to change the display of the problem region before defining the line
Scale to Window or Scale segment.
to Problem
Post/Plane/Contour Note: The mouse must be in object snap mode if you are to pick object points
Post/Plane/Contour Dis- (points at the vertices of objects) when defining the line segment. If neces-
play sary, use the Global/Defaults command to set the mouse mode.
Post/Plane/Shade
Post/Plane/Arrow 3. Enter a name for the new line segment in the Line segment name field.
Post/Plane/Arrow Region Otherwise, the default name (set with the Global/Defaults command) is used.
Post/Plane/Arrow Display 4. Choose one of the following to complete the command:
Post/Plane/Max-Min Choose Execute to define the line and remain in the Line Segment Menu.
Post/Plane/Value Choose Execute and Return to define the line and quit the Line Segment Menu.
Post/BH-Examine Straight Line Segments
Things to Consider > To define a straight line segment:
Post/BH Plot 1. Choose Enter Line. The cursor changes to a crosshair.
Plot Options 2. Click the left mouse button on the first point in the line.
3. Click the left mouse button on each subsequent point.

Note: If desired, click the right mouse button to delete the last point you added.

Go Back 4. Click the left mouse button twice on the final point.
The x- and y-coordinates of the lines origin and endpoint are displayed on the left side of
Contents the screen.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 609 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Arcs
General Procedure > To define an arc as a line segment:
Post/Line/Define 1. Choose Enter Arc. A window appears, asking you to define the direction of the
Post/Line/Entry arc.
Post/Line/Display 2. Do one of the following:
Post/Line/Plot Choose Clockwise to create an arc that is drawn clockwise from the start point to
Post/Line/Value the endpoint.
Post/Plane Choose Counterclockwise to create an arc that is drawn counterclockwise from
General Procedure the start point to the endpoint.
Scale to Window or Scale 3. Move the cursor to the center of the arc and click the left mouse button.
to Problem 4. Move the cursor to the start point of the arc and click the left mouse button.
Post/Plane/Contour 5. Move the cursor to the endpoint of the arc and click the left mouse button.
Post/Plane/Contour Dis- 6. After the endpoint of the arc is defined, a window appears, asking you to define the
play number of segments in the arc.
Post/Plane/Shade 7. Either accept the default of 10 or enter a new value. Because the system
Post/Plane/Arrow represents all curves by a series of line segments, you need to specify the desired
Post/Plane/Arrow Region number of segments. The default of 10 creates an approximation of the arc
Post/Plane/Arrow Display consisting of 10 line segments.
Post/Plane/Max-Min 8. Choose Continue.
Post/Plane/Value
The x- and y- coordinates of each point on the arc are displayed on the left side of the
Post/BH-Examine
screen.
Things to Consider
Post/BH Plot Object Edges
Plot Options > To define the outside edge of an object as a line segment:
1. Choose Enter Object. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
2. Click the right mouse button on the desired object.
The x- and y-coordinates of each vertex point on the object are displayed on the left side
of the screen.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 610 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Modifying Previously Defined Line Segments
General Procedure > To inspect or modify the points associated with any previously defined line segment:
Post/Line/Define 1. Set the desired line segment in the Line Segment List list box to Yes. The
Post/Line/Entry coordinates defining the line appear.
Post/Line/Display 2. Edit the coordinates of the points that define the line segment.
Post/Line/Plot 3. If desired, enter a new name in Line segment name to prevent the existing line
Post/Line/Value segment from being overwritten.
Post/Plane 4. Choose Execute or Execute and Return to complete the command. No change is
General Procedure made to the line segment until you choose one of these command.
Scale to Window or Scale Displaying Line Segments
to Problem > To display an existing line segment:
Post/Plane/Contour 1. Set the desired line in the Line Segment List list box to Yes.
Post/Plane/Contour Dis- 2. Choose Display. The system displays the line segment.
play Deleting Line Segments
Post/Plane/Shade > To delete a previously defined line segment:
Post/Plane/Arrow 1. Set the desired line in the Line Segment List list box to Yes.
Post/Plane/Arrow Region 2. Set Delete to Yes.
Post/Plane/Arrow Display 3. Choose Execute and Return or Execute to complete the command.
Post/Plane/Max-Min
Post/Plane/Value Post/Line/Entry
Post/BH-Examine Use Post/Line/Entry to link a line segment to a line register.
Things to Consider
Post/BH Plot > To link a line segment to a line register:
Plot Options 1. Choose Post/Line/Define to create the line segment.
2. Choose Post/Line/Entry. A list of the names of all line segments appears.
3. Set the name of the desired line segment to Yes.
4. Choose Execute.
You cannot use the line calculator until at least one line segment has been linked to a reg-
ister.
Go Back
Note: When the command Post/Plot is used to display a graph over a line seg-
ment, the system automatically loads that line segment as a line register.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 611 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Post/Line/Display
General Procedure
Post/Line/Define Choose Post/Line/Display to display the location of all lines that are linked to line regis-
Post/Line/Entry ters.
Post/Line/Display Post/Line/Plot
Post/Line/Plot
Post/Line/Value Choose Post/Line/Plot to display a scalar or vector value versus distance plot of the data
Post/Plane in the top line register. The result is a plot similar to the one generated by selecting the
General Procedure Graph plot from the Plot Menu. The value of the field quantity stored in the top line regis-
Scale to Window or Scale ter is plotted over the length of the appropriate line segment. You can format the line plot
to Problem as you would one generated by the Graph command from the Plot Menu.
Post/Plane/Contour If the quantity in the line register is a vector, the Post Processor displays three separate
Post/Plane/Contour Dis- plots, one for each component of the vector. To plot a scalar field quantity, you can also
play use the Post/Plot command.
Post/Plane/Shade
Post/Plane/Arrow Post/Line/Value
Post/Plane/Arrow Region
After a line segment has been created to serve as a line register, choose Post/Line/Value
Post/Plane/Arrow Display
to map the field quantity in the top plane register to the line register. This command is
Post/Plane/Max-Min
identical to the Calc/Line/value command.
Post/Plane/Value
Post/BH-Examine > To map the field quantity:
Things to Consider 1. Create the desired line with Post/Line/Define.
Post/BH Plot 2. Declare the line as a register with Post/Line/Entry.
Plot Options 3. Choose Calc/Plane and place the desired field quantity in the top register of the
plane calculator.
4. Choose Post/Line/Value. If no other line register exists, a prompt appears, asking
you to enter the number of points in the line.
5. Enter a value or choose Return to accept the default of 100 points.
The Post Processor then explicitly maps a field value to evenly spaced points along the
Go Back line. Values at all intermediate points along the line are interpolated from the explicitly
defined points. All subsequent lines automatically receive the same number of explicitly
defined points as the first register.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 612 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Post/Plane
General Procedure
Post/Line/Define Choose Post/Plane to display shaded, contour, and arrow plots of the field quantity in the
Post/Line/Entry top register of the plane calculator.
Post/Line/Display
The following commands are available:
Post/Line/Plot
Post/Line/Value Contour Displays a contour plot of the scalar quantity in the top plane register.
Post/Plane Contour Display Redisplays the last contour plot created.
General Procedure Shade Displays a shaded plot of the scalar quantity in the top plane register.
Scale to Window or Scale Arrow Displays an arrow plot of the field in the top plane register.
to Problem Arrow Region Displays an arrow plot in the region you select.
Post/Plane/Contour
Arrow Display Redisplays the last arrow plot created.
Post/Plane/Contour Dis-
play Max - Min Displays the maximum and minimum values of the quantity in the top
Post/Plane/Shade plane register along with their locations in the problem region.
Post/Plane/Arrow Value Lets you determine the value of a field quantity at any point in the
Post/Plane/Arrow Region problem region, and map that value to the top register of the number
Post/Plane/Arrow Display calculator.
Post/Plane/Max-Min
Post/Plane/Value The Post/Plane commands are graphical support commands for the plane calculator that
Post/BH-Examine allow you to display plots of field quantities that were manipulated with the calculators.
Things to Consider General Procedure
Post/BH Plot > The general procedure for using the Post/Plane commands to display plots is:
Plot Options 1. Choose Calc/Plane to access the plane calculator.
2. Use the appropriate calculator commands to load a field quantity (such as the H-
field) into the top register. Then, manipulate that quantity as desired.
3. Choose Post/Plane/Contour, Post/Plane/Shade, or Post/Plane/Arrow to display
a contour, shaded, or arrow plot of the field quantity in the top plane register.

Go Back Note: Remember that you need a scalar value to create a contour or shaded plot,
and a vector value to create an arrow plot.

Contents
This procedure is primarily used to display field quantities that need to be manipulated in
the plane calculator. To plot common field quantities such as the E-field or the H-field, use
Index the Post/Plot command instead.

Maxwell Online Help System 613 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Scale to Window or Scale to Problem
General Procedure
Post/Line/Define When you choose the Post/Plane/Shade or Post/Plane Contour command, a menu sim-
Post/Line/Entry ilar to the following one appears, allowing you to set maximum and minimum plotting limits
Post/Line/Display on the field value that is to be plotted. The new release provides two new command but-
Post/Line/Plot tons for both shaded and contour plots Scale To Window and Scale To Problem
Post/Line/Value which give you additional control over the plotting operation.
Post/Plane
General Procedure
Scale to Window or
Scale to Problem
Post/Plane/Contour
Post/Plane/Contour Dis-
play
Post/Plane/Shade
Post/Plane/Arrow
Post/Plane/Arrow Region
Post/Plane/Arrow Display
Post/Plane/Max-Min
Post/Plane/Value
Post/BH-Examine
Things to Consider
Post/BH Plot
Plot Options

Choose Scale To Problem (the default) to include all the triangles in the problem
when the software sets the scaling for the plot.
Go Back Choose Scale To Window to include only the triangles contained in the current
window to set the scaling for the plot. This is very useful if you Zoom In on a region of
Contents the drawing for close examination and then want to do a contour or shade plot of the
zoomed region.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 614 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Post/Plane/Contour
General Procedure
Post/Line/Define Choose Post/Plane/Contour to plot equipotential contours of the scalar quantity in the
Post/Line/Entry top register of the plane calculator.
Post/Line/Display > To plot the contours of the scalar quantity:
Post/Line/Plot 1. Use the Calc/Plane commands to load a scalar field into the top register of the
Post/Line/Value plane calculator.
Post/Plane 2. Choose Post/Plane/Contour. Enter values in the following fields.
General Procedure Maximum Value, Maximum and minimum values of the contours to display. The
Scale to Window or Scale Minimum Value defaults are the maximum and minimum values for the entire field.
to Problem
Divisions Number of divisions for field values. For example, if the quantity in
Post/Plane/Contour
the plane calculator ranges between 100 and 500, specifying four
Post/Plane/Contour Dis-
divisions results in contours for the values 100, 200, 300, 400, and
play
500.
Post/Plane/Shade
Post/Plane/Arrow Contour Height Specify a contour height to obtain a raised effect. The height of
Post/Plane/Arrow Region each contour off the plane represents the magnitude of the con-
Post/Plane/Arrow Display tour. The contour associated with the maximum value is raised off
Post/Plane/Max-Min the plane by the Contour Height.
Post/Plane/Value Color/Spectrum Set Spectrum to Yes to display a spectrum plot. Set Spectrum to
Post/BH-Examine No to display the plot in a single color. To change the color,
Things to Consider 1. Click on the color box.
Post/BH Plot 2. Select the desired color.
Plot Options Better Hardcopy Improves the quality of printed plots:
On workstations, set this to Yes if you are printing to a
PostScript printer or saving to a PostScript file.
On PCs, set this to Yes to improve the quality of your
screen captures, regardless of the printer type.
Be aware that this uses more computer memory than if an ordi-
nary plot is drawn.
Go Back
3. Choose Return.
Contents A progress bar and Abort button appear in the upper-left corner as the contour plot is
generated. Choose Abort at any time to stop the plot.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 615 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Post/Plane/Contour Display
General Procedure
Post/Line/Define Choose Post/Plane/Contour Display to redisplay a contour plot that has been erased.
Post/Line/Entry Post/Plane/Shade
Post/Line/Display
Post/Line/Plot Choose Post/Plane/Shade to display shaded plots of the scalar quantity in the top regis-
Post/Line/Value ter of the plane calculator.
Post/Plane > To display a shaded plot:
General Procedure 1. Use the Calc/Plane commands to load a scalar field into the top plane register.
Scale to Window or Scale 2. Choose Post/Plane/Shade. Enter values in the following fields:
to Problem
Post/Plane/Contour Maximum Value, Maximum and minimum values of the contours to display. The
Post/Plane/Contour Dis- Minimum Value defaults are the maximum and minimum values for the entire field.
play Divisions Number of divisions for field values. For example, if the quantity in
Post/Plane/Shade the calculator ranges between 100 and 500, specifying four divi-
Post/Plane/Arrow sions results in contours for the values 100, 200, 300, 400, and 500.
Post/Plane/Arrow Region Draw Objects Toggle Draw Objects to Yes (the default) to show object outlines in
Post/Plane/Arrow Display your shade plot. Toggle Draw Objects to No to omit object outlines.
Post/Plane/Max-Min Plot Height Specify a plot height to obtain a raised effect. The height of each
Post/Plane/Value shaded area off the plane will represent the magnitude of the con-
Post/BH-Examine tour. The shaded area associated with the maximum value is raised
Things to Consider off the plane by the Plot Height.
Post/BH Plot Color/Spectrum Set Spectrum to Yes to display a spectrum plot. Set Spectrum to
Plot Options No to display the plot in a single color. To change the color, click on
the color box, then click on the desired color.
Better Hardcopy Improves the quality of printed plots.
On UNIX workstations, choose Yes only if you are printing to
a PostScript printer or saving to a PostScript file.
On PCs, choose Yes to improve the quality of your screen
Go Back captures, regardless of the printer type.
Note this uses more computer memory than an ordinary plot.

Contents 3. Choose Return.

A progress bar and an Abort button appear in the upper-left corner as the shaded plot is
Index generated. Choose Abort at any time to stop this plot.

Maxwell Online Help System 616 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Post/Plane/Arrow
General Procedure
Post/Line/Define Choose this create an arrow plot of the vector field quantity in the top register of the field
Post/Line/Entry calculator.
Post/Line/Display > To display an arrow plot:
Post/Line/Plot 1. Use the Calc/Plane commands to load a vector field quantity into the top register
Post/Line/Value of the plane calculator.
Post/Plane 2. Choose Post/Plane/Arrow. The available fields are as follows:
General Procedure Number of vectors Displays the number of vectors in the plane register.
Scale to Window or Scale
Maximum Displays the maximum magnitude of the values in the top register of
to Problem
Magnitude the plane calculator.
Post/Plane/Contour
Post/Plane/Contour Dis- Minimum Displays the minimum magnitude of the values in the top register of
play Magnitude the plane calculator.
Post/Plane/Shade Arrow Length Allows you to specify the maximum arrow length in the current unit
Post/Plane/Arrow of length. The smallest arrow length allowable is 0.2 times the
Post/Plane/Arrow Region default arrow length, and the largest arrow length allowable is 4
Post/Plane/Arrow Display times the default arrow length.
Post/Plane/Max-Min Scale Arrows Set to Yes to have the Maxwell 2D represent the magnitude of the
Post/Plane/Value field by the size of the arrows.
Post/BH-Examine Shade Arrows Set to Yes to have the Maxwell 2D shade the arrows. The various
Things to Consider shades do not represent magnitude. They are simply shaded views
Post/BH Plot of the three-dimensional arrows.
Plot Options Color Select the color for the plot. Click the mouse button on the color
square to make a palette appear, then click on the desired color.
Better Hardcopy Improves the quality of printed plots.
On workstations, choose Yes only if you are printing to a
PostScript printer or to a PostScript file.
On PCs, choose Yes to improve the quality of your screen
Go Back captures, regardless of the printer type.
Note this uses more computer memory than an ordinary plot.

Contents 3. Choose Execute to complete the command.

A bar appears in the upper-left corner as the arrow plot is generated.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 617 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Post/Plane/Arrow Region
General Procedure
Post/Line/Define Choose Post/Plane/Arrow Region to display an arrow plot of the field quantity in a rect-
Post/Line/Entry angular area. This lets you plot vector quantities in specific areas of interest, instead of
Post/Line/Display over the entire problem region.
Post/Line/Plot > To display an arrow plot in a rectangular area:
Post/Line/Value 1. Use the Calc/Plane commands to load a vector field quantity into the top register
Post/Plane of the plane calculator. If desired, manipulate that quantity to derive some other
General Procedure quantity of interest.
Scale to Window or Scale 2. Choose Post/Plane/Arrow Region. The following window appears:
to Problem
Post/Plane/Contour
Post/Plane/Contour Dis-
play
Post/Plane/Shade
Post/Plane/Arrow
Post/Plane/Arrow
Region
Post/Plane/Arrow Display
Post/Plane/Max-Min
Post/Plane/Value
Post/BH-Examine
Things to Consider
Post/BH Plot
Plot Options

More
3. Select the first corner of the rectangular region:
To select the point with the mouse:
Go Back a. Choose Mouse under Point 1.
b. Click the left mouse button on the desired point. Its coordinates appear in
the X and Y fields.
Contents To select the point with the keyboard, simply enter the desired coordinates in the X
and Y fields under Point 1.
Index 4. Select the second corner of the region (Point 2) using the mouse or keyboard as

Maxwell Online Help System 618 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line described above.
General Procedure 5. Within the selected region, arrows representing the vectors direction are plotted
Post/Line/Define on a grid. To specify the density of arrows in the region, enter an X Division and a
Post/Line/Entry Y Division for the grid. Higher values result in a more dense distribution of arrows;
Post/Line/Display lower values a less dense distribution. In general, accept the default.
Post/Line/Plot 6. Choose Execute. A progress bar appears as the simulator computes the value of
Post/Line/Value the vector quantity within the selected region. Afterwards, a window appears with
Post/Plane fields that control the arrow plots appearance.
General Procedure From this point on, the Post/Plane/Arrow Region command operates like the Post/
Scale to Window or Scale Plane/Arrow command.
to Problem
Post/Plane/Contour Post/Plane/Arrow Display
Post/Plane/Contour Dis-
play Use Post/Plane/Arrow Display to redisplay the arrow plot that was plotted with the last
Post/Plane/Shade Post/Plane/Arrow or Post/Plane/Arrow Region command. After you choose the com-
Post/Plane/Arrow mand, a progress bar appears in the upper-left corner of the screen as the arrow plot is
Post/Plane/Arrow generated.
Region
Post/Plane/Arrow Dis-
play
Post/Plane/Max-Min
Post/Plane/Value
Post/BH-Examine
Things to Consider
Post/BH Plot

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 619 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Post/Plane/Max-Min
General Procedure
Post/Line/Define The Post/Plane/Max-Min command is customarily used to display maximum and mini-
Post/Line/Entry mum values (and their coordinates) of the field quantity in the top register for the entire
Post/Line/Display plane. You can also use this command to compute and display the maximum and mini-
Post/Line/Plot mum values contained in a zoomed-in area.
Post/Line/Value > To display the maximum and minimum values of the quantity in the top plane register:
Post/Plane 1. Use the Calc/Plane commands to load a field quantity into the top register of the
General Procedure plane calculator. If desired, manipulate that quantity to derive some other quantity.
Scale to Window or Scale 2. Choose Post/Plane/Max-Min. A menu displaying the geometry and the x- and y-
to Problem coordinates of the maximum and minimum values of the quantity in the top plane
Post/Plane/Contour register appears.
Post/Plane/Contour Dis- 3. Choose Extremes to have the system display the labels Max and Min on the
play corresponding points in the geometric model.
Post/Plane/Shade 4. Choose Return to end the command.
Post/Plane/Arrow
Post/Plane/Arrow Region > To compute and display the maximum and minimum values for a zoomed-in area:
Post/Plane/Arrow Display 1. Choose Post/Plane/Max-Min. The following window appears:
Post/Plane/Max-Min
Post/Plane/Value
Post/BH-Examine
Things to Consider
Post/BH Plot
Plot Options

More

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 620 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line 2. Choose Zoom and use the standard zoom procedure to mark your area of interest
General Procedure and magnify it.
Post/Line/Define 3. Choose Compute Max/Min to calculate and display the maximum and minimum
Post/Line/Entry values and their coordinates within the region defined by the zoom window.
Post/Line/Display
Post/Line/Plot > To return to the original display of the entire problem space:
Post/Line/Value 1. Choose Fill to display the entire problem area within the viewing space.
Post/Plane 2. Choose Compute Max/Min to calculate and display the maximum and minimum
General Procedure values and their coordinates for the entire plane.
Scale to Window or Scale Post/Plane/Value
to Problem
Post/Plane/Contour Choose Post/Plane/Value to do the following:
Post/Plane/Contour Dis- Display the value of a plotted field quantity at selected points in the problem region. If
play a scalar field quantity was plotted, this command displays its magnitude at the
Post/Plane/Shade selected point. If a vector field quantity was plotted, this command displays the
Post/Plane/Arrow magnitude of each component of the vector at the selected point.
Post/Plane/Arrow Region
Post/Plane/Arrow Display
Enter this field value into the top register of the number calculator, allowing you to use
it in calculations of other derived quantities.
Post/Plane/Max-Min
> To display field values at selected points:
Post/Plane/Value
1. Plot the desired field quantity.
Post/BH-Examine
Things to Consider
Use the Post/Plot command to plot common field quantities.
Post/BH Plot Use the Post/Plane and Calc/Plane commands to plot derived field quantities.
Plot Options 2. Choose Post/Plane/Value. The following window appears:

More

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 621 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line 3. Select the point whose field values are to be displayed.
General Procedure To select the point with the mouse:
Post/Line/Define a. Choose Mouse. The Plane Value window disappears.
Post/Line/Entry b. Click the left mouse button on the desired point. The window reappears
Post/Line/Display with the points coordinates displayed in the x and y fields.
Post/Line/Plot To select the point with the keyboard, enter the desired coordinates in the x and y
Post/Line/Value fields.
Post/Plane The value of the field quantity at the point is then displayed in the Value field.
General Procedure 4. To store the field value in the top register of the number calculator, set Enter in
Scale to Window or Scale number calculator to Yes.
to Problem 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to continue viewing field quantities and loading them into the
Post/Plane/Contour number calculator.
Post/Plane/Contour Dis- 6. To exit the command, choose Return.
play
Post/Plane/Shade
Post/Plane/Arrow
Post/Plane/Arrow Region
Post/Plane/Arrow Display
Post/Plane/Max-Min
Post/Plane/Value
Post/BH-Examine
Things to Consider
Post/BH Plot
Plot Options

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 622 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Post/BH-Examine
General Procedure
Post/Line/Define (Magnetostatic problems with nonlinear materials only.)
Post/Line/Entry
Choose Post/BH Examine to do the following:
Post/Line/Display
Post/Line/Plot View the B and H values of points that you select.
Post/Line/Value Select points in nonlinear materials where saturation levels are to be plotted via the
Post/Plane Post/BH Plot command. This is the first step in determining saturation levels in the
General Procedure nonlinear materials in your model.
Scale to Window or Scale
The following window appears when you select this command:
to Problem
Post/Plane/Contour
Post/Plane/Contour Dis-
play
Post/Plane/Shade
Post/Plane/Arrow
Post/Plane/Arrow Region
Post/Plane/Arrow Display
Post/Plane/Max-Min
Post/Plane/Value
Post/BH-Examine
Things to Consider
Post/BH Plot
Plot Options

More

Go Back
> To select BH-curve points:
1. Choose Post/BH Examine.
Contents 2. Choose Enter Data Points. The cursor changes to crosshairs.
3. Click the left mouse button on the desired points in the geometric model. As you
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 623 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line select each point, a cross appears on its location and it is assigned a number.
General Procedure
Post/Line/Define Note: To determine saturation levels using the Post/BH Plot command, you must
Post/Line/Entry select points in objects that were assigned nonlinear materials.
Post/Line/Display
Post/Line/Plot 4. When you are finished choosing points, click the right mouse button. The x- and y-
Post/Line/Value coordinates of the points appear in the display area on the left side of the window.
Post/Plane 5. Optionally, choose Display Data Points to display the numbers assigned to each
General Procedure point you selected in the geometry.
Scale to Window or Scale 6. To compute B and H at each point, choose Compute BH Data. The magnitude of
to Problem B and H are displayed below the points coordinates.
Post/Plane/Contour 7. Choose Return to exit the command.
Post/Plane/Contour Dis-
play Things to Consider
Post/Plane/Shade By default, the mouse is set to Grid Snap and Object Snap, which means that you can
Post/Plane/Arrow only select points that lie on the grid or on object vertices. To more accurately select
Post/Plane/Arrow Region points inside objects, use the Global/Defaults command to:
Post/Plane/Arrow Display
Post/Plane/Max-Min Change the grid spacing to produce a more dense grid.
Post/Plane/Value Set Keyboard Entry to Yes, enabling you to enter the coordinates of the desired
Post/BH-Examine points using the keyboard instead of the mouse.
Things to Consider Set Object Snap and Grid Snap to No, leaving the mouse in free mode where any
Post/BH Plot point in the problem space may be selected.
Plot Options

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 624 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Post/BH Plot
General Procedure
Post/Line/Define (Magnetostatic problems with nonlinear materials only.)
Post/Line/Entry
When the B-field in a nonlinear material rises above the knee of the materials BH-curve,
Post/Line/Display
further increases in H result in relatively small increases in B. At this point, the material is
Post/Line/Plot
said to be magnetically saturated. Choose this command to analyze the level of saturation
Post/Line/Value
in nonlinear materials.
Post/Plane
General Procedure > To analyze saturation levels:
Scale to Window or Scale 1. Select points in the desired nonlinear materials using Post/BH Examine.
to Problem 2. Choose Post/BH Plot. The BH-curves associated with the materials at those
Post/Plane/Contour points are then plotted, as shown below. Each point is labeled on the BH-curves,
Post/Plane/Contour Dis- enabling you to see whether the material is magnetically saturated at those
play locations. You may need to zoom into the plot using the Plot Options/Zoom In
Post/Plane/Shade command to more accurately see where each point lies on the curve.
Post/Plane/Arrow
Post/Plane/Arrow Region
Post/Plane/Arrow Display
Post/Plane/Max-Min
Post/Plane/Value
Post/BH-Examine
Things to Consider
Post/BH Plot
Plot Options

Go Back

Contents Plot Options

To change the way in which BH-plots are displayed, use the Plot Options commands.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 625 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Menu
Post/Line Viewing Nonlinear Permanent Magnet Curves
General Procedure (Nonlinear Permanent Magnets only.)
Post/Line/Define
Post/Line/Entry Once you have defined the nonlinear BH-curve in the magnetization direction of perma-
Post/Line/Display nent magnets, the 2D Post Processor linearizes the material model.
Post/Line/Plot In the magnetization direction, the nonlinear BH-curve is substituted by a straight line
Post/Line/Value whose slope is equal to the slope of the nonlinear BH-curve at H=0 and crosses the B
Post/Plane axis at the same point where the nonlinear curve crosses it. In the direction perpendicular
General Procedure to the magnetization, the curve is substituted by a straight line that intersects the origin.
Scale to Window or Scale
to Problem > To observe the BH-curve of a nonlinear permanent material:
Post/Plane/Contour 1. Choose Post/BH Examine. The Examine BH Data window appears.
Post/Plane/Contour Dis- 2. Choose Enter Data Points and use the mouse to specify points within the object
play with a nonlinear magnet.
Post/Plane/Shade 3. Optionally, choose Display Data Points to view the selected points in the viewing
Post/Plane/Arrow window.
Post/Plane/Arrow Region 4. Choose Compute BH Data. The values of mag(B) and mag(H) for each point
Post/Plane/Arrow Display appear below the coordinates of the selected points.
Post/Plane/Max-Min 5. Choose Return. The window closes.
Post/Plane/Value 6. Choose Post/BH Plot. The points specified in the Examine BH Data window are
Post/BH-Examine plotted on both linearized BH-curves. These curves correspond to the parallel and
Things to Consider perpendicular directions with respect to the original magnetization.
Post/BH Plot 7. Optionally, choose Plot Options to modify the view of the plot.
Plot Options 8. Choose Return to close the window and return to the 2D Post Processor.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 626 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Calc Menu
Calc Commands
Calculators The Calc menu provides you with access to a set of calculators that allow you to display,
Calc/Plane manipulate, and analyze field solutions. Use it to perform mathematical operations on the
Calc/Number computed field quantities to aid the analysis of your model.

The Calc menu is accessed from the fields Post Processor.

Calc Commands
The calculators accessible from the Calc menu are:
Number Provides access to a calculator that allows you to manipulate
single pieces of data.
Line Provides access to a 1D calculator that allows you to manipulate
field quantities over lines.
Plane Provides access to a 2D calculator that allows you to manipulate
field quantities over a plane or surface.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 627 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Calculators
Calc Commands
Calculators Several solution calculators are available in the Post Processor.
Number Calculator
Line Calculator
Number Calculator
Plane Calculator The number calculator is typically used to perform operations on the numerical results of
Plotting integrations and other calculator operations. It also supports a stack of registers, with
Plotting Over a Plane each able to hold a single scalar or vector value. The result of integrations may be placed
Plotting Along a Line in the number calculator.
Direct Plotting
Reading and Writing Line Calculator
Registers This calculator is typically used to integrate a field quantity over a path or to plot a special
Calculator Commands quantity of interest as a function of distance along a line. The line calculator supports a
Displaying Other Calcula- stack of line registers, with each line register holding the portion of a field quantity that lies
tors on a line.
Calc/Plane
Calc/Number > To use the line calculator, follow these steps:
1. Create a line register by specifying which line segment to associate with the
register. Do so using the Post/Line/Entry command. The new register goes to the
top of the stack.
2. Load field values into a line register by mapping those values from the top register
of the plane calculator. Do so by choosing Calc/Line/value in the line calculator.
For example, assume that the top register of the plane calculator contains the E-field.
Choosing Calc/Line/value causes the portion of the E-field that lies on the desired line to
be loaded into the line register.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 628 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Plane Calculator
Calc Commands
Calculators This calculator is typically used to integrate a field quantity over a cross-section or to dis-
Number Calculator play a vector, shaded, or contour plot of a derived field. The plane calculator supports a
Line Calculator stack of plane registers, with each able to hold the portion of a field quantity that lies in the
Plane Calculator 2D cross-section that is modeled.
Plotting For example, to compute the total energy, U, associated with an electric field,
Plotting Over a Plane 1
Plotting Along a Line U = --- E Ddv
2
Direct Plotting vol
Reading and Writing
Registers you can:
Calculator Commands 1. Load the E-field into the top register.
Displaying Other Calcula- Register 1E(x) E(y) 0
tors
Calc/Plane 2. Load the D-field into the top register.
Calc/Number Register 1D(x) D(y) 0
Register 2E(x) E(y) 0
3. Take the dot product of the two fields. This is proportional to the energy density
field.
Register 1 (D(x)*E(x)+D(y)*E(y)+ 0*0)
4. To obtain the total energy, you must integrate the energy density field and divide
the results by two.
The plane calculator contains commands for performing such tasks.
Plotting
Any field quantity that is in the top register of the plane or line calculator can be displayed
on screen.
Go Back Plotting Over a Plane
To plot a quantity that is in the top register of the plane calculator, use the Post/Plane
Contents commands. These commands allow you to display shaded plots, contour plots, and vector
plots.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 629 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Plotting Along a Line
Calc Commands To plot a quantity that is in the top register of the line calculator, use the Post/Line com-
Calculators mands. These commands allow you to graph a field quantity as a function of position over
Number Calculator a line.
Line Calculator
Plane Calculator Direct Plotting
Plotting Basic field quantities (such as the H-field and E-field) can be plotted directly using the
Plotting Over a Plane Post/Plot command. This command does not require you to load the desired field quan-
Plotting Along a Line tity into a register before plotting.
Direct Plotting
Reading and Writing Reading and Writing
Registers
Calculator Commands In some cases, it is desirable to superimpose two sub-solutions to obtain the total solution
Displaying Other Calcula- for a problem. For example, assume that a device has two sources. With one source
tors turned on, the field is tangential to a particular boundary; with the other source turned on,
Calc/Plane the field is perpendicular to that same boundary.
Calc/Number > To fully model this problem:
1. Solve the problem with one source turned on and the other turned off.
2. Load that solution into a register and write it out to a disk file.
3. Solve the problem again with the first source turned off and second source turned
on.
4. Load the new solution into a register, read in the first solution from disk, and add
the two registers.
Use the read and write options associated with the calculators to superimpose sub-solu-
tions.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 630 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Registers
Calc Commands
Calculators The top half of the calculator menu displays the stack of registers associated with the cal-
Number Calculator culator. Each register is capable of holding an entire field quantity. No registers are cre-
Line Calculator ated until you load in a field quantity; therefore, this region of the calculators is initially
Plane Calculator blank.
Plotting Fields listed as Vector quantities are those that have both direction and magnitude at
Plotting Over a Plane each point in space. The x-, y-, and z-components (or r-, - and z-components) of
Plotting Along a Line these vector quantities are stored in the register.
Direct Plotting Fields listed as Scalar quantities have a magnitude only.
Reading and Writing Registers that begin with an R contain real quantities.
Registers Registers that begin with a C contain complex quantities.
Calculator Commands
Displaying Other Calcu- If the number of registers to be displayed exceeds the available display space for one
lators page of them, you can view the additional pages by doing the following:
Calc/Plane Select Next to display the next page of registers.
Calc/Number Select Prev to return to the previous page of registers.
Calculator Commands
The bottom portion of the calculator menu contains the commands associated with the
calculator. In many cases, there are more commands than can fit in the bottom of the
menu. Choose Next or Prev to scroll through the list of available commands.
Displaying Other Calculators
From the plane, line, or number calculators, you can access any other calculator. To
access the commands and registers associated with a different calculator, choose the
Plane, Number, or Line options that are located on the right side of the calculator.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 631 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Calc/Plane
Calc Commands
Calculators Choose Calc/Plane to manipulate field data over the models 2D cross-section. The fol-
Calc/Plane lowing window appears:
Material
Loading Field Data
Register Operations
Scalar Operations
Vector Operations
Transient Operations
General Operations
Phase
Plotting the Contents of
the Top Plane Register
Calc/Plane/Export
Calc/Plane/Decompose
Calc/Number

The stack of registers associated with the plane calculator is displayed in the top portion
of the screen. Each register can store a field quantity. The commands associated with the
plane calculator are displayed in the bottom portion of the screen.
While in the other calculators, you can access the plane calculator by choosing the Plane
Go Back option located on the right side of the calculator.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 632 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Material
Calc Commands
Calculators The Material command allows you to multiply or divide a field quantity by a material prop-
Calc/Plane erty such as the relative permittivity, conductivity, or relative permeability. The currently
Material selected parameter field solver determines which field quantities and material properties
Loading Field Data are available when the Material command is selected.
Register Operations At each triangle in the mesh, the field quantity is multiplied or divided by the value of the
Scalar Operations selected material property. This takes the different material attributes of each object in the
Vector Operations model into account.
Transient Operations
General Operations > To multiply or divide a field quantity by a material property:
Phase 1. Load the desired field quantity into the top register of the calculator.
Plotting the Contents of 2. Choose Material. The Material Operations window appears with one or more
the Top Plane Register material property fields. (The properties that are available for each problem type
Calc/Plane/Export are discussed under Loading Field Data in the sections for the different field
Calc/Plane/Decompose quantities.)
Calc/Number 3. Select the desired material property.
4. Do one of the following:
To multiply the quantity in the top register by the selected material property, toggle
Multiply to Yes.
To divide the quantity in the top register by the selected material property, toggle
Multiply to No.
5. Choose Return. to complete the operation or Cancel to cancel the action.
There must be a vector field quantity in the top register for this command to be operable.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 633 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Loading Field Data
Calc Commands
Calculators Initially, all registers are empty. To load a field quantity into a new plane register, choose
Calc/Plane the desired quantity from the list of calculator commands. The field quantities that can be
Material loaded into the plane calculator depend on which field solver you selected, and are listed
Loading Field Data in the following sections. The selected field solver also determines what materials are
Register Operations available to use in your calculations. The available materials for each solver are also listed
Scalar Operations in the following sections.
Vector Operations Magnetostatic and Transient Field Quantities
Transient Operations
General Operations The following field quantity selections are available if a magnetostatic or transient motion
Phase simulation has been performed. When you select one, the calculator loads it into the top
Plotting the Contents of register.
the Top Plane Register B_Vector The magnetic flux density.
Calc/Plane/Export
Calc/Plane/Decompose H_Vector The magnetic field strength.
Calc/Number
A_Vector The magnetic vector potential, AZ or A.
J_Vector Loads the current density vector J.
energy (linear) For linear materials, loads the actual energy density defined by
app energy 1
--- B H . This is the apparent energy for nonlinear materials.
(nonlinear) 2
coenergy For nonlinear materials, loads the energy density given by
(nonlinear) B dH .
energy For nonlinear materials, loads the energy denisty given by
More (nonlinear) H dB .
The following material properties are available through the Material command for magne-
Go Back tostatic problems:
For problems that contain only linear materials, the permeability (mu) is the only
Contents available material property.
For problems that contain nonlinear materials, both the permeability (mu) and the
differential permeability (diff mu) are available. The differential permeability is equal to
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 634 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu the instantaneous slope of the BH-curve, as shown here:
Calc Commands B
Calculators Nonlinear BH-curve
Calc/Plane
Material
dB Linear BH-curve
Loading Field Data
dH
Register Operations
Scalar Operations r
Vector Operations
Transient Operations
General Operations
Phase
Plotting the Contents of H
the Top Plane Register r = slope of linear BH-curve
Calc/Plane/Export dB
= instantaneous slope of nonlinear BH-curve
Calc/Plane/Decompose dH
Calc/Number

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 635 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Electrostatic Field Quantities
Calc Commands The following field quantities are available in the Plane Calculator if an electrostatic simu-
Calculators lation has been performed. When you select one, the calculator loads it into the top regis-
Calc/Plane ter.
Material
Loading Field Data voltage The electric potential, .
Register Operations E_Vector The electric field.
Scalar Operations D_Vector The electric flux density.
Vector Operations energy The stored electric field energy density.
Transient Operations
General Operations Permittivity (epsilon) is the only material property that is available for the Material com-
Phase mand.
Plotting the Contents of
the Top Plane Register
Calc/Plane/Export
Calc/Plane/Decompose
Calc/Number

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 636 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Eddy Current Field Quantities
Calc Commands The following field quantities are available if an eddy current simulation has been per-
Calculators formed:
Calc/Plane
Material A_Vector The magnetic vector potential, AZ or A.
Loading Field Data B_Vector The magnetic flux density.
Register Operations H_Vector The magnetic field strength.
Scalar Operations J_Vector The current density. Select one of the following:
Vector Operations Displacement Loads the component of the current
Transient Operations density due to displacement currents.
General Operations Eddy Loads the component of the current density due
Phase to eddy currents.
Plotting the Contents of Source Loads the component of the current density
the Top Plane Register due to source currents.
Calc/Plane/Export Total Loads the total current density, which is the sum
Calc/Plane/Decompose of the displacement, source, and eddy current
Calc/Number components.
energy (linear) For linear materials, loads the actual energy density defined by
--- B H . This is also the apparent energy density for nonlinear
1
app energy 2
(nonlinear) materials.
coenergy For nonlinear materials, loads the energy density given by
(nonlinear) B dH .
energy For nonlinear materials, loads the energy density given
(nonlinear) by H dB .
power Loads the ohmic loss density (time-averaged). It does not include
core losses.
EM_loss Loads the total power loss density from a coupled eddy project
which includes both ohmic and core loss (if it was set up as an
Go Back executive parameter). Core loss is an executive parameter. EM
loss will always include ohmic loss by default.

Contents Conductivity (sigma), permeability (mu), and permittivity (epsilon) material properties
are the material properties available through the Material command.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 637 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu DC Conduction Field Quantities
Calc Commands The following field quantities are available if a DC conduction simulation has been per-
Calculators formed:
Calc/Plane
Material voltage Loads the electric potential into the top register.
Loading Field Data E_Vector Loads the electric field into the top register.
Register Operations J_Vector Loads the conduction current into the top register.
Scalar Operations energy Loads the stored electric field energy density into the top register.
Vector Operations power Loads the power density into the top register.
Transient Operations
General Operations Conductivity (sigma) is the only material property available from the Material command.
Phase There must be a vector field quantity in the top register for this command to be operable.
Plotting the Contents of
the Top Plane Register AC Conduction Field Quantities
Calc/Plane/Export The following field quantities are available if an AC conduction simulation has been per-
Calc/Plane/Decompose formed. When you select one, the calculator loads it into the top register.
Calc/Number
voltage The electric potential.
E_Vector The electric field.
D_Vector The electric flux density.
J_Vector The current density. Select one of these current density components:
Displacement Loads the component of the current density
due to displacement currents.
Conduction Loads the component of the current density
due to conduction currents.
Total Loads the total current density, which is the sum of
the displacement and conduction components.
energy Loads the stored electric field energy density into the top register.
power Loads the power density (time-averaged) into the top register.
Go Back The permittivity (epsilon) and the conductivity (sigma) are the material properties that
are available through the Material command.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 638 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Eddy Axial Field Quantities
Calc Commands The following field quantities are available if an eddy axial simulation has been performed:
Calculators
Calc/Plane H_Vector Loads the eddy current strength into the top register.
Material J_Vector Loads the current density into the top register. Select one of the following:
Loading Field Data Displacement Loads the component of the current density due to
Register Operations displacement currents.
Scalar Operations Conduction Loads the component of the current density due to
Vector Operations conduction currents.
Transient Operations Total Loads the total current density, which is the sum of the
General Operations displacement and conduction current density.
Phase energy Loads the stored electric field energy density into the top register.
Plotting the Contents of power Loads the power density (time-averaged) into the top register.
the Top Plane Register
Calc/Plane/Export The permittivity (epsilon), permeability (mu), and conductivity (sigma) are the material
Calc/Plane/Decompose properties that are available through the Material command. There must be a vector field
Calc/Number quantity in the top register for this command to be operable.
Thermal Field Quantities
The following field quantities are available if a thermal simulation has been performed.
Temperature Loads temperature in degrees Celsius.
Flux Loads the thermal flux density in W/m2.
Grad_T Loads the thermal gradient in degrees Celsius/m.
EM_Loss Loads the total loss density from a coupled eddy project which
includes both ohmic and core loss if it was set up as an executive
parameter. Core loss is an executive parameter. EM loss will always
include ohmic loss by default.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 639 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Register Operations
Calc Commands
Calculators The following Register operations are available in the plane calculator:
Calc/Plane name Assigns a name to a plane register.
Material push Copies the first register and moves all others down by one. The new
Loading Field Data register is linked to the same cutplane or rectangle as the one that
Register Operations was copied.
Scalar Operations pop Moves all registers up by one, throwing the top register away.
Vector Operations exchange Exchanges the first and second registers.
Transient Operations
roll Moves all registers up by one, rolling the bottom register to the top.
General Operations
Phase clear Erases all registers in the plane calculator.
Plotting the Contents of
the Top Plane Register
Scalar Operations
Calc/Plane/Export Scalar operations available in the plane calculator include:
Calc/Plane/Decompose
constant Assigns a constant value to all points in the plane.
Calc/Number
integrate Integrates the scalar quantity in the top register over cross-section
and places the result in the number calculator.
rz_intgrl (RZ models.) Integrates the scalar quantity in the top register over the
volume created by revolving the axisymmetric cross-section 360
about the z-axis.
vec_x (XY models.) Creates a vector field by assigning the scalar field in the
top register to be the x-component.
vec_y (XY models.) Creates a vector field by assigning the scalar field in the
top register to be the y-component.
vec_r (RZ models.) Creates a vector field by assigning the scalar field in the
top register to be the r-component.
vec_phi (RZ models.) Creates a vector field by assigning the scalar field in the
Go Back top register to be the -component.
vec_z Creates a vector field by assigning the scalar field in the top register
to be the z-component.
Contents grad Takes the gradient of the quantity in the top register of the calculator.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 640 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Vector Operations
Calc Commands
Calculators Vector operations available in the plane calculator include:
Calc/Plane vec_cons Allows you to assign a constant vector value to all points on the plane.
Material normal Calculates the unit vector field that is normal to the plane associated
Loading Field Data with the top register, pushes the top register down in the stack, and
Register Operations loads in the normal field.
Scalar Operations magnitude Calculates the magnitude of the vector field in the top register.
Vector Operations scalar_x (XY models.) Takes the x-component of the vector in the top register
Transient Operations and creates a scalar field.
General Operations
scalar_y (XY models.) Takes the y-component of the vector in the top register
Phase
and creates a scalar field.
Plotting the Contents of
the Top Plane Register scalar_r (RZ models.) Takes the r-component of the vector in the top register
Calc/Plane/Export and creates a scalar field.
Calc/Plane/Decompose scalar_phi (RZ models.) Takes the -component of the vector in the top register
Calc/Number and creates a scalar field.
scalar_z Takes the z-component of the vector in the top register and creates a
scalar field.
div Takes the divergence of the vector field in the top register.
curl Takes the curl of the vector field in the top register.

Transient Operations
If you are in EMpulse, the following operations are available:
A_Vector Loads the magnetic vector potential, AZ or A into the top register.
B_Vector Loads the magnetic flux density into the top register.
H_Vector Loads the magnetic field strength into the top register.
J_Vector Loads the conduction current into the top register.
Go Back Materials Multiplies the quantity in the top stack by a material property value.
Energy Loads the stored field energy into the top register
Contents Coenergy For nonlinear materials, loads the energy given by B ( dH ) ( dV ) .
V 1
App Energy For linear materials, loads the actual energy defined by --- B HdV .
2V
This is the apparent energy for nonlinear materials.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 641 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu General Operations
Calc Commands
Calculators General operations available in the plane calculator include:
Calc/Plane add Adds the top two plane registers.
Material conjugate (Eddy current, AC Conduction, Eddy Axial.) Takes the complex conju-
Loading Field Data gate of the field quantity in the top register. If an imaginary number is
Register Operations given by C=A+jB, its complex conjugate is given by C*=A-jB.
Scalar Operations multiply Multiplies the scalar fields in the top two registers. If both fields are
Vector Operations vectors, components are multiplied together; that is, the x-compo-
Transient Operations nents are multiplied together, as are the y- and z-components.
General Operations divide Divides the second register by the first register. The quantity in the
Phase first register must be a scalar, and division by zero is not allowed.
Plotting the Contents of
r_multiply (RZ models.) Multiplies the quantity in the top register by r.
the Top Plane Register
Calc/Plane/Export r_divide (RZ models.) Divides the quantity in the top register by r.
Calc/Plane/Decompose dot Takes the dot product of the vector fields in the top two registers.
Calc/Number cross Takes the cross product of the vector fields in the top two registers
(second register cross top register).
smooth Does geometric averaging inside each material to arrive at a
smoothed version of the vector in the top register.
read Reads in a register that has been previously written to disk. The mesh
associated with the register being read in must be exactly the same
as the mesh currently in memory.
write Writes the contents of the top register to the disk file that you specify.
The system adds an extension (.reg for binary files and .arg for ASCII
files) and saves the file in the current project directory. Use the ASCII
option if you plan to manipulate the data using other software tools.
Use the binary option to save the data in a more compact fashion.
export Saves the field values comprising the top stack register in a file that
Go Back you name.
decompose Decomposes complex quantities in the form a + jb into their real,
imaginary, magnitude, or phase equivalents.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 642 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Phase
Calc Commands (Eddy Current, AC Conduction, Eddy Axial)
Calculators
Calc/Plane The field quantities downloaded into the plane calculator represent instantaneous values
Material of time-varying quantities:
Loading Field Data A ( x, y, z, t ) = A ( x, y, z ) cos ( t + ( x, y, z ) )
Register Operations
Scalar Operations where:
Vector Operations
Transient Operations is the angular frequency at which the quantities are oscillating, specified during the
General Operations solution.
Phase (x,y,z) is the phase angle (the offset from a cosine wave that peaks at t=0).
Plotting the Contents of Enter the phase of the field quantity in the top register in the Phase field.
the Top Plane Register
Calc/Plane/Export Plotting the Contents of the Top Plane Register
Calc/Plane/Decompose
To display the field quantity that is in the top register of the plane calculator, do one of the
Calc/Number
following:
Choose Post/Plane/Contour to display a contour plot. The field in the top register
must be a scalar field.
Choose Post/Plane/Shade to display a shaded plot. The field in the top register must
be a scalar field.
Choose Post/Plane/Arrow to display an arrow plot. The field in the top register must
be a vector field.
In each case, the post processor plots whatever quantity is in the top register of the plane
calculator.
Common field quantities such as the magnetic field strength (H-field) can be plotted using
Post/Plot and do not need to be loaded into the plane calculator.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 643 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Calc/Plane/Export
Calc Commands
Calculators Use this command to save the field values comprising the top stack register in a file that
Calc/Plane you name. The saved file also contains the x and y coordinates (cartesian models) or r
Material and z coordinates (axisymmetric models) which define the bounded plane space contain-
Loading Field Data ing the field values.
Register Operations > To export a register:
Scalar Operations 1. Choose Export. The following window appears:
Vector Operations
Transient Operations
General Operations
Phase
Plotting the Contents of
the Top Plane Register
Calc/Plane/Export
Calc/Plane/Decompose
Calc/Number

2. Use one of these procedures to set up the export file:

Choose Use Input File to read in a list of grid coordinates that define the extent of
More the plane space. Type the name of the input file in the File Name field.
Choose Use Uniform Grid to let the software calculate the coordinates to define a
uniform grid which encloses the plane space.
Go Back a. Enter the grid coordinates (xy or rz) in the min and max coordinates entry
fields to define the extent of the plane space.
Contents b. Enter the distance between grid points in the Grid spacing entry field. The
units are the same as those used for the model. If you omit the grid spacing
entry, an error message appears when you try to exit the menu.
Index c. Enter the name of the file in which you want to save the export data in the

Maxwell Online Help System 644 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu Output File Name entry field.
Calc Commands d. Choose OK to save the export file and exit the menu.
Calculators
Calc/Plane Note: If you omit the Output File Name entry, the following error message appears
Material when you try to exit the menu:
Loading Field Data Invalid output file name
Register Operations
Scalar Operations Calc/Plane/Decompose
Vector Operations
The Decompose command, which is available for field data produced by complex solvers
Transient Operations
such as AC Conduction and Eddy Current, decomposes complex quantities in the form a
General Operations
+ jb into their real, imaginary, magnitude, or phase (in radians) components. As with other
Phase
register operations, this command operates on the register at the top of the stack.
Plotting the Contents of
the Top Plane Register The results of the Decompose operation for the four components are in the table below:
Calc/Plane/Export
Calc/Plane/Decompose
Calc/Number Component Result

Real a

Imaginary b

Magnitude a2 + b2

tan 0 1 ---
b
Phase (radians) a
More

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 645 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc Menu > To decompose a complex register:
Calc Commands 1. Choose Decompose. The following window appears:
Calculators
Calc/Plane
Material
Loading Field Data
Register Operations
Scalar Operations
Vector Operations
Transient Operations
General Operations
Phase
Plotting the Contents of
the Top Plane Register
Calc/Plane/Export
Calc/Plane/Decompose
Calc/Number
2. Select Real, Imaginary, Magnitude, or Phase to designate the target data type
for the decompose operation. The type that you select appears to the right of the
Decompose into text below the four selections.
3. Select Execute to execute the command. A display of the selected type equivalent
of the data appears on the top of the stack, replacing the display of the original
complex register.
The following figure shows the result of decomposing a complex A_Vector into its real
value. For comparison, the decomposed version of the register appears above the original
complex register. The real version of the register may appear to be in complex form, but it
is in fact a real value in the form of a + j0, which is the format that the complex solvers
use:

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 646 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 647 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc/Number Calc/Number
Register Operations
Scalar Operations Choose Calc/Number to display the number calculator. The number calculator allows you
Vector Operations to manipulate single values or single vectors. The results of volume, plane, and line inte-
General Operations grations can be saved in this calculator:
Phase
Calc/Line
Creating Line Registers
Register Operations
Scalar Operations
Vector Operations
General Operations
Phase
Displaying the Field in the
Top Line Register

While in the other calculators, you can access the number calculator by selecting the
Number options (on the right side of the calculator).
The stack of registers associated with the number calculator is displayed in the top part of
Go Back the screen. The commands associated with the number calculator are displayed in the
bottom part.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 647 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc/Number Register Operations
Register Operations
Scalar Operations Register operations available in the number calculator include:
Vector Operations push Copies the first register and moves all others down by one.
General Operations pop Moves all number registers up by one, throwing the top register away.
Phase exchange Exchanges the first and second number registers.
Calc/Line roll Moves all registers up by one, rolling the top register to the bottom.
Creating Line Registers
clear Erases all registers in the number calculator.
Register Operations
Scalar Operations Each number register contains a single vector or scalar value.
Vector Operations
General Operations Scalar Operations
Phase
Scalar operations available in the number calculator include::
Displaying the Field in the
Top Line Register constant Places a constant in the top register.
vec_x (XY models.) Creates a vector using the scalar in the top register as
the x-component.
vec_y (XY models.) Creates a vector using the scalar in the top register as
the y-component.
vec_r (RZ models.) Creates a vector field by assigning the scalar field in the
top register to be the r-component.
vec_phi (RZ models.) Creates a vector field by assigning the scalar field in the
top register to be the -component.
vec_z Creates a vector using the scalar in the top register as the z-compo-
nent.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 648 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc/Number Vector Operations
Register Operations
Scalar Operations Vector operations available in the number calculator include:
Vector Operations vec_cons Places a vector value in the top register.
General Operations dot Takes the dot product of the vectors in the top two registers.
Phase cross Takes the cross product of the vectors in the top two registers.
Calc/Line scalar_x (XY models.) Takes and creates a scalar field using the x-component
Creating Line Registers of the vector in the top register.
Register Operations
scalar_y (XY models.) Creates a scalar field using the y-component of the vec-
Scalar Operations
tor in the top field.
Vector Operations
General Operations scalar_r Creates a scalar field using the r-component of the vector in the top
Phase register.
Displaying the Field in the scalar_phi Creates a scalar field using the -component of the vector in the top
Top Line Register register.
scalar_z Creates a scalar field using the z-component of the vector in the top
register.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 649 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc/Number General Operations
Register Operations
Scalar Operations The following general operations are available in the line calculator:
Vector Operations add Adds the top two registers.
General Operations multiply Multiplies the top two registers.
Phase divide Divides the second register by the first register. The quantity in the
Calc/Line first register must be a scalar, and division by zero is not allowed.
Creating Line Registers invert Inverts the quantity stored in the top register.
Register Operations
magnitude Takes the magnitude of vector in the top register.
Scalar Operations
Vector Operations power Takes the quantity in the top register to the desired power.
General Operations write Writes the contents of the top register to the disk file that you specify.
Phase The system adds an extension (.reg for binary files and .arg for ASCII
Displaying the Field in the files) and saves the file in the current project directory. Use the ASCII
Top Line Register option if you plan to manipulate the data using other software tools.
Use the binary option to save the data in a more compact fashion.
read Reads in a register that has been previously written to disk. The mesh
associated with the register being read in must be exactly the same
as the mesh currently in memory.

Phase
(Eddy Current, AC Conduction, Eddy Axial)
Displays the phase of the quantity downloaded into the number calculator.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 650 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc/Number Calc/Line
Register Operations
Scalar Operations Choose Calc/Line to manipulate field data over a line. The following window appears:
Vector Operations
General Operations
Phase
Calc/Line
Creating Line Registers
Register Operations
Scalar Operations
Vector Operations
General Operations
Phase
Displaying the Field in the
Top Line Register

The line calculator is essentially a linear version of the two-dimensional plane calculator.
The stack of registers associated with the line calculator is displayed in the top portion of
the screen. Each register can store the portion of a field quantity that lies along a particu-
lar line. The commands associated with the line calculator are displayed in the bottom
portion of the screen.
Go Back While in the other calculators, you can access the line calculator by choosing the Line
option located on the right side of the calculator.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 651 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc/Number Creating Line Registers
Register Operations > The general procedure for creating a line register and loading it with a field value is as
Scalar Operations follows:
Vector Operations 1. Define a line segment using Post/Line/Define. The line segment can be a polyline,
General Operations arc, or object edge.
Phase 2. Choose Post/Line/Entry to link that line segment to a line register.
Calc/Line 3. Choose Calc/Plane and load the quantity of interest into the top register of the
Creating Line Registers plane calculator.
Register Operations 4. Choose Calc/Line/value to map field values from the top register of the plane
Scalar Operations calculator to the line register that you just created.
Vector Operations
General Operations The register that is created is linked to one specific line in the problem region. When a
Phase field quantity is mapped to a line register, the system takes the values of that field along
Displaying the Field in the the path and stores them in the register.
Top Line Register Register Operations
Register operations available in the line calculator include:
enter Enters a line to the top register. This command works the same as Post/
Line/Entry.
name Assigns a name to a line register.
push Copies the first register and moves all others down by one. The new regis-
ter is linked to the same line segment as the one that was copied.
pop Moves all registers up by one, throwing the top register away.
exchange Exchanges the first and second registers.
roll Moves all registers up by one, rolling the top register to the bottom.
clear Erases all registers in the line calculator.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 652 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc/Number Scalar Operations
Register Operations
Scalar Operations Scalar operations available in the line calculator include:
Vector Operations constant Assign a constant value to all points along the line.
General Operations vec_x (XY models.) Creates a vector using the scalar in the top register as the x-
Phase component.
Calc/Line vec_y (XY models.) Creates a vector using the scalar in the top register as the y-
Creating Line Registers component.
Register Operations vec_r (RZ models.) Creates a vector field by assigning the scalar field in the top
Scalar Operations register to be the r-component.
Vector Operations
vec_phi (RZ models.) Creates a vector field by assigning the scalar field in the top
General Operations
register to be the -component.
Phase
Displaying the Field in the vec_z Creates a vector using the scalar in the top register as the z-component.
Top Line Register
Vector Operations
Vector operations available in the line calculator include:
vec_cons Assign a constant vector value to all points on the line.
scalar_x (XY models.) Creates a scalar field using the x-component of the vector in
the top register.
scalar_y (XY models.) Creates a scalar field using the y-component of the vector in
the top register.
scalar_r (RZ models.) Creates a scalar field using the r-component of the vector in
the top register.
scalar_phi (RZ models.) Creates a scalar field using the -component of the vector in
the top register.
scalar_z Creates a scalar field using the z-component of the vector in the top regis-
ter.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 653 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc/Number General Operations
Register Operations
Scalar Operations General operations available in the line calculator include:
Vector Operations add Adds the fields in the top two registers.
General Operations multiply Multiplies the fields in the top two registers. At least one of the two regis-
Phase ters must contain a scalar field. At each point, the scalar value in one reg-
Calc/Line ister is multiplied by the scalar or vector in the other.
Creating Line Registers divide Divides the second register by the first register. The quantity in the first
Register Operations register must be a scalar, and division by zero is not allowed.
Scalar Operations magnitude Takes the magnitude of the vector quantity stored in top register.
Vector Operations
value Maps field values from the top plane register to the top line register. Per-
General Operations
forms the same function as Post/Line/Value.
Phase
Displaying the Field in the tangent Takes the component of the vector field in the top plane register that is
Top Line Register tangential to the path associated with the top line register.
normal Takes the component of the vector field in the top plane register that is
normal to the path associated with the top line register.
integrate Integrates the scalar quantity in the top line register over the appropriate
line and places the result in the number calculator. A running total of the
integration along the path is stored in the top line register.
rz_intgrl (RZ models.) Multiples the scalar quantity in the top line register by 2r.
write Writes the contents of the top register to a specified file. The system adds
an extension (.reg for binary files and .arg for ASCII files) and saves the
file in the current project directory. Use the ASCII option if you plan to
manipulate the data using other software tools. Use the binary option to
save the data in a more compact fashion.
read Reads in a register that has been previously written to disk. The mesh
More
associated with the register being read in must be exactly the same as the
mesh currently in memory.
Go Back Because each register is linked to a specific line in the problem region, it typically does

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 654 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Calc Menu
Calc/Number not make sense to add and multiply registers that are not linked to the same line.
Register Operations
Scalar Operations Note: When no other registers exist when you map in a new field quantity, the sys-
Vector Operations tem prompts you for the Number of points in line. If you accept the default of
General Operations 100, the system explicitly stores values at 100 points along the line; values
Phase between points are interpolated. All subsequent lines receive the same num-
Calc/Line ber of points. The minimum number of points in a line is ten points.
Creating Line Registers
Register Operations Phase
Scalar Operations (Eddy Current, AC Conduction, Eddy Axial)
Vector Operations
General Operations The field quantities downloaded into the line calculator represent instantaneous values of
Phase time-varying quantities:
Displaying the Field in A ( x, y, z, t ) = A ( x, y, z ) cos ( t + ( x, y, z ) )
the Top Line Register
where:
is the angular frequency (2f) at which the quantities are oscillating, specified during
the solution.
(x,y,z) is the phase angle (the offset from a cosine wave that peaks at t=0).
> To download the instantaneous value of a field quantity at different points in its cycle:
1. Enter the phase angle, , in the Phase field. Phases are entered in degrees.
2. Choose Value to download the field quantity in the top register of the plane
calculator onto the line.
Displaying the Field in the Top Line Register
To display the field quantity that is in the top register of the line calculator, choose Post/
Line/Plot. A quantity versus distance plot is then displayed. If a vector is in the top regis-
ter, plots of all three components are displayed.
Such plots for common field quantities can be displayed using Post/Plot and do not need
Go Back to be loaded into the line calculator.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 655 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis
Introduction to Parametric Introduction to Parametric Analysis
Analysis
Nominal and Parametric The Parametric Analysis module is an add-on package for Maxwell 2D that enables you to
Models quickly and easily perform variational analysis of 2D models. It allows you to simulate
Nominal Model design variations using a single model, instead of having to explicitly set up and solve a
Parametric Model series of models as is necessary with other Maxwell 2D packages. The Parametric Analy-
Accessing the Parametrics sis module lets you:
Analysis Module
General Procedure
Identify the basic design parameters that are to be varied during the simulation
such as geometric dimensions, material properties, excitations, and solution
Create the Model
frequency.
Set Up Solutions
Generate Solutions
Select the quantities that are computed during the parametric solution such as
electric or magnetic fields, inductance, capacitance, current flow, force, torque, and so
Post Processing
on. You can also define macros using the post-processing calculators to compute
Batch Processing
other quantities not listed above.
Batch Mode for Worksta-
tions (UNIX) Specify the values to which each design parameter is set during the solution,
Errors in Parametric generally by sweeping them through a range of values. This lets you define a series of
Solutions variations on the original, nominal model, each of which will be solved during the
Batch Mode for Personal parametric sweep.
Computers It then automatically sets the design parameters to the values you specified, and com-
Batch Processing for putes a solution for each variation on the nominal model. After the parameter sweep is
Windows completed, you can analyze the results using the modules post-processing functions.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 656 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis
Introduction to Parametric Nominal and Parametric Models
Analysis
Nominal and Parametric The Parametric Analysis module breaks a Maxwell 2D project down into two parts a
Models nominal model and a parametric model.
Nominal Model
Parametric Model
Nominal Model
Accessing the Parametrics To perform a parametric analysis, you must first create a nominal model. Essentially, it is
Analysis Module an ordinary 2D model that has been parameterized, and serves as the model on which
General Procedure the parametric analysis is based.
Create the Model
Set Up Solutions The nominal model is created like any other 2D model, except that the design parameters
Generate Solutions that will be changed during a parametric sweep must be defined as variables while you
Post Processing are drawing the geometry, assigning material properties, and so forth. (For instance, any
Batch Processing dimensions that will be varied must be defined using geometric constraints.) However, no
Batch Mode for Worksta- variables need to be defined if you do not plan to run a parametric analysis on a model.
tions (UNIX) The nominal models field and executive parameter solutions are computed independently
Errors in Parametric of any parametric solutions, although both may use the same set of solution criteria.
Solutions When computing solutions, the simulator uses the original values for all design variables
Batch Mode for Personal that were specified when the model was created, ignoring any values they might be set to
Computers during a parametric sweep.
Batch Processing for
Windows Parametric Model
The parametric model consists of a series of variations on the nominal model. In it, the
design variables defined for the model are assigned the values you specified while setting
up the parametric sweep. The number of variations that can be defined for a parametric
model is limited only by your computing resources and imagination.
Each variant on the nominal model is known as a parametric setup. It represents the
model that results when you set one or more of the variables you defined when creating
the model to different values. During the solution process, field and executive parameter
Go Back solutions are computed for each setup, and post-processing macros are executed using
the results of the setups field solution. You can then compare the results obtained for
Contents each setup to determine how each design change affects the models performance. (Note
that changing the values of more then one or two variables at a time may make it difficult
to isolate the effects of an individual design variation.)
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 657 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis
Introduction to Parametric Accessing the Parametrics Analysis Module
Analysis
Nominal and Parametric To access the Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis module, open a project and run the simu-
Models lator. Models created using earlier versions of Maxwell 2D can be used with the Paramet-
Nominal Model ric Analysis module, as can models created using the non-parametric version of the
Parametric Model simulator.
Accessing the Paramet-
The Parametric Analysis module is automatically loaded with the rest of the Maxwell 2D
rics Analysis Module
software. The same model types, field solvers, drawing package, material properties, and
General Procedure
excitations are available for both versions of the simulator. The same field quantities can
Create the Model
be computed, and the same post-processing functions can be used to examine solution
Set Up Solutions
data. However, the Parametric Analysis module contains additional functions related to
Generate Solutions
performing a parametric analysis.
Post Processing
Batch Processing
Batch Mode for Worksta-
tions (UNIX)
Errors in Parametric
Solutions
Batch Mode for Personal
Computers
Batch Processing for
Windows

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 658 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis
Introduction to Parametric General Procedure
Analysis
Nominal and Parametric Follow the general procedure summarized below to set up a parametric model and per-
Models form a parametric sweep:
Nominal Model Create model. Define geometric
Parametric Model
constraints and functional
Accessing the Parametrics
material properties,boundary
Analysis Module
General Procedure and source values.
Create the Model
Set Up Solutions Set up executive parameter
Generate Solutions computations; identify matrix
Post Processing entries; define motion parameters;
Batch Processing select post processing macros.
Batch Mode for Worksta-
tions (UNIX)
Errors in Parametric Enter field and executive
Solutions
Batch Mode for Personal parametric solution options;
Computers set up parametric sweeps.
Batch Processing for
Windows

Generate the nominal and/or

parametric solutions.

View and plot parametric solution

results; analyze nominal and
Go Back parametric field solutions; view
convergence and profile statistics.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 659 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis
Introduction to Parametric Create the Model
Analysis
Nominal and Parametric First, you must create the model to which you will apply the parametric analysis.
Models > To create a parametric model:
Nominal Model 1. Follow the general procedure for creating a 2D model. Identify the design
Parametric Model parameters that serve as variables during the parametric solution as follows:
Accessing the Parametrics While drawing the model, define geometric constraints to identify the dimensions
Analysis Module that will be varied.
General Procedure While assigning materials, define functional material properties to identify the
Create the Model material properties (such as relative permittivity, conductivity, and so forth) that will
Set Up Solutions be varied.
Generate Solutions While setting up boundaries and sources, define functional boundaries and
Post Processing sources to identify the electromagnetic excitations that will be varied.
Batch Processing 2. Set up any executive parameter computations as you would for an ordinary
Batch Mode for Worksta- Maxwell 2D model, using the Setup Executive Parameters command.
tions (UNIX) If you specified that a capacitance, inductance, impedance, conductance, or
Errors in Parametric admittance matrix be computed, select the matrix entries that appear in the
Solutions parametric spreadsheet using the Setup Executive Parameters/Select Matrix
Batch Mode for Personal Entries command.
Computers
Batch Processing for Set Up Solutions
Windows Next, set up the various solutions that will be performed during the parametric sweep.
Field and Nominal Solutions
> To set up the models field and executive parameter solutions:
Enter the solution criteria such as error tolerance for an adaptive analysis using
the Setup Solution/Options command.
These solution options control how the individual field and parameter solutions are gener-
ated during a parametric sweep. They also control how the nominal solution is generated.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 660 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis
Introduction to Parametric Setup the Parametric Solution
Analysis Once the model and nominal solution options have been defined, specify the parametric
Nominal and Parametric solution options.
Models
Nominal Model > To set up the models parametric solution:
Parametric Model 1. Choose Setup Solution/Variables.
Accessing the Parametrics 2. Select the variables frequency, geometric constraints, functional material
Analysis Module properties, or functional boundary/source quantities that will be assigned new
General Procedure values during the parametric sweep. Do so using the Variable/Add command.
Create the Model 3. Define the individual solutions that will be performed during a parametric sweep.
Set Up Solutions To add solutions to the sweep, do one or both of the following:
Generate Solutions Specify a range of values for the desired variables (a data sweep) using the
Post Processing Data/Sweep command.
Batch Processing Alternatively, add solutions using the Edit/Insert Row command, and then edit
Batch Mode for Worksta- them individually.
tions (UNIX) 4. Save your changes and exit via the File/Exit command.
Errors in Parametric Generate Solutions
Solutions
Batch Mode for Personal Once the solution options have been defined, generate a solution for the model.
Computers
> To generate a solution, do one or both of the following:
Batch Processing for
Windows Choose Solve/Nominal Problem to generate a solution for the model on which the
parametric sweep is based. Ordinarily, you do not have to generate a nominal solution
before performing a parametric analysis. However, it is required if you want to
adaptively refine the finite element mesh prior to performing a parametric sweep, or if
you want to define post-processing macros that will be executed during the sweep.
Choose Solve/Variables to begin the parametric solution. The Maxwell 2D generates
a solution for each parametric setup thats been defined for your model.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 661 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis
Introduction to Parametric Post Processing
Analysis
Nominal and Parametric When the solution process is complete, do the following to view the results:
Models To analyze the field solution for the nominal problem on which the parametric sweep is
Nominal Model based, choose Post Process/Nominal Problem.
Parametric Model To view information on the various solutions computed during a parametric sweep and
Accessing the Parametrics plot parametric solution results, choose Post Process/Variables.
Analysis Module If you specified that field solutions were to be saved during the setup of a parametric
General Procedure sweep, choose Variables. From this window, you can select which field solution is to
Create the Model be viewed.
Set Up Solutions To view complete executive parameter solution results, convergence and profile
Generate Solutions statistics for either the nominal or parametric solutions, use the Solutions,
Post Processing Convergence, and Profile commands.
Batch Processing
Batch Mode for Worksta-
tions (UNIX)
Errors in Parametric
Solutions
Batch Mode for Personal
Computers
Batch Processing for
Windows

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 662 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis
Introduction to Parametric Batch Processing
Analysis
Nominal and Parametric As an alternative to running Maxwell 2D interactively, use the softwares batch processing
Models features to perform a parametric analysis. In order for batch mode to work properly, you
Nominal Model must do the following for each model:
Parametric Model
Accessing the Parametrics
Select the type of field to be computed.
Analysis Module
Create the geometric model, define material characteristics and set up boundaries.
While doing so, define all variables (such as geometric constraints or functional
General Procedure
boundary values) that you want to use during the parametric sweep.
Create the Model
Set Up Solutions Request forces, torques and other quantities of interest.
Generate Solutions
Post Processing Note: To use post-processing macros during a batch solution, generate a nominal
solution for the problem and define the desired macros before running the
Batch Processing batch job.
Batch Mode for Worksta-
tions (UNIX) Enter the desired solution parameters for both the nominal problem and the
Errors in Parametric parametric sweep.
Solutions
Batch Mode for Personal For an overview of the steps involved in setting up and solving a parametric model, see
Computers the General Procedure section earlier in this chapter.
Batch Processing for Batch mode for the Parametric Analysis module operates in much the same way as batch
Windows mode for the other Maxwell 2D packages. The differences are described here.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 663 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis
Introduction to Parametric Batch Mode for Workstations (UNIX)
Analysis
Nominal and Parametric To run the software in batch mode on a workstation, enter one of the following commands
Models at the UNIX prompt:
Nominal Model To generate a solution for the nominal problem, enter:
Parametric Model m2dfs -batch option projectname
Accessing the Parametrics
Analysis Module where option is one of the following:
General Procedure C Solves for the models capacitance matrix.
Create the Model L Solves for the models inductance matrix.
Set Up Solutions Z Solves for the models impedance matrix.
Generate Solutions y Solves for the models admittance matrix.
Post Processing
All Solves for all requested circuit parameters.
Batch Processing
Batch Mode for Worksta- To generate a solution for the parametric sweep, enter:
tions (UNIX)
m2dfs -batch Variables projectname
Errors in Parametric
Solutions where projectname is the name and directory path of the Maxwell 2D project that you
Batch Mode for Personal wish to solve. The Variables flag automatically executes parametric solutions for all
Computers requested circuit parameters. Use a script file to generate batch solutions for multiple
Batch Processing for projects.
Windows
Errors in Parametric Solutions
If a problem occurs during a parametric solution such as the creation of overlapping
objects when a geometric constraint is set to a new value the solution for that paramet-
ric setup is aborted. However, Maxwell 2D continues to generate solutions for the projects
other parametric setups. Even though one or more solutions may be invalid, you will not
lose the results from the rest of the parametric sweep. All solution errors are recorded in
the batch log file.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 664 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis
Introduction to Parametric Batch Mode for Personal Computers
Analysis
Nominal and Parametric Batch processing for parametric problems works differently in Microsoft Windows operat-
Models ing systems. To generate batch solutions for nominal models, use the Maxwell Batch Util-
Nominal Model ity.
Parametric Model
Accessing the Parametrics Note: You cannot directly generate batch solutions for parametric models in older
Microsoft packages such as Windows for Workgroups. Instead, use a third-
Analysis Module
party batch processing utility. Enter the command to run the software as
General Procedure
described below.
Create the Model
Set Up Solutions Batch Processing for Windows
Generate Solutions
Post Processing To generate batch solutions in the Windows version of the software, do one or more of the
Batch Processing following:
Batch Mode for Worksta- Generate a solution for the nominal problem using the Microsoft Windows command
tions (UNIX) shell.
Errors in Parametric To generate a solution for the parametric problem using the Windows command shell,
Solutions enter the following at the command prompt:
Batch Mode for Personal
Computers path\m2dfs -batch Variables projectname
Batch Processing for where:
Windows
path is the drive and directory path where the Maxwell 2D executables are
installed (for example, c:\win32app\maxwell).
projectname is the drive, directory path and name of the Maxwell 2D project that
you wish to solve.
To generate solutions for multiple projects, create a batch file that can be run in the Win-
dows command shell.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 665 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Post Processing
Parametrics Post Parametrics Post Processing
Processing
Parametric Maxwell 2Ds Parametric Analysis module invokes the Parametric Post Processor to ana-
Postprocessor lyze the solutions.
Post Process/Nominal
Problem
Parametric Postprocessor
Post Process/Variables The Parametric Post Processor has three commands for viewing and analyzing the com-
Parametric Setup pleted solutions.
Parametrics Post
Processor Tool Bar To analyze the field solution for the nominal problem on which the parametric sweep is
Variables based, choose Post Process/Nominal Problem.
General Procedure for To view information on the various solutions computed during a parametric sweep and
Viewing Field Solutions plot parametric solution results, choose Post Process/Variables.
If you specified that field solutions were to be saved during the setup of a parametric
sweep, choose Variables to view the parametric spreadsheet. From this window, you
can select which field solution is to be viewed.
This chapter describes how to access each of these post-processing functions.

Post Process/Nominal Problem

Choose Post Process/Nominal Problem to view, manipulate, and analyze the field solu-
tion associated with the nominal problem on which the parametric sweep is based (the
functionality of this command is the same as the non-parametric Post Process com-
mand).

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 666 Copyright 1997-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Post Processing
Parametrics Post Processing Post Process/Variables
Parametric Postprocessor
Post Process/Nominal Choose Post Process/Variables to do access the parametric setup.
Problem
Post Process/Variables
Parametric Setup
Parametric Setup The parametric table allows you to do the following:
Parametrics Post
Processor Tool Bar Plot variable values against solutions, error, number of triangles, and so forth. This
Variables enables you to graphically display the results of the parametric solutions.
General Procedure for View the following information for each parametric solution:
Viewing Field Solutions The parameters that were varied during the solution.
The executive parameters (forces, torques, matrix entries, and so forth) that were
computed.
The energy, energy error, and the number of triangles in the finite element mesh.
The numeric output of any Post Processor macros that were executed during the
solution process.
The following window appears when you choose this command. Each variable setup that
was defined via the Setup Solution/Variables command is listed in the parametric
spreadsheet (regardless of whether a solution has been generated for it).

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 667 Copyright 1997-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Post Processing
Parametrics Post Processing Parametrics Post Processor Tool Bar
Parametric Postprocessor
Post Process/Nominal The icons in the tool bar serve as shortcuts for executing various post processing com-
Problem mands. They are listed below:
Post Process/Variables
Parametric Setup
Parametrics Post Plot/New
Processor Tool Bar Plot/Close
Variables
General Procedure for Plot/Add Graphs
Viewing Field Solutions Plot/Show Coordinates
Plot/Format/Axes
Plot/Format/Graphs
Plot/Zoom In
Plot/Zoom Out
Plot/Fit All

Data/Sort
Edit/Deselect All
Variables/Animate

> To execute or view information on the commands in the tool bar:

To execute a command, click on the appropriate button.
To display a brief description of the command in the message bar, hold down the
mouse button on the desired icon.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 668 Copyright 1997-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Post Processing
Parametrics Post Processing Variables
Parametric Postprocessor
Post Process/Nominal After a parametric sweep is completed, choose Variables from the Executive Commands
Problem window to view the following for each parametric setup:
Post Process/Variables
Parametric Setup
The field solution for a parametric setup, if it was saved during the parametric sweep.
Parametrics Post Proces-
The parameters that were varied during the sweep.
sor Tool Bar The solution energy, energy error and the number of triangles in the finite element
Variables mesh.
General Procedure for The executive parameters (forces, torques, matrix entries, and so forth) that were
Viewing Field Solutions computed during the sweep.
The numeric output of any post-processor macros that were executed during the
solution process.
Each variable setup that was defined via Setup Solution/Variables is listed in the para-
metric spreadsheet (regardless of whether a solution has been generated for it).

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 669 Copyright 1997-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Parametric Post Processing
Parametrics Post Processing General Procedure for Viewing Field Solutions
Parametric Postprocessor
> To view a saved field solution:
Post Process/Nominal
1. Click on the button at the beginning of the row containing the desired parameter
Problem
setup. (Those with field solutions are marked with a Y under Save Field
Post Process/Variables
Solution?) The row is highlighted, and a window similar to the one below appears
Parametric Setup
listing the values of all variables:
Parametrics Post
Processor Tool Bar
Variables
General Procedure for
Viewing Field Solutions

2. Choose View Fields to view the field solution for the selected parametric setup.
The 2D Post Processor appears.
3. Choose Return to Nominal Problem to return to the Executive Commands
window.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 670 Copyright 1997-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Edit Menu (Variable Table)
Edit Menu Edit Menu
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo In the spreadsheet, use the Edit commands to perform the following tasks.
Edit/Redo
Edit/Cut
Cut, copy, paste, and reset cell values.
Edit/Copy
Deselect any selected cells.
Edit/Paste Insert and delete rows from the table.
Edit/Clear The Edit menu appears as shown below:
Edit/Deselect All
Edit/Insert Row
Edit/Delete Row
Edit/Duplicate Row

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 671 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Edit Menu (Variable Table)
Edit Menu Edit Commands
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo The function of each Edit command is as follows.
Edit/Redo Undo Reverses the effect of the last command
Edit/Cut
Redo Cancels the effect of the last Undo command.
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste Cut Copies the values in the selected cells into the table cutbuffer, and
Edit/Clear resets the cells to their nominal values. (Their values in the nominal
Edit/Deselect All problem.)
Edit/Insert Row Copy Copies the values in the selected cells into the table cutbuffer, but
Edit/Delete Row does not reset the cells.
Edit/Duplicate Row Paste Pastes the values in the cutbuffer into the selected cells. If there is
nothing in the table cutbuffer, this option is not enabled in the menu.
Clear Resets the selected cells to their nominal values.
Deselect All Deselects all selected cells.
Insert Row Adds another row above the row containing the selection, or at the
bottom of the table.
Delete Row Deletes the selected row or rows.
Duplicate Row Duplicates the selected rows.

Most of these commands are executed on cells selected in the variable setup table.

Edit/Undo
Choose Edit/Undo to reverse the effect of the last command.

Edit/Redo
Choose Edit/Redo to re-perform the last action cancelled with the Edit/Undo command.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 672 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Edit Menu (Variable Table)
Edit Menu Edit/Cut
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Choose Edit/Cut to copy the values of the selected cells to the internal clipboard. The
Edit/Redo cells are then reset to their nominal values, and remain selected.
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Clear Choose Edit/Copy to copy the values of the selected cells to the internal clipboard. The
Edit/Deselect All cells retain their values, and remain selected.
Edit/Insert Row
Edit/Delete Row Edit/Paste
Edit/Duplicate Row
Choose Edit/Paste to paste the values from the internal clipboard into the selected cells.
You must have the same number of rows and columns selected as you did when you cut
or copied the data.

Edit/Clear
Choose Edit/Clear to reset all of the selected cells to their nominal values. A message
appears, asking if you are sure you want to clear the cells. If you choose OK, the cells are
cleared, and remain selected.

Edit/Deselect All
Choose Edit/Deselect All to deselect all selected cells. The cells retain their values.

Edit/Insert Row
Choose Edit/Insert Row to add a row to the table.
If you have no cells selected, this command adds a row to the bottom of the table.
Go Back If you have one or more cells selected, this command adds a table row above the
current selection.

Contents The cells in the inserted rows take their values from the nominal problem.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 673 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Edit Menu (Variable Table)
Edit Menu Edit/Delete Row
Edit Commands
Edit/Undo Choose Edit/Delete Row to delete the selected rows from the table.
Edit/Redo
> To do this:
Edit/Cut
1. Select the rows you wish to delete. To select an entire row at once, click on its
Edit/Copy
setup heading at the left edge of the table.
Edit/Paste
2. Choose Edit/Delete Row.
Edit/Clear
Edit/Deselect All The selected cells are completely removed from the table.
Edit/Insert Row
Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row
Edit/Duplicate Row
Choose Edit/Duplicate Row to duplicate rows in the parametric table.
> To duplicate table rows:
1. Select the row to duplicate.
2. Choose Edit/Duplicate Row. The row appears above the selected one.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 674 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Variables Menu
Variables Menu Variables Menu
Variables Commands
Variables/Add In the spreadsheet, use the Variables commands to perform the following tasks :
Variables/Delete
Variables/View
Add columns to the table for defined variables.
Variables/Animate
Delete variable columns from the table.
Animating the Model View all of the defined variables, their nominal values, and what part of the
Changing the View of the software uses each.
Geometric Model View an animation which uses the setups to define each frame.
Variables/Rearrange Col- The Variables menu appears as shown below:
umns

Variables Commands
The function of each Variables command is as follows.
Add Add a project variable as a column in the data table.
Delete Delete the selected project variable column.
View View all project variables and their current values.
Animate Display the model while enforcing constraint parameters row by row.
Go Back Rearrange Rearranges the columns in the parametric table.
Columns
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 675 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Variables Menu
Variables Menu Variables/Add
Variables Commands
Variables/Add Choose Variables/Add to add a column to the table that represents the value of a defined
Variables/Delete variable in each of the setups. When you choose this command, the window shown here
Variables/View appears with a list of defined variables that do not yet have columns in the table.
Variables/Animate
Animating the Model
Changing the View of the
Geometric Model
Variables/Rearrange Col-
umns

Only variables that are independent of other variables and have an active effect on the
model are shown in the list.
> To add a column to the table for one of the variables:
1. Choose Variables/Add.
2. Select the variable from the list.
3. Choose OK.
Go Back A column is added to the left edge of the table to represent that variable. Initially, the value
of all of the cells in the column is set to that variables value in the nominal problem.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 676 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Variables Menu
Variables Menu Variables/Delete
Variables Commands
Variables/Add Choose Variables/Delete to delete a variables column from the table. The number of set-
Variables/Delete ups does not change. If a parametric solution is executed later, the value of that variable
Variables/View in each setup is assumed to be equal to its value in the nominal problem.
Variables/Animate
> To delete a variables column from the table:
Animating the Model
1. Select the entire column by clicking on its heading.
Changing the View of the
2. Choose Variables/Delete. A message appears, asking you to confirm the deletion
Geometric Model
of the selected variable columns.
Variables/Rearrange Col-
3. Choose Yes to delete the column or No to cancel the action.
umns
The column is deleted from the table.

Variables/View
Choose Variables/View to bring up a list of all of the variables defined in the problem. It
also displays which part of the simulator uses this variable, and the variables value in the
nominal problem.

Go Back

Contents
> When you are finished viewing the variables:
Index Choose OK.

Maxwell Online Help System 677 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Variables Menu
Variables Menu Variables/Animate
Variables Commands
Variables/Add Choose Variables/Animate to view the list of setups as frames in an animation. This ani-
Variables/Delete mation shows changes that occur to the physical model, based on constraints.
Variables/View
Variables/Animate
If you have a group of rows selected, those rows are used in the animation.
Animating the Model
If no rows are selected, all rows are used.
Changing the View of the When you choose this command, the following window appears:
Geometric Model
Variables/Rearrange Col-
umns

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 678 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Variables Menu
Variables Menu Animating the Model
Variables Commands
Variables/Add Two checkboxes control the speed of the animation:
Variables/Delete Turn on the Single Step checkbox to have the animator pause after it displays each
Variables/View physical setup, and wait for you to select a button before it displays the next setup.
Variables/Animate Turn off the Verify Model checkbox to speed up the animation because the animator
Animating the Model does not double-check the accuracy of the model.
Changing the View of
the Geometric Model > To animate the model:
Variables/Rearrange Col- 1. Set the Single Step and Verify Model checkboxes to the desired settings.
umns 2. Select Start. The software is now animating the model. As each frame is
displayed, the setup that it represents is listed above the Done button.
3. If you turned on the Single Step checkbox, you can step through the animation
using the arrow buttons:
Select the left arrow (<<) to back up one frame.
Select the right arrows (>>) to proceed on frame.
If you left Single Step off for continuous animation, you can use the arrow buttons
to affect the direction of animation.
Select the left arrow (<<) to animate the setups in reverse order.
Select the right arrows (>>) to animate the setups in forward order.
4. Select Done when you are finished. You return to the parametric table.

Changing the View of the Geometric Model

The Zoom In, Zoom Out, Fit All, Fit Drawing, Fill Solids/Wire Frame commands work
the same as on the Executive Commands menu.

Variables/Rearrange Columns
Go Back Choose this command to rearrange the order of the columns in the paramteric table.
> To rearrange the columns:
1. Choose Variables/Rearrange Columns. The Rearrange Table window appears.
Contents 2. Select the column name to move from the list.
3. Choose Up or Down to move the selected column in the sequence.
Index 4. Choose OK. The parametric table is redrawn with the new sequence.

Maxwell Online Help System 679 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Data Menu
Data Menu Data Menu
Data Commands
Data/Fill In the spreadsheet, use the commands on the Data menu to perform the tasks listed
Data/Sweep below:
Data/Sort
Selecting Sort Keys
Fill a cell or group of cells with a value or series of values.
Deleting Sort Keys
Create rows in the table that contain a value or series of values.
Sorting Data Sort rows in the table based on the values of the variables.
Changing the Sort Priority The Data appears as shown below:

Data Commands
The function of each Data command is as follows:
Fill Change the value stored in a table cell to a certain value, or a group of
cells to a series of values.
Sweep Add rows to the table, filling the variable columns with a value or series of
values, or replace the current table with a new set of rows.
Sort Put rows of the table into ascending or descending order, indexed by the
values of selected variables.
Go Back
Note: The Data/Fill and Data/Sweep commands do not work in the Parametrics
Post Processor and remain grayed out.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 680 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Data Menu
Data Menu Data/Fill
Data Commands
Data/Fill Choose Data/Fill to set the value of a table cell or group of cells to a value or series of val-
Data/Sweep ues. You must have at least one cell selected to use this command. If no cells are
Data/Sort selected, the command is inactive, and grayed out.
Selecting Sort Keys
Once you have selected at least one cell, choose Data/Fill. The following window
Deleting Sort Keys
appears:
Sorting Data
Changing the Sort Priority

Values are generated by entering an expression using the variable t and providing starting
and ending values for t. Choosing Help brings up a window containing a list of all legal
operators and functions that can be performed on t.
> For example, to fill ten rows with a simple series from one to ten:
More 1. Select ten rows in the table by clicking in one column and dragging until ten rows in
that column are selected.
2. Enter 1 in the t_start field.
Go Back 3. Enter 10 in the t_end field.
4. Choose OK.
Contents The ten cells are then filled with the numbers from one to ten.
> Sinusoidal values could be entered via this procedure:
Index 1. Select a group of rows in the table by clicking in one column and dragging until the

Maxwell Online Help System 681 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Data Menu
Data Menu desired number of rows in that column are selected.
Data Commands 2. Enter sin(t) in the val(t) field.
Data/Fill 3. Enter 0 in the t_start field.
Data/Sweep 4. Enter 90 in the t_end field.
Data/Sort 5. Choose OK.
Selecting Sort Keys All trigonometric functions expect their arguments to be in degrees, and inverse trigono-
Deleting Sort Keys metric functions return values are in degrees. Note that pi is a built-in constant, and may
Sorting Data not be reassigned. Intrinsic function names are reserved, and may not be used as vari-
Changing the Sort Priority able names.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 682 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Data Menu
Data Menu Data/Sweep
Data Commands
Data/Fill Choose Data/Sweep to add rows representing different setups to the table. To use this
Data/Sweep command, you must have at least one variable defined, and added to the table. When you
Data/Sort choose this command, a window similar to the following one appears:
Selecting Sort Keys
Deleting Sort Keys
Sorting Data
Changing the Sort Priority

> To add setups to the table using this window:

1. Choose a variable from the list of variables in your table. If you need to add more
variable columns to the table:
a. Choose Cancel.
More b. Use the Variables/Add command to add a column for each variable.
c. Choose Data/Sweep again.
2. Set the val(t) field to the function that will yield the correct values. Choosing Help
Go Back shows you a list of the legal operators and functions. For a simple series like a
sweep from one to ten, you can leave this field set to t.
Contents 3. Set the t_start field equal to the desired initial value of t.
4. Set the t_end field equal to the desired final value of t.
5. Set the number of samples equal to the number of rows you would like the sweep
Index to span. The actual number of rows added is equal to the product of the number of

Maxwell Online Help System 683 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Data Menu
Data Menu samples for all the variables.
Data Commands 6. Choose Accept.
Data/Fill 7. Repeat steps 1 though 6 for each variable you would like to have varying value.
Data/Sweep 8. Do one of the following:
Data/Sort Select Append to table to add the rows to the existing table.
Selecting Sort Keys Deselect Append to table to replace the current table with the new rows.
Deleting Sort Keys 9. Choose OK. If you opted to replace the table with the new sweep, a dialog box
Sorting Data asks you if you are sure you want to lose the old table.
Changing the Sort Priority 10. Choose OK to replace the table or Cancel to cancel the action.
If you chose to append the sweep to the current table, the setups are added to the table,
below the existing setups. If you chose to replace the current table, the old setups are
removed, and the new ones take their place.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 684 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Data Menu
Data Menu Data/Sort
Data Commands
Data/Fill Choose Data/Sort to sort a number of rows, indexed to the values in their vertical col-
Data/Sweep umns.
Data/Sort
Selecting Sort Keys
If no cells are selected, this command sorts the entire table based on any selection of
column values.
Deleting Sort Keys
Sorting Data
If a group of cells is selected, only those rows and columns represented in the
selection are used by the command.
Changing the Sort Priority
When you choose Data/Sort, a window similar to the following one appears:

On the left is a list of the variables that can be used as keys for sorting. On the right is a
list of the variables that are to be used as sort keys.
Selecting Sort Keys
> To use a variable as a sort key:
Go Back 1. Select it from the list of variables.
2. Choose Add.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 685 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Data Menu
Data Menu Deleting Sort Keys
Data Commands > To remove a variable from the list of sort keys:
Data/Fill 1. Select it from the list of sort keys.
Data/Sweep 2. Choose Remove.
Data/Sort
Selecting Sort Keys Note: You may also transfer the variable name from one list to the other by double-
Deleting Sort Keys clicking on its name in the list.
Sorting Data
Changing the Sort Prior-
ity Sorting Data
> To set up and execute a sort on the selected rows:
1. Select variables from the list of variables to use as sort keys.
2. Do one of the following:
Select Ascending to sort the rows by ascending value.
Select Descending to sort the rows by descending value.
3. Choose OK.
The selected rows are sorted as you specified.
Changing the Sort Priority
The software goes down the list of sort keys, and sorts each row in order. Therefore, if
several sort keys have been chosen, those lower on the list have greater effect on the
order of the rows than those further up on the list.
> To reorder the list:
Select the item you want moved to the top of the Sort Keys list.
The list of sort keys is reordered to have that item at the top. In order to set up a specific
sort order, select keys in inverse order of their desired priority.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 686 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu Plot Menu
Plot Commands
Plot/New Use the Plot commands in the Maxwell 2D Parametric Post Processor to do the following:
Plot Windows
Plot/Open
Plot the results of a parametric sweep.
Plot/Close
Add new data to an existing plot.
Plot/Create Composite Plot Delete plots from the screen.
Plot/Save As Change the line color, line thickness, or other attributes of a plot.
Plot/Add Graphs Change the scale, labels, number of tick marks, and other plot axes parameters.
Plot/Show Coordinates Zoom into or out of a plot, or redraw the plot to fill the plot window.
Plot/Format Show the coordinates of points you select.
Plot/Format/Axes When you choose Plot from the Parametric Post Processor menu bar, the following menu
Plot/Format/Graphs appears:
Plot/Zoom In
Plot/Zoom Out
Plot/Fit All
Plotting Vector Data
Plotting Complex Data

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 687 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu Plot Commands
Plot Commands
Plot/New The commands on the Plot menu are:
Plot Windows New Draws a new plot.
Plot/Open
Open Reads in a previously-saved plot from a disk file.
Plot/Close
Plot/Create Composite Plot Close Removes an existing plot from the screen.
Plot/Save As Save As Saves a plot to a disk file.
Plot/Add Graphs Create Com- Creates composite plots.
Plot/Show Coordinates posite Plot
Plot/Format Add Graphs Adds another graph to an existing plot.
Plot/Format/Axes Show Displays the x- and y-coordinates of points on the plot.
Plot/Format/Graphs Coordinates
Plot/Zoom In Format Changes the appearance of the following parts of a plot:
Plot/Zoom Out Axes Specifies axis scales, labels, plot headings, and the mini-
Plot/Fit All mum and maximum values to be plotted. Also determines
Plotting Vector Data the axis tick mark and grid settings.
Plotting Complex Data Graphs Specifies the color, line thickness, and line style of the
graphs on a plot. Also determines the type of markers dis-
played at data points, and whether the curve is visible on
the plot.
Zoom In Zooms into an area of the plot, rescaling the axes to magnify the view.
Zoom Out Zooms out of an area of the plot, rescaling the axes to shrink the view.
Fit All Redraws and rescales the plot so that it fills the entire plot window.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 688 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu Plot/New
Plot Commands
Plot/New Choose Plot/New to draw a plot of parametric solution results. The following information
Plot Windows can be plotted:
Plot/Open
Plot/Close
The value of any variable in the sweep.
Plot/Create Composite Plot
Solution information, such as energy, error energy, and number of triangles in the
mesh.
Plot/Save As
Plot/Add Graphs Results of parametric solutions, such as force, torque, capacitance, and so forth.
Plot/Show Coordinates Any set of parametric solution data can be plotted against any other set of data. You can
Plot/Format create as many plots as you like. Each plot is completely independent of other plots, and
Plot/Format/Axes appears in its own plot window.
Plot/Format/Graphs
Plot/Zoom In > To draw a new plot:
Plot/Zoom Out 1. Highlight the rows in the parametric spreadsheet that contain the data to plot. If no
Plot/Fit All rows are highlighted, the solution data in all rows is plotted.
Plotting Vector Data 2. Choose Plot/New. The following window appears:
Plotting Complex Data

More

Go Back

Contents
The information that can be plotted (variables, solution information, and solution
Index results) is listed under Abscissa and Ordinate.

Maxwell Online Help System 689 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu 3. Under Abscissa, highlight the data that serves as the x-axis of the plot.
Plot Commands 4. Under Ordinate, highlight the data that serves as the y-axis of the plot. You can
Plot/New select more than one type of data to be plotted against the abscissa.
Plot Windows 5. Select the plot type (Cartesian or Polar).
Plot/Open 6. Do one of the following:
Plot/Close For a cartesian plot, set the scale of the x- and y-axes (X Scale and Y Scale):
Plot/Create Composite Plot Linear Specifies a linear scale for the x- or y-axis.
Plot/Save As Log Specifies a logarithmic scale for the x- or y-axis.
Plot/Add Graphs
Plot/Show Coordinates For a polar plot, set the units of angular measurement. Click on the field next to
Plot/Format Angle Units to display the units of angular measurement (degrees and radians),
Plot/Format/Axes then choose the desired unit.
Plot/Format/Graphs 7. To smooth the curve, enter the degree of interpolation in the Interpolation Order
Plot/Zoom In field. Specify an interpolation order between -1 and 12. (Higher order interpolants
Plot/Zoom Out tend to oscillate in an uncontrolled manner and are not supported in the Maxwell
Plot/Fit All software.) By default, this field is set to -1, which does not smooth the curve.
Plotting Vector Data 8. Choose Family of Curves to cause the curve for each setup to be individually
Plotting Complex Data identified on the plot.
9. Choose OK.
The desired information is then plotted. For example, in the plot shown on the next page,
the following settings were used:
Abscissa The force on the plunger in Newtons, labeled Force(N) on
the plot.
Ordinate The variable stroke, a geometric constraint representing
the distance between the plunger and the plug nut in a sole-
noid.
More Plot Type Cartesian
X Scale, Y Scale Linear
Go Back Interpolation order -1

As you can see, the force on the plunger decreases as the distance increases. However,
Contents this relationship is not linear the force levels off when stroke is between 0.047 and

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 690 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu 0.067 inches.
Plot Commands
Plot/New
Plot Windows
Plot/Open
Plot/Close
Plot/Create Composite Plot
Plot/Save As
Plot/Add Graphs
Plot/Show Coordinates
Plot/Format
Plot/Format/Axes
Plot/Format/Graphs
Plot/Zoom In
Plot/Zoom Out
Plot/Fit All
Plotting Vector Data
Plotting Complex Data

Note: Maxwell 2D automatically bases the plot axis settings on the maximum and
minimum values of the plotted data. These settings may change as you plot
other data with different values. To change the axis settings, choose Plot/
Go Back Format/Axes.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 691 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu Plot Windows
Plot Commands
Plot/New Each new plot displays in its own plot window, similar to the one shown above. Like Max-
Plot Windows well 2D project windows, plot windows are implemented using Motif window functions.
Plot/Open They can be resized, expanded, or iconified using the window frame functions.
Plot/Close
Plot/Create Composite Plot/Open
Plot Choose Plot/Open to open and view plots that have been saved to disk files. This com-
Plot/Save As mand operates the same way as the File/Open command in the 2D Modeler, except that
Plot/Add Graphs only plot files (*.dat) are listed.
Plot/Show Coordinates
Plot/Format Plot/Close
Plot/Format/Axes
Plot/Format/Graphs Choose Plot/Close to close an open plot.
Plot/Zoom In
Plot/Zoom Out > To do this:
Plot/Fit All 1. Select the desired plot window as the active plot window.
Plotting Vector Data 2. Choose Plot/Close.
Plotting Complex Data
Plot/Create Composite Plot
Choose Plot/Create Composite Plot to plot a series of values on the same plot.
> To plot a series of values:
1. Choose Plot/New or Plot/Open to create the base plot.
2. Choose Plot/Create Composite Plot. A file browser appears.
3. Use the browser to select the plot to incorporate into the composite plot and
choose OK.
The plots appear in the window.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 692 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu Plot/Save As
Plot Commands
Plot/New Choose Plot/Save As to save a plot to a disk file. After you save a plot, you can later read
Plot Windows the plot file back into the Parametrics post processor or into the PlotData utility in the Util-
Plot/Open ities panel.
Plot/Close
This command operates the same way as the File/Save As command in the 2D Modeler,
Plot/Create Composite Plot
except that the software automatically appends a .dat extension to the file name you
Plot/Save As
specify.
Plot/Add Graphs
Plot/Show Coordinates
Plot/Format
Plot/Format/Axes
Plot/Format/Graphs
Plot/Zoom In
Plot/Zoom Out
Plot/Fit All
Plotting Vector Data
Plotting Complex Data

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 693 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu Plot/Add Graphs
Plot Commands
Plot/New Choose Plot/Add Graphs to do the following:
Plot Windows
Plot/Open
Add new data to an existing plot. New data is automatically plotted against the
abscissa you selected when creating the plot.
Plot/Close
Plot/Create Composite Plot
Change the title of an existing plot.
Plot/Save As Specify how the newly plotted data is to be interpolated, or smoothed.
Plot/Add Graphs > To do this:
Plot/Show Coordinates 1. Highlight the rows in the parametric spreadsheet that contain the data youd like to
Plot/Format plot. If no rows are highlighted, the solution data in all rows is plotted.
Plot/Format/Axes 2. Select the desired plot window as the active plot window.
Plot/Format/Graphs 3. Choose Plot/Add Graphs. A window similar to the following one appears:
Plot/Zoom In
Plot/Zoom Out
Plot/Fit All
Plotting Vector Data
Plotting Complex Data

More

4. Optionally, enter a new title for the plot.

Go Back 5. Select one or more types of data to be added to the plot under Ordinate.
6. To smooth the curve, enter the degree of interpolation in the Interpolation Order
Contents field. Specify an interpolation order between -1 and 12. (Higher order interpolants
tend to oscillate in an uncontrolled manner and are not supported in the Maxwell
software.) By default, this field is set to -1, which does not smooth the curve.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 694 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu 7. Choose Family of Curves to cause the curve for each setup to be individually
Plot Commands identified on the plot.
Plot/New 8. To plot the desired data, choose OK.
Plot Windows
Plot/Open Note: The Maxwell 2D automatically bases the plot axis settings on the maximum
Plot/Close and minimum values of the plotted data. These settings may change as you
Plot/Create Composite Plot plot other data with different values. To change the axis settings, use the
Plot/Save As Plot/Format/Axes command.
Plot/Add Graphs
Plot/Show Coordinates Plot/Show Coordinates
Plot/Format
Plot/Format/Axes Choose Plot/Show Coordinates to display the coordinates of points on the plot.
Plot/Format/Graphs > To view the x- and y-coordinates of points on the plot:
Plot/Zoom In 1. Plot the desired data. To get a closer view of a graph to more accurately determine
Plot/Zoom Out its coordinates, use the Plot/Zoom In command to zoom into that part of the plot.
Plot/Fit All 2. Choose Plot/Show Coordinates.
Plotting Vector Data 3. Move the mouse to the desired point on the plot.
Plotting Complex Data 4. Click the left mouse button. A window appears showing the coordinates of the
selected point. The point is marked with a cross.
5. To view the coordinates of additional points, repeat steps 3 and 4.
6. To exit the Plot/Show Coordinates command, click the right mouse button.

Plot/Format
Use the Plot/Format commands to modify the appearance of the plot axes and the plot-
ted data:
Axes Specifies axis scales, labels, plot headings, and minimum and maximum
signal values to be plotted along with axis tick mark and grid settings.
Graphs Specifies the color, line thickness, and line style of a previously plotted
Go Back line. Also determines the type of markers displayed at solution data
points, and whether the graph is visible on the plot.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 695 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu Plot/Format/Axes
Plot Commands
Plot/New Choose Plot/Format/Axes to change the following information associated with a plot:
Plot Windows The scale of the x- and y-axes.
Plot/Open The number and type of tick marks (if any) to be drawn on the x- and y-axes.
Plot/Close Whether a grid is drawn on the major tick marks, minor tick marks, or both.
Plot/Create Composite Plot The minimum and maximum data values that are displayed on the axes.
Plot/Save As The plot heading and labels on the x- and y-axes.
Plot/Add Graphs
Plot/Show Coordinates The following window appears when this command is selected. This command is identical
Plot/Format to the Plot/Format Axes command in the PlotData utility.
Plot/Format/Axes
Plot/Format/Graphs
Plot/Zoom In
Plot/Zoom Out
Plot/Fit All
Plotting Vector Data
Plotting Complex Data

Go Back Note: As an alternative to executing Plot/Format/Axes, you can double-click the

right mouse button in the window containing your plot.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 696 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu Plot/Format/Graphs
Plot Commands
Plot/New Choose Plot/Format/Graphs to change how graphs are drawn on a plot. The following
Plot Windows attributes may be changed:
Plot/Open Line color, width, and style.
Plot/Close Whether markers are used to indicate data points.
Plot/Create Composite Plot The type of symbol that marks data points.
Plot/Save As Whether the graph is visible on the plot.
Plot/Add Graphs
Plot/Show Coordinates The following window appears when this command is selected:
Plot/Format
Plot/Format/Axes
Plot/Format/Graphs
Plot/Zoom In
Plot/Zoom Out
Plot/Fit All
Plotting Vector Data
Plotting Complex Data

This command is identical to Plot/Format Graphs in the PlotData utility.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 697 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu Plot/Zoom In
Plot Commands
Plot/New Choose Plot/Zoom In to zoom in on a region of the active plot window, magnifying the
Plot Windows view.
Plot/Open
> To zoom in on part of a plot:
Plot/Close
1. Select the desired plot as the active plot window.
Plot/Create Composite Plot
2. Choose Plot/Zoom In.
Plot/Save As
3. Select a point at one corner of the region on the plot that is to be zoomed.
Plot/Add Graphs
4. Select the point in the diagonal corner.
Plot/Show Coordinates
Plot/Format The system then redraws and rescales the plot, expanding the selected area to fill the plot
Plot/Format/Axes window.
Plot/Format/Graphs
Plot/Zoom In Plot/Zoom Out
Plot/Zoom Out
Plot/Fit All Choose Plot/Zoom Out to zoom out on the field of view in the active plot window.
Plotting Vector Data > To zoom out of a plot:
Plotting Complex Data 1. Select the desired plot as the active plot window.
2. Choose Plot/Zoom Out.
3. Select a point at one corner of the region that is to be zoomed out.
4. Select the point in the diagonal corner.
The system redraws and rescales the plot, shrinking it to display in the selected area.

Plot/Fit All
Choose Plot/Fit All to redraw the plot so that the entire plot fills the plot window.
To redraw a plot to fit the plot window:
1. Select the desired plot window as the active plot window.
Go Back 2. Choose Plot/Fit All.
The system then redraws and rescales the plot to fill the plot window.
Contents Note that only the visible graphs are fitted to the plot window the Maxwell 2D does not
take invisible lines into account when changing the scale of the plot window with Plot/Fit
Index All. You can change how graphs are shown on the plot.

Maxwell Online Help System 698 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu Plotting Vector Data
Plot Commands
Plot/New As shown below, both components of force in X-Y problems are displayed in the paramet-
Plot Windows rics table through the use of a variable type named vector.
Plot/Open
Plot/Close
Plot/Create Composite Plot
Plot/Save As
Plot/Add Graphs
Plot/Show Coordinates
Plot/Format
Plot/Format/Axes
Plot/Format/Graphs
Plot/Zoom In
Plot/Zoom Out If you select vector type data for plotting, the following window appears, allowing you to
Plot/Fit All select the components to plot.
Plotting Vector Data
Plotting Complex Data

More

Go Back

Contents > To plot components of vector data:

1. Select any or all of the four vector components for plotting.
2. Choose OK to execute the plots.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 699 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu Each component provides unique information, and your selections will be determined by
Plot Commands your information needs. The selections are the following:
Plot/New
Plot Windows Magnitude Plots the resultant of the X and Y forces, where:
Plot/Open Magnitude = x2 + y2
Plot/Close
Plot/Create Composite Plot Angle Plots the angle, , of the resultant force with respect to the x-axis,
where = atan -- .
y
Plot/Save As
x
Plot/Add Graphs
Plot/Show Coordinates Degrees Plots in degrees, if Angle is selected.
Plot/Format Radians Plots in radians, if Angle is selected.
Plot/Format/Axes
Plot/Format/Graphs X Plots the force exerted in the x direction.
Plot/Zoom In Y Plots the force exerted in the y direction.
Plot/Zoom Out
Plot/Fit All Choose degrees (the default) or radians for the angular units by clicking on the box
Plotting Vector Data labeled degrees to pull down the submenu.
Plotting Complex Data

More

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 700 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu The following figure shows a multiple plot graph with three components selected.
Plot Commands
Plot/New
Plot Windows
Plot/Open
Plot/Close
Plot/Create Composite Plot
Plot/Save As
Plot/Add Graphs
Plot/Show Coordinates
Plot/Format
Plot/Format/Axes
Plot/Format/Graphs
Plot/Zoom In
Plot/Zoom Out
Plot/Fit All
Plotting Vector Data
Plotting Complex Data

The customized appearance (headings, etc.) of this graph was achieved by using the for-
matting options that are available through the Plot/Format/Axes and Plot/Format/
Graphs commands.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 701 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu Plotting Complex Data
Plot Commands
Plot/New If you select a complex variable for plotting, the following window appears:
Plot Windows
Plot/Open
Plot/Close
Plot/Create Composite Plot
Plot/Save As
Plot/Add Graphs
Plot/Show Coordinates
Plot/Format
Plot/Format/Axes
Plot/Format/Graphs
Plot/Zoom In
Plot/Zoom Out
Plot/Fit All
Plotting Vector Data
Plotting Complex Data

> To plot components of complex values that are in the form a + bj:
1. Select any or all of the four complex components.
2. Select Use Frequency to use the frequency in the plot.
3. Choose OK to execute the plot.
More The selections and options are the following:

Magnitude Plots magnitude in the form a2 + b2 .

Go Back Phase Plots phase angle in the form atan --- .
b
a
Degrees Plots phase angle in degrees, if Phase is selected.
Contents
Radians Plots phase angle in radians, if Phase is selected.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 702 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Plot Menu (Parametrics)
Plot Menu Real Plots the real component, a.
Plot Commands
Plot/New Imaginary Plots the imaginary component, b.
Plot Windows
Use The b part of the complex expression is multiplied by 2f, where f is
Plot/Open
Frequency the frequency. For example, a complex variable in the form a + bj
Plot/Close
becomes a + 2fbj.
Plot/Create Composite Plot
Plot/Save As Choose degrees (the default) or radians for the angular units by clicking on the box
Plot/Add Graphs labeled degrees to pull down the submenu.
Plot/Show Coordinates
Plot/Format
Plot/Format/Axes
Plot/Format/Graphs
Plot/Zoom In
Plot/Zoom Out
Plot/Fit All
Plotting Vector Data
Plotting Complex Data

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 703 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Process/Transient Data
Post Processor/Transient Post Processor/Transient Data
Data
Plotting the Transient Solu- EMpulse only.
tions
Choose Post Process/Transient Data to:
Exiting PlotData
Plot the results of the transient motion problem.
View the torque, power loss, position, and speed as functions of time.
Calculate the fields and functions of the solution.
When you choose Post Processor/Transient Data, the PlotData utility appears, display-
ing the Edit Plot window:

Go Back

Contents While you are accessing PlotData, the Maxwell 2D Executive Commands menu remains
active. This allows you to inspect material properties, boundary conditions, convergence
Index information, and so forth while viewing the field solutions.

Maxwell Online Help System 704 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Post Process/Transient Data
Post Processor/Transient Plotting the Transient Solutions
Data
Plotting the Transient The Edit Plot window appears by default when you first access the Transient Data Post
Solutions Processor to allow you to select the type of plot to display.
Exiting PlotData
> To display a plot from the initial Edit Plot window:
1. Select the type of plot to display from the Loaded Signals list.
2. Selected the Type of plot:
Cartesian plots display the data on x- and y-axes.
Polar plots display the data using polar coordinates.
Smith Charts display the data using the standard Smith chart coordinates and
layout.
3. For Cartesian plots:
a. Select Linear or Log to plot the data on linear or logarithmic for the X and Y
scales.
b. Optionally, select Separate Y Scales to plot the data on separate y axes.
4. For Polar plots:
a. Select Degrees or Radians to define the units of the plot.
b. Optionally, select Far-Field Pattern to plot the far fields in the polar plot.
5. For Smith Charts, select Degrees or Radians to define the units of the plot.
6. Choose OK.
A plot of the selected fields appears.
Once the window closes, use the PlotData utility to analyze the fields.
Exiting PlotData
When you have finished using PlotData, choose File/Exit from the PlotData menu bar to
return to the Maxwell 2D Executive Commands window.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 705 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Technical Notes
Modules and Solvers
Electrostatic Field Simulation These technical notes contain background information on the theory behind the Maxwell
Theory 2D, including:
Capacitance
Capacitance in Terms of
A list of all Maxwell 2D software modules.
Charges and Voltages
Discussion of: background theory; capacitance, inductance, impedance, conductance,
and admittance matrices; virtual force and torque; flux linkage; and current flow for the
Capacitance in Terms of
following field solvers:
Currents and Time
Varying Voltages Electrostatic
Computing Capacitance Magnetostatic
Virtual Forces Eddy current
Virtual Torques DC conduction
Flux Linkage AC conduction
Magnetostatic Field Simula- Eddy axial
tion Transient
Theory The differences between field solutions in cartesian (XY) and axisymmetric (RZ)
Inductance models.
Virtual Forces An overview of the phasor notation used in this guide to represent complex field
Virtual Torques quantities.
Flux Linkage

More

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 706 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Modules and Solvers
Modules and Solvers
Electrostatic Field Simulation Maxwell 2D consists of the following modules:
Theory Executive Controls the screen that contains the Executive Commands menu
Capacitance for Maxwell 2D. Also performs administrative tasks such as main-
Capacitance in Terms of taining the material database and coordinating sources and bound-
Charges and Voltages ary conditions.
Capacitance in Terms of
2D Modeler A drawing package that allows a user to draw a geometric model of
Currents and Time
the cross-section being modeled.
Varying Voltages
Computing Capacitance Material Defines materials and enter their electromagnetic characteristics.
Virtual Forces Manager These materials can then be assigned to objects in your models.
Virtual Torques The Material Manager also contains a database of pre-defined
Flux Linkage materials that are available to all models.
Magnetostatic Field Simula- Boundary Defines electromagnetic sources (such as currents, voltages, and
tion Manager charges) and boundary conditions modeling the field behavior at
Theory object interfaces and the edges of the solution region.
Inductance 2D Meshmaker Creates or refines a finite element mesh for cross-sectional models,
Virtual Forces preparing them for field simulations.
Virtual Torques Electrostatic Computes the static electric field that exists in a structure given a
Flux Linkage Field Solver distribution of DC voltages and static charges. A capacitance matrix,
force, torque, and flux linkage may also be computed from the
energy stored in the electric field.
Magnetostatic Computes the static magnetic field that exists in a structure given a
Field Solver distribution of DC currents. The magnetic field may be computed in
structures with both non-linear and linear materials. An inductance
matrix, force, torque, and flux linkage may also be computed from
More the energy stored in the magnetic field.
AC Conduction Computes the AC currents that flow in a dielectric given a distribu-
Go Back Field Solver tion of AC voltages. An admittance matrix and current flow may also
be computed from the energy losses in dielectrics.
DC Conduction Computes the DC currents that flow in a lossy dielectric given a dis-
Contents Field Solver tribution of DC voltages. A conductance matrix and current flow may
also be computed from the energy stored in the electric field and
Index from energy losses in dielectrics.

Maxwell Online Help System 707 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Eddy Current Computes the oscillating magnetic field that exists in a structure
Modules and Solvers Field Solver given a distribution of AC currents. Also computes current densities,
Electrostatic Field Simulation taking into account all eddy current effects (including skin effects).
Theory An impedance matrix, force, torque, and current flow may also be
Capacitance computed from the energy stored in the magnetic field and from
Capacitance in Terms of energy losses in conductors.
Charges and Voltages Eddy Axial Computes the oscillating magnetic field that is induced in a structure
Capacitance in Terms of Field Solver by external oscillating magnetic fields. Current flow may also be
Currents and Time computed from the energy stored in the magnetic field and from
Varying Voltages energy losses in conductors.
Computing Capacitance Transient Solver Computes the forces, torques, speeds, and energy on moving
Virtual Forces (EMpulse) objects.
Virtual Torques Thermal Solver Computes the temperature on the system.
Flux Linkage
Post Processor Manipulates and displays quantities such as , E, D, B, and H.
Magnetostatic Field Simula-
tion Parametric Enables you to define and perform parametric sweeps solutions
Theory Analysis in which you specify a range of values for one or more variables in
Inductance your model (such as a geometric dimension, material property,
Virtual Forces source, and so forth).
Virtual Torques After you access Maxwell 2D, these software modules are invoked as necessary.
Flux Linkage
Note: The specific field solvers that are available to you depend on which software
package you purchased Electric Fields, DC Magnetics, AC Magnetics, or
the complete Maxwell 2D package.
The Parametric Analysis and EMpulse modules are available only if you pur-
chased those software packages. All field solvers are distributed with them.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 708 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Electrostatic Field Simulation
Modules and Solvers
Electrostatic Field Simula- The electrostatic field simulator computes static electric fields arising from potential differ-
tion ences and charge distributions.
Theory
Capacitance
Theory
Capacitance in Terms of The electrostatic field simulator solves for the electric potential, (x,y), in this field equa-
Charges and Voltages tion:
Capacitance in Terms of ( r 0 ( x, y ) ) =
Currents and Time
Varying Voltages where:
Computing Capacitance
Virtual Forces (x,y) is the electric potential.
Virtual Torques r is the relative permittivity. It can be different for each material.
Flux Linkage o is the permittivity of free space, 8.854 x 1012 F/m.
Magnetostatic Field Simula- (x,y) is the charge density.
tion
Theory This equation is derived from Gausss Law, which indicates that the net electric flux pass-
Inductance ing through any closed surface is equal to the net positive charge enclosed by that sur-
Virtual Forces face. In differential form, Gausss Law is:
Virtual Torques D =
Flux Linkage where D(x,y) is the electric flux density. Since D=roE, then:
( r 0 E ( x, y ) ) =

In a static field, E = . Therefore,

( r 0 ( x, y ) ) =
More
which is the equation that the electrostatic field simulator solves using the finite element
method.
Go Back After the solution for the potential is generated, the system automatically computes the E-
field and D-field using the relations E = and D=roE.
Contents An arrow plot of an electric field generated by the electrostatic field simulator is shown

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 709 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes below:
Modules and Solvers File Global Window Show Post Calc

Electrostatic Field Simula- Maxwell

2D Post
Processor

tion Ver. 6.2.09

Theory Mouse Mode

Object
Grid
Ye
Ye
Keyboard No
Capacitance Maximums
Capacitance in Terms of x 5.0000e+0
y 3.5000e+0

Charges and Voltages Minimums

x -5.0000e+0
y -3.5000e+0
Capacitance in Terms of
Currents and Time Mouse Positio
u +0.000
v +0.000
Varying Voltages Units

Computing Capacitance mm

Mouse Left
Virtual Forces MENU PICK
Mouse Right

Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage
Magnetostatic Field Simula-
tion
Theory Reading Triangles
Converting Data
Inductance Done
Adding user messages...

Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage

More

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 710 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Capacitance
Modules and Solvers
Electrostatic Field Simula- At the simplest level, capacitance represents the amount of energy stored in the electric
tion field in and surrounding a structure. In a single circuit, the capacitance represents the
Theory amount of energy stored in the electric field that arises due to a voltage differential across
Capacitance a dielectric.
Capacitance in Terms of 1 2
U e = --- Cv
Charges and Voltages 2
Capacitance in Terms of
Currents and Time where Ue is the energy stored in the electric field, C is the capacitance, and v is the volt-
Varying Voltages age across the dielectric.
Computing Capacitance
The Maxwell 2D computes the capacitance between two conductors by simulating the
Virtual Forces
electric field that arises when a voltage differential is applied. By computing the energy
Virtual Torques
stored in the field, the corresponding capacitance can be computed.
Flux Linkage
Magnetostatic Field Simula- 2U e
tion C = ---------
2
-
v
Theory
Inductance To compute capacitances using this method, the E-field and D-field associated with a
Virtual Forces given distribution of voltages must first be computed. The electrostatic field simulator,
Virtual Torques which computes the electric potential at all points in the problem region, does this.
Flux Linkage

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 711 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Capacitance in Terms of Charges and Voltages
Modules and Solvers A capacitance matrix represents the charge coupling within a group of conductors that
Electrostatic Field Simula- is, the relationship between charges and voltages for the conductors. Given the three con-
tion ductors shown below, with the outside boundary taken as a reference, the net charge on
Theory each object will be:
Capacitance
Capacitance in Terms Q1 = C10 V1 + C12(V1 - V2) + C13(V1 - V3)
of Charges and Volt- Q2 = C20 V2 + C12(V2 - V1) + C23(V2 - V3)
ages
Q3 = C30 V3 + C13(V3 - V1) + C23(V3 - V2)
Capacitance in Terms of
Currents and Time
Varying Voltages C10 C20
Computing Capacitance C12
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques Conductor Conductor
1 2
Flux Linkage
Magnetostatic Field Simula-
tion
C23
Theory C13
Inductance
Virtual Forces Conductor
3
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage C30

More This can be expressed in matrix form as:

Q1 C 10 + C 12 + C 13 C 12 C 13 V1
Go Back Q2 = C 12 C 20 + C 12 + C 23 C 23 V2
Q3 C 13 C 23 C 30 + C 13 + C 23 V 3
Contents
The capacitance matrix above gives the relationship between Q and V for the three con-
ductors and ground. In a device with n conductors, this relationship would be expressed
Index by an n x n capacitance matrix. Capacitance matrix values are specified in farads (cou-

Maxwell Online Help System 712 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes lombs/volt).
Modules and Solvers If one volt is applied to Conductor 1 and zero volts is applied to the other two conductors,
Electrostatic Field Simula- the capacitance matrix becomes:
tion
Theory Q1 1 C 10 + C 12 + C 13
Capacitance = C 0 =
Q2 C 12
Capacitance in Terms
of Charges and Volt- Q3 0 C 13
ages
Capacitance in Terms of The diagonal elements in the matrix (such as C(1,1)) are the sum of all capacitances from
Currents and Time one conductor to all other conductors. These terms represent the self-capacitance of the
Varying Voltages conductors. Each is numerically equal to the charge on a conductor when one volt is
Computing Capacitance applied to that conductor and the other conductors (including ground) are set to zero
Virtual Forces volts. For instance,
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage C(1,1) = C10 + C12 + C13
Magnetostatic Field Simula- The off-diagonal terms in each column (such as C(1,2), C(1,3)) are numerically equal to the
tion charges induced on other conductors in the system when one volt is applied to that con-
Theory ductor. For instance, in column one of the example capacitance matrix, C(1,2) is equal to
Inductance -C12. This is equal to the charge induced on Conductor 2 when one volt is applied to Con-
Virtual Forces ductor 1 and zero volts are applied to Conductor 2.
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage The off-diagonal terms are simply the negative values of the capacitances between the
corresponding conductors (the mutual capacitances). In column one of the example
capacitance matrix, the off-diagonal terms represent the capacitances between Conduc-
tor 1 and the other two conductors; in column two, the terms represent the capacitance
between Conductor 2 and the other conductors; and so forth.
Note that the capacitance matrix is symmetric about the diagonal. This indicates that the
mutual effects between any two objects are identical. For instance, C(1,3), the capacitance
between Conductor 1 and Conductor 3 (-C13), is equal to C(3,1), the capacitance between
Go Back Conductor 3 and Conductor 1.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 713 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Capacitance in Terms of Currents and Time Varying Voltages
Modules and Solvers A capacitance matrix can also represent the relationship between currents and time vary-
Electrostatic Field Simula- ing voltages in a system of conductors.
tion
Theory Given the three transmission lines shown here,
Capacitance
Capacitance in Terms of Line 1 i1
Charges and Voltages dV 1
Capacitance in Terms RL
of Currents and Time dt
Line 2 i2
Varying Voltages
dV 2
Computing Capacitance RL
Virtual Forces dt
Line 3 i3
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage dV 3
RL
Magnetostatic Field Simula- dt
tion
Theory
Inductance the currents caused by the time varying voltage source on each line are given by the fol-
Virtual Forces lowing relationship:
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage
i1 C 10 + C 12 + C 13 C 12 C 13 dV 1 ( dt )
i2 = C 12 C 20 + C 12 + C 23 C 23 dV 2 ( dt )
i3 C 13 C 23 C 30 + C 13 + C 23 dV 3 ( dt )

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 714 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes If dV2 /dt and dV3 /dt are set to zero, this relationship becomes:
Modules and Solvers
Electrostatic Field Simula- i1 dV 1 ( dt ) C 10 + C 12 + C 13
tion i2 = C 0 = C 12 ( dV 1 ( dt ) )
Theory i3 0 C 13
Capacitance
Capacitance in Terms of
This gives the currents that are induced on Line 2 and Line 3 when a time varying voltage
Charges and Voltages
source is applied to Line 1 that is, the capacitive coupling between the three lines, or
Capacitance in Terms
the short circuit capacitance.
of Currents and Time
Varying Voltages
Computing Capacitance
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage
Magnetostatic Field Simula-
tion
Theory
Inductance
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 715 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Computing Capacitance
Modules and Solvers To compute a capacitance matrix for a structure, the Maxwell 2D performs a sequence of
Electrostatic Field Simula- electrostatic field simulations. In each field simulation, one volt is applied to a single con-
tion ductor and zero volts is applied to all other conductors. Therefore, for an n-conductor sys-
Theory tem, n field simulations are automatically performed.
Capacitance
Capacitance in Terms of The energy stored in the electric field associated with the capacitance between two con-
Charges and Voltages ductors is given by the following relation:
Capacitance in Terms of
1
Currents and Time U ij = --- D i E j d
Varying Voltages 2

Computing Capaci-
tance where:
Virtual Forces Uij is the energy in the electric field associated with flux lines that connect charges on
Virtual Torques conductor i to those on conductor j.
Flux Linkage Di is the electric flux density associated with the case in which one volt is placed on
Magnetostatic Field Simula- conductor i.
tion Ej is the electric field associated with the case in which one volt is placed on conductor
Theory j.
Inductance
Virtual Forces The capacitance between conductors i and j is therefore:
Virtual Torques 2U ij
Flux Linkage C = ----------
2
= D i E j d
v

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 716 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Virtual Forces (Electrostatic)
Modules and Solvers
Electrostatic Field Simula- To compute the virtual force on an object, the electrostatic field simulator uses the princi-
tion ple of virtual work. In the structure shown below, the force on the bottom plate (plate B) in
Theory the direction of the displacement, x, is given by the following relationship:
Capacitance dW ( v, x )
F B = ----------------------
Capacitance in Terms of dx V = Constant
Charges and Voltages
Capacitance in Terms of where W is the stored energy of the system,
1
Currents and Time W ( v, x ) = --- Vol E DdVol
Varying Voltages 2
Computing Capacitance i
Virtual Forces i = dq / dt
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage
Magnetostatic Field Simula- A
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
tion +q
Theory V B F
D, E
x
Inductance
Virtual Forces -q
Virtual Torques B
Flux Linkage

Unlike the classical virtual work method, the plate is not actually moved during the numer-
ical process of the force computation. Instead, only the tetrahedra that lie along the out-
side surface of the object are virtually distorted. W and its derivative, dW/dx, are
calculated from a single field solution using finite element interpolation functions.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 717 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Virtual Torques (Electrostatic)
Modules and Solvers
Electrostatic Field Simula- Similar to the virtual force calculation, the system uses virtual work principles to compute
tion the torque on an object. In the structure shown below, the virtual torque on the bottom
Theory plate (plate B) about the axis of rotation is given by the following relationship:
Capacitance dW ( v, )
T B = ----------------------
Capacitance in Terms of d V = Constant
Charges and Voltages
Capacitance in Terms of where W is the stored energy of the system,
Currents and Time 1
W ( v, ) = --- Vol E DdVol
Varying Voltages 2
Computing Capacitance
Virtual Forces i
i = dq / dt
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage
Magnetostatic Field Simula- A
tion +++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Theory V FB Axis of rotation
D, E
Inductance
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques B
Flux Linkage
TB

Unlike the classical virtual work method, the plate is not actually rotated during the
numerical process of the torque computation. Instead, only the tetrahedra that lie along
the outside surface of the object are virtually distorted. W and its derivative, dW/d, are
calculated from a single field solution using finite element interpolation functions.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 718 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Flux Linkage (Electrostatic)
Modules and Solvers
Electrostatic Field Simula- To compute the electric flux linkage, the electrostatic field solver uses the following rela-
tion tionship:
Theory
Capacitance
= E dA
Capacitance in Terms of where E is the electric field and A is the area over which flux density is computed.
Charges and Voltages
Capacitance in Terms of In cartesian (XY) models, the area is found by sweeping the flux line youve drawn in
Currents and Time the xy-plane into the z direction forming a 3D surface. The electric flux value
Varying Voltages computed is the flux per meter depth in the z direction.
Computing Capacitance In axisymmetric (RZ) models, the area is found by rotating the flux line youve drawn in
Virtual Forces the rz-plane 360 degrees about the z axis. The electric flux computed is the total flux
Virtual Torques that passes through this surface.
Flux Linkage A separate flux linkage value is computed for each line you draw.
Magnetostatic Field Simula-
tion
Theory
Inductance
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 719 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Magnetostatic Field Simulation
Modules and Solvers
Electrostatic Field Simulation The magnetostatic field simulator lets you compute static magnetic fields arising from DC
Theory currents and other sources like permanent magnets and external magnetic fields. Mag-
Capacitance netic fields in both linear and nonlinear materials can be simulated.
Capacitance in Terms of
Charges and Voltages
Theory
Capacitance in Terms of The magnetostatic field simulator solves for the magnetic vector potential, Az(x,y) in this
Currents and Time field equation:
Varying Voltages
J z ( x, y ) = ----------- ( A z ( x, y ) )
Computing Capacitance 1
Virtual Forces r 0
Virtual Torques
where:
Flux Linkage
Magnetostatic Field Simu- Az(x,y) is the z component of the magnetic vector potential.
lation Jz(x,y) is the DC current density field flowing in the direction of transmission.
Theory r is the relative permeability of each material.
Inductance 0 is the permeability of free space.
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques Given Jz(x,y) as an excitation, the magnetostatic field simulator computes the magnetic
Flux Linkage vector potential at all points in space.

Note: In general, both J and A are vectors. However, J is assumed to only have a
z-component. A consequence of this is that A only has a z-component as
well. Both quantities can therefore be treated as scalars.

The equation that the magnetostatic field solver computes is derived from Amperes law,
which is:
H = J
B
Since H = ----------- , then:
Go Back r 0
----------- = J
B
r 0
Contents
Since B = A , then:
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 720 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes
----------- A = J
1
Modules and Solvers r 0
Electrostatic Field Simulation
Theory The magnetostatic field simulator solves this equation using the finite element method.
Capacitance
Capacitance in Terms of After Az(x,y) is computed, the magnetic flux density, B, and the magnetic field, H, can
Charges and Voltages then be computed using the relationships:
Capacitance in Terms of B = A
Currents and Time
Varying Voltages B
Computing Capacitance H = -----------
r 0
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques Both B and H lie in the xy cross-section being analyzed. An arrow plot of a B-field gener-
Flux Linkage ated by the magnetostatic field simulator is shown below:
Magnetostatic Field Simu-
lation
Theory
Inductance
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 721 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Inductance
Modules and Solvers
Electrostatic Field Simulation At the simplest level, inductance represents how much energy is stored in the magnetic
Theory field when current flows.
Capacitance 1 2
U m = --- Li
Capacitance in Terms of 2
Charges and Voltages where:
Capacitance in Terms of
Currents and Time Um is the energy stored in the magnetic field
Varying Voltages L is the inductance
Computing Capacitance i is the current flowing in the circuit
Virtual Forces The Maxwell 2D computes inductances associated with a structure by simulating the
Virtual Torques magnetic field that arises when various voltages and currents are applied. Then, by com-
Flux Linkage puting the energy stored in those fields, it can then compute the necessary inductances:
Magnetostatic Field Simu- 2U m
lation L = ----------
-
2
Theory i
Inductance
Virtual Forces To compute inductances using this method, the B-field and H-field associated with a dis-
Virtual Torques tribution of currents must first be computed. The magnetostatic field simulator, which
Flux Linkage computes the magnetic vector potential at all points in the problem region, performs this
task.

More

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 722 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Inductance in Terms of Flux Linkage and Currents
Modules and Solvers An inductance matrix represents the magnetic flux linkage between the current loops in a
Electrostatic Field Simulation system. Given the three current loops below, the relationship between induced flux and
Theory currents is as follows:
Capacitance
Capacitance in Terms 1 = L11 i1 + L12 i2 + L13 i3
of Charges and Volt- 2 = L12 i1 + L22 i2 + L23 i3
ages
Capacitance in Terms 3 = L13 i1 + L23 i2 + L33 i3
of Currents and Time
L12 L11 L13
Varying Voltages
Computing Capacitance
Virtual Forces i1 V1
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage L22 L23
Magnetostatic Field Simu-
lation i2 V2
Theory
Inductance L33
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques i3 V3

Flux Linkage

This can be expressed in matrix form as:

1 L 11 L 12 L 13 i 1
2 = L 12 L 22 L 23 i 2
More
3 L 13 L 23 L 33 i 3

Go Back The inductance matrix above gives the relationship between and i for the three indepen-
dent current loops. In a device with n current loops, this relationship would be expressed
by an nn inductance matrix. Inductance matrix values are specified in henries.
Contents
If one ampere is applied to Current Loop 1 and zero amperes are applied to the other two
loops, the inductance matrix becomes:
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 723 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes
Modules and Solvers 1 1 L 11
Electrostatic Field Simulation 2 = L 0 = L 12
Theory
Capacitance 3 0 L 13
Capacitance in Terms of
Charges and Voltages The diagonal terms in the matrix (such as L11) represent the self-inductance of each cur-
Capacitance in Terms of rent loop. Self-inductance is numerically equal to the flux linkage in a current loop when
Currents and Time one ampere is flowing in it, and no current is flowing in the other loops. For example, L11
Varying Voltages is equal to the flux in Current Loop 1 when one ampere is flowing in that current loop, and
Computing Capacitance no current is flowing in the other loops.
Virtual Forces The off-diagonal terms (such as L12, L13) represent the mutual inductances between the
Virtual Torques current loops. Mutual inductance is numerically equal to the flux linkage in a current loop
Flux Linkage when one ampere is flowing through another loop, and no current is flowing anywhere
Magnetostatic Field Simu- else. For example, L12 is equal to the flux linkage in Loop1 when one ampere is applied to
lation Loop 2 and no current is flowing in the other loops.
Theory
Inductance Note that the inductance matrix is symmetric about the diagonal. This indicates that the
Virtual Forces mutual effects between any two loops are identical. For instance, L13, the inductance
Virtual Torques between Current Loop 1 and Current Loop 3, is equal to the inductance between Current
Flux Linkage Loop 3 and Current Loop 1.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 724 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Inductance in Terms of Voltages and Time Varying Currents
Modules and Solvers An inductance matrix can also represent the relationship between voltage and current
Electrostatic Field Simulation fluctuations in a system. Given the three transmission lines shown below, the voltage
Theory changes caused by the time varying current source on each line are given by:
Capacitance
Capacitance in Terms of
V 1 L 11 L 12 L 13 ( di 1 ) ( dt )
Charges and Voltages
Capacitance in Terms of V 2 = L 12 L 22 L 23 ( di 2 ) ( dt )
Currents and Time V 3 L 13 L 23 L 33 ( di 3 ) ( dt )
Varying Voltages
Computing Capacitance
Virtual Forces Line 1
V1
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage di 1 RL
Magnetostatic Field Simu- dt Line 2
lation V2
Theory di 2
RL
Inductance dt Line 3
Virtual Forces V3
Virtual Torques di 3
Flux Linkage RL
dt

The inductance matrix above gives the relationship between V and di/dt for the three
independent transmission lines.
If di2/dt and di3/dt are set to zero, this relationship becomes
More
V 1 ( di 1 ) ( dt ) L 11
V 2 = L 0 = L 12 ( di 1 ) ( dt )
Go Back V 3 0 L 13

Contents This gives the voltage changes that are induced on Lines 2 and 3 when a time-varying
current source is applied to Line 1 that is, the inductive coupling between all the loops.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 725 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Computing an Inductance Matrix
Modules and Solvers To compute an inductance matrix, the software performs a sequence of magnetostatic
Electrostatic Field Simulation field simulations. In each field simulation, one ampere is allowed to flow in a single con-
Theory ductor. The current returns as defined under Setup Executive Parameters either in
Capacitance the conductor you identified as the return path, or along outside balloon, value (Dirichlet)
Capacitance in Terms of or odd symmetry boundaries. No current flows in any other conductor.
Charges and Voltages
Capacitance in Terms of For an n-conductor system, n field simulations are automatically performed. The energy
Currents and Time stored in the magnetic field that couples two conductors is:
Varying Voltages 1 2 1
Computing Capacitance U ij = --- LI = --- B i H j d
2 2
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques where:
Flux Linkage
Magnetostatic Field Simu- Uij is the energy stored in the magnetic field linking conductor i with conductor j.
lation I is the current in conductor i.
Theory Bi is the magnetic flux density where one ampere is allowed to flow through conductor
Inductance i.
Virtual Forces Hj is the magnetic field where one ampere is allowed to flow through conductor j.
Virtual Torques The inductance coupling conductors i and j is therefore:
Flux Linkage
2U ij
L ij = ----------
I
2
= Bi H j d

For multiturn conductors, the net value of inductance is the value given by:

2
L net = N L matrix

where N is the number of turns in the coil.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 726 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Virtual Forces (Magnetostatic)
Modules and Solvers
Electrostatic Field Simulation To compute the force on an object, the system uses the principle of virtual work. In the
Theory structure shown below, the force on the plate in the direction of the displacement, s, is
Capacitance given by the following relationship:
Capacitance in Terms of dW ( s, i )
( 0 B dH ) dV
H
Charges and Voltages F plate = --------------------- =
ds i = const
s
Capacitance in Terms of V
Currents and Time
Varying Voltages where W(s,i) is the magnetic coenergy of the system. The current, i, is held constant.
Computing Capacitance i
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage
Magnetostatic Field Simu-
lation
Theory
Inductance FPlate
Core
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques s
Flux Linkage Plate

Unlike the classical virtual work method, the plate is not actually moved during the force
computation. Instead, only the tetrahedra that lie along the outside surface of the object
are virtually distorted. Thus, the force computation only requires one field solution.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 727 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Virtual Torques (Magnetostatic)
Modules and Solvers
Electrostatic Field Simulation Similar to the virtual force calculation, the system uses virtual work principles to compute
Theory the torque on an object. In the structure shown below, the torque on Object B about the
Capacitance axis of rotation is given by the following relationship:
Capacitance in Terms of dW ( , i )
[ V ( 0 B dH )dV ]
H
Charges and Voltages T B = --------------------- =
d i = const

Capacitance in Terms of
Currents and Time
Varying Voltages where W(, i) is the magnetic coenergy of the system. The current, i, is held constant.
Computing Capacitance
Virtual Forces i Object A
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage
Magnetostatic Field Simu- Axis of rotation
lation
Theory TB
Inductance Object B

Virtual Forces i
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage

Unlike the classical virtual work method, Object B is not actually rotated during the force
computation. Instead, only the tetrahedra that lie along the outside surface of the object
are virtually distorted. Thus, the change in the systems coenergy (and therefore the vir-
tual torque) is given by the change in the coenergy of these tetrahedra.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 728 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Technical Notes Flux Linkage (Magnetostatic)
Modules and Solvers
Electrostatic Field Simulation To compute the magnetic flux linkage, the magnetostatic field solver uses the following
Theory relationship:
Capacitance
Capacitance in Terms of
= B dA
Charges and Voltages where B is the magnetic flux density and A is the area over which flux density is com-
Capacitance in Terms of puted.
Currents and Time
Varying Voltages
In cartesian (XY) models, the area is found by sweeping the flux line youve drawn in
the xy-plane into the z direction forming a 3D surface. The magnetic flux value
Computing Capacitance
computed is the flux per meter depth in the z direction.
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
In axisymmetric (RZ) models, the area is found by revolving the flux line youve drawn
in the rz-plane 360 degrees around the z-axis forming a 3D surface. The magnetic
Flux Linkage
flux value computed is the total flux that passes through this surface.
Magnetostatic Field Simu-
lation A separate flux linkage value is computed for each line you draw.
Theory
Inductance
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
Flux Linkage

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 729 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Eddy Current Field Simulation
tion
Theory The eddy current field simulator allows you to simulate the effects of time-varying currents
Deriving the Eddy Current in parallel-conductor structures including eddy current effects in conductors.
Equation
Eddy Currents and Skin
Theory
Depth Time-varying currents flowing in a conductor produce a time-varying magnetic field in
Impedance Matrix planes perpendicular to the conductor. In turn, this magnetic field induces eddy currents
Virtual Forces in the source conductor and in any other conductor parallel to it. The eddy current field
Virtual Torques solver calculates the eddy currents by solving for A and in the field equation:
Current Flow
Nonlinear Eddy Current 1
--- ( A ) = ( + j ) ( jA )
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Simula-
tion where:
Theory A is the magnetic vector potential.
Conductance
is the electric scalar potential.
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
is the relative magnetic permeability.
tion)
is the angular frequency at which all quantities are oscillating.
is the conductivity.
is the relative permittivity.

Note: The eddy current equation is derived from Maxwells equations. Phasor nota-
tion is used to represent complex quantities.

A plot of flux lines produced by eddy currents that were computed in a structure by the
More

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 730 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- eddy current solver is shown below:
tion
Flux Lines
Theory 1.7705e+00
1.4165e+00
Deriving the Eddy Current 1.0624e+00
7.0839e-01
3.5434e-01
Equation 2.8822e-04
-3.5376e-01
-7.0782e-01
Eddy Currents and Skin -1.0619e+00
-1.4159e+00
-1.7700e+00
Depth
Impedance Matrix
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
Current Flow
Nonlinear Eddy Current
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Simula-
tion
Theory
Conductance
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
tion)
Components of Current Density
Notice that the right side of the equation:
1
--- ( A ) = ( + j ) ( jA )

consists of a complex conductivity multiplied by the complex value of E ( jA ) . It is

therefore equal to the complex current density, J, which has three components:
Js, the source current density due to differences in electric potential, .
Je, the induced eddy current density due to time-varying magnetic fields, - jA.
Go Back Jd, the displacement current density (time-varying electric fields), j ( jA ) .
The total current density is the sum of these three components. The j term in the eddy
Contents and displacement components indicate that they are a function of frequency and become
increasingly significant as the frequency increases.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 731 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Integrating the Current Density
tion When setting up a problem, you specify the total current flowing in any conductor that is
Theory connected to an external source. Therefore, the eddy current module is able to make use
Deriving the Eddy Current of a second equation:
Equation
1
Eddy Currents and Skin I T = --- ( + j ) ( jA ) d
Depth

Impedance Matrix
Virtual Forces which simply reflects the fact the total current in a conductor equals the integral of the cur-
Virtual Torques rent density over the cross-section of the conductor.
Current Flow
Assumptions
Nonlinear Eddy Current
Field Simulation The eddy current field solver makes the following assumptions about the field quantities
DC Conduction Field Simula- for which it solves:
tion
Theory
Time-varying electromagnetic quantities are assumed to have the periodic waveform:
Conductance F ( t ) = F m cos ( t + )
Current Flow (DC Conduc- All quantities must have the same value of , but can have different phase angles ().
tion) If a current is not a pure sinusoid, decompose it into sinusoidal harmonics, and solve
separately at each frequency.
All currents (source, eddy, and displacement) are assumed to flow perpendicular to
the plane being studied (that is, in the z-direction). Therefore, the magnetic fields
associated with these currents lie within the xy-plane. As a result, A, the magnetic
vector potential, has a z-component only.
Because no currents flow in the xy-plane, the electric field, E, has a z-component only.
It follows that is constant over the cross section of each conductor in the problem.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 732 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Deriving the Eddy Current Equation
tion
Theory The eddy current field solver uses the finite element method to compute A and using
Deriving the Eddy Cur- these two relationships:
rent Equation 1
Eddy Currents and Skin ----- ( A ) = ( + j ) ( jA )
r
Depth
Impedance Matrix 1
Virtual Forces
IT = --- ( + j ) ( jA ) d

Virtual Torques
Current Flow where:
Nonlinear Eddy Current
Field Simulation
A is the magnetic vector potential.
is the electric scalar potential.
DC Conduction Field Simula-
tion is the magnetic permeability.
Theory is the angular frequency at which all quantities are oscillating.
Conductance is the conductivity.
Current Flow (DC Conduc- is the permittivity.
tion) IT is the total current flowing in conductors.
The following section shows how these equations are derived from Maxwells equations.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 733 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Maxwells Equations
tion The eddy current field simulator solves for time harmonic electromagnetic fields governed
Theory by Maxwells equations:
Deriving the Eddy Cur-
rent Equation D
H = J +
Eddy Currents and Skin t
Depth
B
Impedance Matrix E = -------
Virtual Forces t
Virtual Torques
D =
Current Flow
Nonlinear Eddy Current B = 0
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Simula- where:
tion E is the electric field.
Theory D is the electric displacement, E.
Conductance B is the magnetic flux density.
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
H is the magnetic field intensity, B.
tion)
J is the current density, E.
is the charge density.
The eddy current solver assumes that all time-varying electromagnetic quantities in the
problem have the form:
F ( t ) = F m cos ( t + )

Using Eulers formula:

j
More e = cos + j sin

If = t+, F(t) equals the real portion of ej(t+):

Go Back F(t ) = [Fme
j ( t + )
] = [ F m ( cos ( t + ) + j sin ( t + ) ) ] = F m cos ( t + )
D B
Contents Now, because each time-varying quantity has the form F m e j e jt ,
t
and
t
are equal
to jD and jB.
Index Therefore, with this simplification and the relations H=B, D=E, and J=E, Maxwells

Maxwell Online Help System 734 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- equations reduce to:
tion 1
--- B = ( E + jE )
Theory
Deriving the Eddy Cur- E = jB
rent Equation
Eddy Currents and Skin E =
Depth
B = 0
Impedance Matrix
Virtual Forces Relationship of Magnetic and Electric Field
Virtual Torques
The quantity that the eddy current field simulator actually solves for is A, the magnetic
Current Flow
vector potential. It is given by:
Nonlinear Eddy Current
Field Simulation A = B
DC Conduction Field Simula- Substituting this into the first of Maxwells equations, the result is:
tion
1
Theory --- ( A ) = ( E + jE )
Conductance
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
tion) A solution for E in terms of A is given by:
E = jA

where is the electric potential. Substituting the right side of this relationship for E into the
previous equation results in:

1
--- ( A ) = ( jA ) ( + j )

This equation is one of the two used by the eddy current solver to compute A and .

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 735 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Relationship of Current and Current Density
tion Notice that the previous equation is in the form of a complex conductivity, (+j), times
Theory the complex value of E. The result is the complex current density, J. Therefore, the inte-
Deriving the Eddy Cur- gral of this expression over the cross-section of a conductor is constrained to equal the
rent Equation total current that is specified as flowing in that conductor:
Eddy Currents and Skin
1
Depth I T = J d = --- ( + j ) ( jA ) d

Impedance Matrix
Virtual Forces
This is the second equation that the eddy current solver uses in computing A and .
Virtual Torques
Current Flow The total current, It, in this equation is the quantity you specify when setting up a problem.
Nonlinear Eddy Current It is the total current flowing in a conductor, and includes:
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Simula-
Is, the current from an external source, --1- d .

tion
Theory 1
Ie, the induced eddy current, --- jA d .
Conductance

Current Flow (DC Conduc-
tion) 1
Id, the displacement current, --- j ( jA ) d .

For problems solved by the eddy current solver, B is assumed to lie in the xy plane.
Therefore, A can only have a component in the z-direction. The simulator does not have
to solve for the x and y components of A. Since E only has a z-component, is a constant
for each cross section of a conductor. Therefore, Maxwell does not have to solve for at
every node.
For a more detailed discussion of eddy current and skin effect problems in multiconductor
systems, see:
Go Back J. Weiss, Z. Cendes. A One-Step Finite Element Method for Multiconductor Skin
Effect Problems, IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-
101, No. 10 October 1982.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 736 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Eddy Currents and Skin Depth
tion
Theory Induced currents allow magnetic fields to penetrate conductors only to a certain depth,
Deriving the Eddy Current which is approximated by the formula:
Equation 2
Eddy Currents and Skin = -------------------- (in meters)
0 r
Depth
Impedance Matrix where:
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques is the angular frequency, which is equal to 2f. (f is the frequency at which source
Current Flow currents and voltages oscillate during the solution.)
Nonlinear Eddy Current is the conductors conductivity, in siemens/meter.
Field Simulation r is the conductors relative permeability, in amperes/meter.
DC Conduction Field Simula- 0 is the permeability of free space, which is equal to 4 x 10-7 A/m.
tion
Currents will be concentrated near the surface of the conductor, decaying rapidly past the
Theory
skin depth. As the formula above indicates, the skin depth gets smaller as the frequency
Conductance
increases.
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
tion)

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 737 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Impedance Matrix
tion
Theory An impedance matrix summarizes the relationship between AC voltages and AC currents
Deriving the Eddy Current in multi-conductor systems. Given the two current loops below, the relationships between
Equation voltages and currents in each loop is as follows:
Eddy Currents and Skin V 1 = I 1 R 11 + I 2 R 12 + I 1 jL 11 + I 2 jL 12
Depth
Impedance Matrix V 2 = I 2 R 22 + I 1 R 12 + I 2 jL 22 + I 1 jL 12
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques I1 R11 L11
Current Flow
Nonlinear Eddy Current
Loop 1 + V1 -
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Simula-
tion
Theory L12
R12
Conductance L22
I2 R22
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
tion)
+ V2 -
Loop 2

This can be expressed in matrix form as:

V 1 Z 11 Z 12 I 1
=
V 2 Z 12 Z 22 I 2
More
where:
Vi and Ii are phasors.
Go Back Z11 = R11 + jL11 (the self-impedance of Loop 1).
Z12 = R12 + jL12 (the mutual impedance between Loops 1 and 2).
Contents Z22 = R22 + jL22 (the self-impedance of Loop 2).
The impedance matrix above gives the relationship between V and I for the two current
Index loops. In a device with n current loops, this relationship would be expressed by an n x n

Maxwell Online Help System 738 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- impedance matrix. The matrix values displayed by the software are resistance and induc-
tion tance (not resistance and reactance) and therefore do not include j.
Theory
Deriving the Eddy Current Note: All impedances are complex numbers in the form:
Equation Z = R + jL
Eddy Currents and Skin
Depth where:
Impedance Matrix is equal to 2f, where f is the frequency of the AC current source.
Virtual Forces R is the AC resistance, given in ohms/meter (XY) or ohms (RZ).
Virtual Torques L is the AC inductance, given in henries/meter (XY) or henries (RZ).
Current Flow
Nonlinear Eddy Current Computing an Impedance Matrix
Field Simulation Maxwell 2D breaks down the impedance matrix computation into two parts. First, it solves
DC Conduction Field Simula- for the inductance matrix (L-matrix) associated with the model. It then solves for the resis-
tion tance matrix (R-matrix). When it finishes solving for these matrices, the simulator com-
Theory bines them to form the impedance matrix, using the relationship Zi=Ri+jLi.
Conductance
Current Flow (DC Conduc- To compute the inductance and resistance matrices for the impedance solution, the simu-
tion) lator generates an eddy-current field solution for each conductor in the matrix. In the first
solution, the current in the first conductor is set to one ampere; currents in the other con-
ductors are set to zero. This is done by imposing current sources on the conductors. In
the second solution, the current in the second conductor is set to one ampere and all
other conductors are set to zero amperes, and so forth. Objects that are not included in
the impedance matrix are not affected.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 739 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Inductance
tion To compute the inductance of the current loop, the simulator calculates the average
Theory energy, UAV, of the system after a field solution is computed:
Deriving the Eddy Current 1
Equation U AV = --- B H dV
4
Eddy Currents and Skin V
Depth
Since the instantaneous energy of the system is equal to:
Impedance Matrix
Virtual Forces 1 2
U Inst = --- Li
Virtual Torques 2
Current Flow where the instantaneous value of the current is related to the peak value of the current by
Nonlinear Eddy Current i = IPeakcos(t+). The average value for the energy can then be found by integrating the
Field Simulation instantaneous energy:
2
DC Conduction Field Simula-
= ------ 0 U Inst dt = --- ------ I Peak [ cos ( t + ) ] dt
1 2 L 1 2 2
tion U AV
2 2 2
Theory 0
Conductance From this, the average energy of the system is equal to:
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
L I Peak 2
U AV = --- I RMS = --- ------------ = --- I Peak
tion) L 2 L 2
2 2 2 4

The inductance, therefore is:

4U AV
L = -------------
2
-
I Peak

The software assumes that the object for which impedance is being computed has a peak
current of one ampere per coil turn flowing through it. Thus, the inductance is simply
4UAV.
Note that the inductance computed for an eddy current model does not necessarily equal
Go Back the inductance computed for an equivalent magnetostatic model. The eddy current simu-
lator partially includes the eddy effect in conductors when it computes inductance during
Contents an impedance solution.

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 740 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Resistance
tion To compute the resistance, the simulator calculates the ohmic loss, P, after a
Theory field solution has been computed:
Deriving the Eddy Current
1
Equation P = ------ J J dV
Eddy Currents and Skin 2
V
Depth
The ohmic loss is related to the resistance by:
Impedance Matrix
2
Virtual Forces P = RI RMS
Virtual Torques
Current Flow The resistance is therefore:
Nonlinear Eddy Current
Field Simulation P 2P
R = -----------
2
= -----------
2
-
DC Conduction Field Simula- I RMS I Peak
tion
Theory The system assumes that the object for which impedance is being computed has a peak
Conductance current of one ampere per coil turn flowing through it. Therefore, the resistance is simply
Current Flow (DC Conduc- 2P.
tion)
Note that the resistance for an eddy current problem will be higher than the equivalent DC
resistance, due to the skin concentration of currents.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 741 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Inductance and Resistance in Impedance Computations
tion The inductances and resistances computed during an impedance matrix solution are dif-
Theory ferent from those computed for the equivalent DC case. This figure shows how they differ:
Deriving the Eddy Current
Equation DC AC
Eddy Currents and Skin
Skin
Depth depth
Impedance Matrix
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
Current Flow
Nonlinear Eddy Current J J
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Simula-
tion
Theory
R R
Conductance
J is uniformly distributed J is concentrated near the
Current Flow (DC Conduc- throughout the conductor. surface and decays
tion) exponentially towards the
center.

The current density, J, in the DC case (the conductor on the left) is evenly distributed
throughout the cross-section of the conductor. The current density in the AC case (the
conductor on the right) is distributed close to the surface due to skin concentration of cur-
rents. Since the area through which current can flow is smaller, it follows that the resis-
tance to the current flow is higher in the impedance matrix than in a resistance matrix
computed for the equivalent DC case.
In the DC example, no eddy currents occur. The magnetic field created by the current
flowing through the conductor is static. In the AC example, the oscillating magnetic field
induces currents in conductors in the model. These induced currents affect the computa-
Go Back tion of inductance for the impedance matrix, causing it to be slightly different from the
equivalent DC computation of inductance.
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 742 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Virtual Forces (Eddy Current)
tion
Theory Virtual force in an eddy current problem is computed the same way as virtual force in a
Deriving the Eddy Current magnetostatic problem. The only difference is that the average value of force over time is
Equation computed not the instantaneous force at a given time.
Eddy Currents and Skin The difference between the time-averaged (or DC) force, AC force, and instantaneous
Depth force is shown below:
Impedance Matrix
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
Current Flow
Nonlinear Eddy Current
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Simula-
tion
Theory
Conductance
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
tion)

Force oscillates at twice the frequency of the source current and magnetic field:
1
f F = ------ = 2 f S
TF

where:
More
fF is the frequency of the force.
fS is the frequency of the source current and magnetic field.
Go Back TF is the period of the force.
The time-averaged (or DC) force, AC force, and instantaneous force can be determined
Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 743 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- by:
tion 1
Theory F DC = --- Re J B* dV
2
Deriving the Eddy Current
Equation 1
Eddy Currents and Skin F AC = --- Re J B dV
2
Depth
Impedance Matrix F INST = F DC + F AC
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques The AC force, FAC must be evaluated at a particular phase (=t) in order to determine its
Current Flow magnitude at an instant in time. However, the peak value of the AC force is reported as
Nonlinear Eddy Current the AC Fluctuation in the force and torque solution panel for Maxwell 2D.
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Simula-
tion
Theory
Conductance
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
tion)

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 744 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Virtual Torques (Eddy Current)
tion
Theory Virtual torque in an eddy current problem is computed the same way as virtual torque in a
Deriving the Eddy Current magnetostatic problem. The only difference is that the average value of the torque over
Equation time is computed, not the net torque at a given time.
Eddy Currents and Skin Current Flow (Eddy Current)
Depth
Impedance Matrix To compute the current flow, the eddy current field solver uses the following relationship:
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
I = J dA
Current Flow where:
Nonlinear Eddy Current
Field Simulation I is the current.
DC Conduction Field Simula- J is the current density, given by:
tion J = ( + j r ) ( jA )
Theory
Conductance
A is the area over which the current flow is computed.
Current Flow (DC Conduc- In cartesian (XY) models, the area is found by sweeping the current flow line
tion) youve drawn in the xy-plane into the z direction forming a 3D surface. The
current flow computed is the current per meter depth in the z-direction.
In axisymmetric (RZ) models, the area is found by revolving the flux line youve
drawn in the rz-plane 360 degrees around the z-axis, forming a 3D surface. The
current flow computed is the total current that passes through this surface.
A separate current flow value is computed for each line you draw.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 745 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Nonlinear Eddy Current Field Simulation
tion
Theory The eddy current solver for problems with nonlinear materials allows you to analyze the
Deriving the Eddy Current fundamental components of B and H at a specified frequency.
Equation Theory
Eddy Currents and Skin
Depth Unlike linear problems in which the energy is assumed to be based on the sinusoidal
Impedance Matrix complex peak field values in a steady state, nonlinear problems are usually based on all
Virtual Forces harmonic components of the fields.
Virtual Torques That is to say for nonlinear problems, though the current is sinusoidal at its input, the
Current Flow resulting fields are harmonically rich. Although the B- and H-fields are not sinusoidal at
Nonlinear Eddy Current output, the Maxwell 2D Eddy Current Solver assumes that the fundamental components
Field Simulation of B and H are sufficient for describing BH-curve and the associated field behavior.
DC Conduction Field Simula-
tion Sinusoidal B
Theory Assuming both that B is sinusoidal with time, t, and that the value of H is derived from the
Conductance original BH-curve, introduce a new value He to represent the effective magnetic field.
Current Flow (DC Conduc- Using the average energy equation to define the time averaged coenergy density:
tion) T
---
4 H (t)
4
w co ( t ) = ---
t
B d H dt
T
0 H (0)

and the simple energy method in which:

B e = eff H

More where:
t
4 w co ( t )
eff = -------------------------
2
-
Go Back H

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 746 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- then:
tion
T T
Theory 4 --- 4 ---
Deriving the Eddy Current --- 4 H e sin ( t )B m sin ( t ) dt = --- 4 ( H B ) dt
T 0 T 0
Equation
Eddy Currents and Skin and:
Depth
Impedance Matrix 2
T = ------
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
Current Flow or:
Nonlinear Eddy Current

Field Simulation --- ---
0 H e Bm sin ( t ) 0 ( H B ) dt
2 2 2
DC Conduction Field Simula- dt =
tion
Theory Allowing =t and extracting He, simplifying yields:
Conductance
--- ---
H e B m ------------------------- d =
Current Flow (DC Conduc- 2 1
cos 2
0 ( H B ) d
2
tion) 0 2

or:
n
4 --2- ( H B ) 4 i + 1 ( H B)
H e = --- ----------------- d = --- ----------------- d i
0 Bm i Bm
i=1

where:

More Bm relates to 2/.

i=arcsin (Bi/Bm)
Now define the function f(i) to be represented by:
Go Back
H i Bi
f ( i ) = ----------
-
Contents Bm

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 747 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- He equates to:
tion
Theory 2
n
i + i + 1
H e = ------ f ( i ) + 4 f ----------------------- + f ( i + 1 )
Deriving the Eddy Current 3 2
Equation i=1
Eddy Currents and Skin
Depth which represents the effective H for the BH-curve.
Impedance Matrix
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
Current Flow
Nonlinear Eddy Current
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Simula-
tion
Theory
Conductance
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
tion)

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 748 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Sinusoidal H
tion Assuming both that H is sinusoidal with time, t, and that the value of B is derived from the
Theory original BH-curve, introduce a new value Be to represent the effective magnetic flux den-
Deriving the Eddy Current sity.
Equation
Eddy Currents and Skin Using the simple energy method equation and following the previous assumptions:
Depth
T T
Impedance Matrix --- ---
0 Be sin ( t )H B sin ( t ) dt 0 ( H B ) dt
4 4
Virtual Forces =
Virtual Torques
Current Flow and allowing =t, extracting Be and simplifying yields:
Nonlinear Eddy Current
Field Simulation --- ---
B e H B ------------------------- d =
2 1
cos 2
0 ( H B ) d
2
DC Conduction Field Simula- 0 2
tion
Theory Now define the function f(i) to be represented by:
Conductance
Current Flow (DC Conduc- H i Bi
f ( i ) = ----------
-
tion) Bm

Solving for Be yields:

n
4 --2- 4 i + 1 ( H B)
B e = ----------- ( H B ) d = --- ----------------- d i
H B 0 i HB
i=1

or:

n
i + i + 1
B e = ------ f ( i ) + f ----------------------- + f ( i + 1 )
2
3 2
Go Back i=1

which represents the effective B for the BH-curve.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 749 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Permeability
tion Nonlinear eddy current problems calculate the permeability based on the following equa-
Theory tions:
Deriving the Eddy Current
Equation
Eddy Currents and Skin B
eff = ------e
Depth He
Impedance Matrix
Virtual Forces where:
Virtual Torques Be is the effective value of B in the BH-curve.
Current Flow
Nonlinear Eddy Current
He is the effective value of H in the BH-curve.
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Simula-
tion
Theory
Conductance
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
tion)

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 750 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- DC Conduction Field Simulation
tion
Theory The DC conduction field simulator allows you to analyze conduction currents due to static
Deriving the Eddy Current electric fields in conductors and lossy dielectrics.
Equation
Eddy Currents and Skin
Theory
Depth When a material with a non-zero conductivity is subject to a potential difference, conduc-
Impedance Matrix tion current flows in the material. At all points in the problem space, the current density (J)
Virtual Forces will be proportional to the electric field (E) that is established due to the potential differ-
Virtual Torques ence.
Current Flow J ( x, y ) = E ( x, y ) = ( x, y )
Nonlinear Eddy Current
Field Simulation where:
DC Conduction Field Simu-
lation J(x,y) is the current density.
Theory E(x,y) is the electric field.
Conductance is the conductivity of the material in MKS units (mhos/meter).
Current Flow (DC Conduc- (x,y) is the electric potential.
tion)
The equation that the DC conduction field simulator solves is based on the fact that, under
steady state conditions, the amount of charge, , leaving any infinitesimally small region
must equal the charge flowing into that region.

J = = 0
t
The field quantity that DC conduction actually solves for is the electric potential, , in the
following equation:
More ( ) = 0

Note that = J and therefore these two equations are equivalent.

Go Back
A plot of electric potential that was computed by the DC conduction solver is shown

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 751 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- below:
tion
Theory
Deriving the Eddy Current
Equation
Eddy Currents and Skin
Depth
Impedance Matrix
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques
Current Flow
Nonlinear Eddy Current
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Sim-
ulation
Theory
Conductance
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
tion)

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 752 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Steady-state Conditions
tion The DC conduction solver assumes that current flow in the conducting material has
Theory already reached steady state conditions. The implication of this assumption becomes
Deriving the Eddy Current clear when you compare the initial and steady state conditions of a simple problem such
Equation as that shown here:
Eddy Currents and Skin
Depth
Impedance Matrix
Virtual Forces
Virtual Torques 1, 1
Current Flow V
Nonlinear Eddy Current
2, 2
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Simu-
lation
Theory
Conductance t=0 t >> 0
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
tion) E1
E1

E2 E2

E2 = (1/2) E1 E2 = (1/2) E1
Equipotential contours of Equipotential contours of
before current starts to flow after current in the
in the dielectric. dielectric reaches steady
More state.

First, consider the interval before steady state is reached. Assume that the switch estab-
Go Back lishing the potential across the parallel plates in the figure above closes at t=0. Also
assume that the current required to deposit charges on the parallel plates (so that the
voltage difference can be supported) occurs instantaneously.
Contents
However, it will take a while for current to start flowing in the dielectric. The time it takes
for current to flow is determined by the time constant of the material. Therefore, at t=0,
Index there will be an electric field in the dielectric, but no current and no free charges. Conse-

Maxwell Online Help System 753 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- quently, the relationship that must be satisfied at the interface of the two dielectrics is:
tion D =
Theory
Deriving the Eddy Current or, equivalently:
Equation E =
Eddy Currents and Skin
At the interface between the two dielectrics, this relationship implies that:
Depth
2
Impedance Matrix 1 E n1 = 2 E n2 E n1 = ----- E n2
Virtual Forces 1
Virtual Torques
where En is the normal component of E. Therefore, at t=0, before current starts to flow in
Current Flow
the two dielectrics, (x,y) is determined entirely by the permittivity of the dielectrics. Use
Nonlinear Eddy Current
the electrostatic field solver to solve for (x,y) in such a case.
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Sim- After current starts to flow in the dielectric and steady state is reached, free charges are
ulation able to accumulate at the boundaries of the two dielectrics. The free charge, , is no
Theory longer zero.
Conductance
The relationship that must be satisfied now is: J = = 0
Current Flow (DC Conduc- t
tion) or, equivalently, E = 0
This relationship implies that:
2
1 E n1 = 2 E n2 E n1 = ------ E n2
1

In this case, the solution depends on the conductivity () of the materials rather than on
their dielectric constant (). The DC conduction solver analyzes the steady state condi-
tion. Therefore, use the DC conduction field solver when steady state conditions have
been reached.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 754 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Relevant Time Constant
tion The time constant that determines how long it will take the current flowing in the conduc-
Theory tive material to reach steady state is given by =/. In a good conductor such as steel
Deriving the Eddy Current (=9x10-12, =1x107), = 9x10-19 seconds. Steady state conditions are reached almost
Equation instantaneously and you should use the DC conduction solver to analyze the potential
Eddy Currents and Skin field.
Depth
Impedance Matrix On the other hand, for a good dielectric such as fused quartz (=1x10-17), the time con-
Virtual Forces stant is on the order of 105 seconds. There will be a significant period before steady state
Virtual Torques currents start to flow and you should use the electrostatic solver to analyze the field. For
Current Flow many materials in between, a complete analysis may require both an electrostatic and a
Nonlinear Eddy Current DC conduction solution.
Field Simulation
DC Conduction Field Sim-
ulation
Theory
Conductance
Current Flow (DC Conduc-
tion)

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 755 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Conductance
tion
Theory A conductance matrix gives the relationship between currents and voltage drops. In the
Deriving the Eddy Current figure below, two conductors at voltages V1 and V2 are touching a bar with a conduc-
Equation tance, G.
Eddy Currents and Skin
Depth V1
Impedance Matrix Conduction
Virtual Forces Current
Virtual Torques
Current Flow
Nonlinear Eddy Current
Field Simulation y
DC Conduction Field Sim-
ulation V2 z
Theory x
Conductance
Current Flow (DC Conduc- Because the bar is not a perfect insulator, charge will flow between the two conductors
tion) and cause conduction currents. Given the conductors shown on the previous page, the
relationship between the conduction current and the voltage drop, V, in each conductor is:
I = GV
where:
I is the conduction current.
G is the conductance, measured in mhos.
V is the voltage drop given by V1-V2.
Conductance, as evident from the equation, is the inverse of resistance. Therefore, if a
material has a large conductance, it will be a better conductor, and if it has a low conduc-
tance, it will be a better resistor.
Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 756 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
Eddy Current Field Simula- Current Flow (DC Conduction)
tion
Theory To compute current flow, the DC conduction field solver uses the following relationship:
Deriving the Eddy Current
Equation
I = J dA
Eddy Currents and Skin where:
Depth
Impedance Matrix I is the current.
Virtual Forces J is the current density, given by: J = E =
Virtual Torques A is the area over which the current flow is computed.
Current Flow In cartesian (XY) models, the area is found by sweeping the current flow line
Nonlinear Eddy Current youve drawn in the xy-plane into the z direction forming a 3D surface. The
Field Simulation current flow computed is the current per meter depth in the z direction.
DC Conduction Field Sim- In axisymmetric (RZ) models, the area is found by revolving the flux line youve
ulation drawn in the rz-plane 360 degrees around the z-axis, forming a 3D surface. The
Theory current flow computed is the total current that passes through this surface.
Conductance
Current Flow (DC Con- A separate current flow value is computed for each line you draw.
duction)

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 757 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simu- AC Conduction Field Simulation
lation
Theory The AC conduction field solver allows you to analyze conduction currents caused by time-
Admittance varying electric fields in conductors and lossy dielectrics.
Current Flow
Eddy Axial Field Simulation
Theory
Theory The AC conduction field simulator solves for in the following equation:
Deriving the Eddy Axial [ E + j ( x, y ) ] = 0
Field Equation
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) where:
Axisymmetric Field Simula- (x,y) is the magnitude and phase of the electric potential at each value of x and y.
tion is the angular frequency at which the potential is oscillating.
Transient Simulation is the conductivity.
Assumptions
is the permittivity.
Time-Dependent Magnetic
Field Simulation This equation can be expanded to:
Phasor Notation ( J + jD ) = 0
Real and Imaginary Com-
ponents where:
J is the current density, E.
D is the electric flux density, E.
E is the electric field, -.
Complex quantities are represented using phasor notation.
Assumptions
The AC conduction field solver assumes the following conditions about field quantities:
All time-varying electromagnetic quantities have the periodic waveform:
F ( t ) = F m cos ( t + )
Go Back where all quantities must have the same value of , but can have different phase
angles ().
Contents If a current is not a pure sinusoid, it is decompose into sinusoidal harmonics, and
solved separately at each frequency.
The component of E due to time-varying magnetic fields caused by conduction
Index currents can be neglected.

Maxwell Online Help System 758 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simu- Admittance
lation
Theory Admittance can best be explained as the inverse of impedance, and is expressed by:
Admittance Y = G jC
Current Flow
Eddy Axial Field Simulation where:
Theory is equal to 2f, where f is the frequency of the AC voltage source.
Deriving the Eddy Axial Y is the admittance in mhos/meter.
Field Equation G is the conductance in mhos/meter.
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) jC is the susceptance in mhos/meter.
Axisymmetric Field Simula-
tion
Transient Simulation
Note: The matrix values displayed by the software are conductance in mhos/meter
and capacitance in farads/meter (not conductance and susceptance) and
Assumptions therefore do not include j.
Time-Dependent Magnetic
Field Simulation Current Flow
Phasor Notation
Real and Imaginary Com- To compute current flow, the AC conduction field solver uses the following relationship:
ponents I = J dA
where:
I is the current.
J is the current density, given by J = E.
A is the area over which the current flow is computed. It is found by sweeping the
current flow line youve drawn in the xy-plane into the z direction, forming a surface.
The current flow computed is the current per meter depth in the z direction.
A separate current flow value is computed for each line you draw.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 759 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Eddy Axial Field Simulation
tion
Theory The eddy axial field simulator allows you to analyze axial eddy currents in devices subject
Admittance to time-varying magnetic fields.
Current Flow
Eddy Axial Field Simula-
Theory
tion When a conducting material is placed in a time-varying magnetic field, eddy currents are
Theory induced in the material. The currents circulate in the plane perpendicular to the magnetic
Deriving the Eddy Axial field.
Field Equation
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) Given sources of H in the form of boundary conditions, the eddy axial field solver uses
Axisymmetric Field Simula- the finite element method to calculate H by solving this equation:
tion
------------------- H + jH = 0
1
Transient Simulation + j
Assumptions
Time-Dependent Magnetic where:
Field Simulation
Phasor Notation
H is the magnetic field intensity.
Real and Imaginary Com- is the angular frequency at which all quantities are oscillating.
ponents is permeability.
is conductivity.
is permittivity.
This equation is derived from Maxwells equations. Complex quantities are represented
using phasor notation.
Once the solution for H at all points is obtained, induced currents are obtained by solving
for E and jE in the following relationship:
More H = J + jE = E + jE = J c + J d

where:
Go Back
Jc is the conduction current, E.
Jd is the displacement current, jE.
Contents
Note that the eddy axial field solver assumes that there is no applied potential () in the

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 760 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- problem. Therefore, the conduction current, which is usually given by:
tion J c = E = ( jA ) = jA = J Eddy + J Source
Theory
Admittance has no source component of current (-). Hence the conduction current equals the
Current Flow eddy current.
Eddy Axial Field Simula-
tion A plot of the H-field induced by an oscillating external magnetic field is shown below:
Theory Mag H
-8.8382e-07
Deriving the Eddy Axial -1.3332e-04
-2.6576e-04

Field Equation -3.9820e-04

-5.3064e-04
-6.6308e-04
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) -7.9552e-04
-9.2796e-04
-1.0604e-03
Axisymmetric Field Simula- -1.1928e-03
-1.3253e-03

tion
Transient Simulation
Assumptions
Time-Dependent Magnetic
Field Simulation
Phasor Notation
Real and Imaginary Com-
ponents

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 761 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Electromagnetic Sources
tion The only sources in the problem are established by specifying values of H at boundaries.
Theory For example, when an alternating field is created by a large solenoid (one in which the
Admittance length, l, is much larger than the diameter), the H-field inside the solenoid is uniform and
Current Flow given by:
Eddy Axial Field Simula-
tion nI
H = -----
Theory l
Deriving the Eddy Axial where:
Field Equation
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) n is the number of coil turns.
Axisymmetric Field Simula- I is the current.
tion l is the length of the solenoid.
Transient Simulation Only in regions where a conductor is present will the H-field be distorted by eddy currents.
Assumptions At all other points inside the solenoid, including the boundary around the conductor, H will
Time-Dependent Magnetic abide by the previous equation.
Field Simulation
Phasor Notation Assumptions
Real and Imaginary Com- The eddy axial field simulator assumes the following conditions about the field quantities:
ponents
All time-varying electromagnetic quantities are assumed to have the form:
F ( t ) = F m cos ( t + )
All quantities must have the same value of , but can have different phase angles ().
If the source waveform associated with the magnetic field intensity is not a pure
sinusoid, decompose it into sinusoidal harmonics, and solve separately at each
frequency. (This is only possible in linear systems where superposition is valid.)
The magnetic field, H, has a z-component only, and is uniform in the z direction:
H = 0x + 0y + H z ( x, y, t )z
However, H can vary in the x- and y-directions.
Go Back Because no currents flow in the z-direction, the electric field, E, has x- and y-
components only:
Contents E = E x ( x, y, t )x + E y ( x, y, t )y + 0z

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 762 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Deriving the Eddy Axial Field Equation
tion
Theory The main equation (derived from Maxwells equations) that the eddy axial field simulator
Admittance solves is:
Current Flow
------------------- H + jH = 0
Eddy Axial Field Simula- 1
tion + j
Theory
Deriving the Eddy Axial where:
Field Equation
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) H is the magnetic field intensity.
Axisymmetric Field Simula- is the electric scalar potential.
tion is the magnetic permeability.
Transient Simulation is the angular frequency at which all quantities are oscillating.
Assumptions is the conductivity.
Time-Dependent Magnetic is the permittivity.
Field Simulation
Phasor Notation
Real and Imaginary Com-
ponents

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 763 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Obtaining Maxwells Equations in Terms of H
tion The eddy axial field solver solves for time harmonic electromagnetic fields governed by
Theory Maxwells equations:
Admittance
Current Flow D =
Eddy Axial Field Simula- B = 0
tion
D
Theory H = J +
Deriving the Eddy Axial t
Field Equation
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) B
E =
Axisymmetric Field Simula- t
tion
Transient Simulation where:
Assumptions E is the electric field.
Time-Dependent Magnetic D is the electric displacement, E.
Field Simulation
Phasor Notation
B is the magnetic flux density.
H is the magnetic field intensity, B.
Real and Imaginary Com-
ponents J is the current density, E.
is the charge density.
The eddy axial solver assumes that all time-varying electromagnetic quantities in the
problem have the form:
F ( t ) = F m cos ( t + )

Using Eulers formula:

j
More e = cos + j sin
If = t+, F(t) equals the real portion of ej(t+):
j ( t + )
Go Back F(t ) = [Fme ] = [ F m ( cos ( t + ) + j sin ( t + ) ) ] = F m cos ( t + )

Each time-varying quantity has the form F m e j e jt . Using this relationship and the one
Contents given for D above:

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 764 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula-
D
tion = jD = jE
t
Theory
Admittance Substituting this into the first of Maxwells equations and solving for E:
Current Flow
1
Eddy Axial Field Simula- ------------------- ( H ) = E
tion + j
Theory
Deriving the Eddy Axial Taking the curl of both sides, this equation becomes:
Field Equation 1
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) ------------------- ( H ) = E
+ j
Axisymmetric Field Simula-
tion
Transient Simulation Now, the curl of E is given by:
Assumptions E = jH
Time-Dependent Magnetic
Field Simulation Substituting this into the previous equation gives the following relationship:
Phasor Notation 1
------------------- ( H ) = jH
Real and Imaginary Com- + j
ponents
Or, in the form of a wave equation:

------------------- H + jH = 0
1
+ j

This equation is the one that the eddy axial field solver uses to calculate H.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 765 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Obtaining Currents
tion Once the eddy axial field simulator has solved for the vector field H, the current can be
Theory obtained by:
Admittance
Current Flow J = H = E + jE = J c + J d
Eddy Axial Field Simula-
where:
tion
Theory Jc is the conduction current, E.
Deriving the Eddy Axial Jd is the displacement current, j E.
Field Equation
Current Flow (Eddy Note that since , , and are known quantities, E can also be calculated from this equa-
Axial) tion.
Axisymmetric Field Simula- Current Flow (Eddy Axial)
tion
Transient Simulation To compute the current flow, the eddy axial field solver uses the following relationship:

J dA
Assumptions I =
Time-Dependent Magnetic
Field Simulation where:
Phasor Notation
Real and Imaginary Com- I is the current.
ponents J is the current density, given by:
J = E + jE

A is the area over which the current flow is computed. It is found by sweeping the current
flow line drawn in the xy-plane into the z direction forming a 3D surface. The current
flow computed is the current per meter depth in the z direction.
A separate current flow value is computed for each line you draw.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 766 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Axisymmetric Field Simulation
tion
Theory If you selected RZ Plane as the model type on the Executive Commands menu, a special
Admittance version of the selected field solver is used. It assumes that the 2D geometry being studied
Current Flow sweeps 360 around the z-axis of a cylindrical coordinate system, enabling you to model
Eddy Axial Field Simulation devices like soleniods and insulators that have an axis of rotational symmetry. All electric
Theory or magnetic fields in the problem must also be rotationally symmetric so that the solution
Deriving the Eddy Axial in any RZ-plane is the same as any other. Axisymmetric field simulation is available for the
Field Equation following solvers:
Current Flow (Eddy Axial)
Axisymmetric Field Simu-
Electrostatic
lation
Magnetostatic
Transient Simulation Eddy Current
Assumptions DC Conduction
Time-Dependent Magnetic Any field solution involving a long plank-shaped object is different from a solution involving
Field Simulation an annular object even though the same equation is solved for both types of geome-
Phasor Notation tries. Mathematically, the difference between cartesian and axisymmetric field solutions
Real and Imaginary Com- arises from the difference in how gradients, curls and divergences are expressed in the
ponents two coordinate systems.
In a cartesian (xyz) coordinate system, these operators are defined as follows (where
F is a scalar quantity and F is a vector quantity):

F F F
F ( x, y, z ) = x + y + z
x y z

F x F y F z
F ( x, y, z ) = + +
More x y z

x y z
Go Back
F =
x y z
Contents Fx Fy Fz

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 767 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- If F has a z-component only, the curl is defined as:
tion F z F z
Theory F = x y
Admittance y x
Current Flow In a cylindrical (r, , z) coordinate system, these operators are defined as:
Eddy Axial Field Simulation
F 1 F F
Theory F ( r, , z ) = r + --- + z
Deriving the Eddy Axial r r z
Field Equation
1 ( rF r ) 1 F F z
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) F ( r, , z ) = --- ---------------- + --- +
Axisymmetric Field Simu- r r r z
lation
Transient Simulation r r z
Assumptions
Time-Dependent Magnetic F =
r z
Field Simulation
Phasor Notation Fr rF Fz
Real and Imaginary Com- If F has a -component only, the curl is defined as:
ponents
( rF ) ( rF )
F = --- ----------------- r + ----------------- z
1
r z r
In the cylindrical case, an extra r shows up in places where there is no analogous x in the
cartesian case, resulting in a different field solution. The calculations involving the differ-
ences in mathematics between axisymmetric and cartesian models are implicitly handled
by the Maxwell 2D and are transparent to you.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 768 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Transient Simulation
tion
Theory EMpulse only.
Admittance
The transient solver allows you to analyze the magnetic fields, energy, force, power loss,
Current Flow
speed, and flux of a model at various time steps of a solution over a specified period of
Eddy Axial Field Simulation
time. This solver allows for non-sinusoidal current or voltage excitation, as well as rota-
Theory
tional or translational motion. Transient magnetic field solutions follow the same principles
Deriving the Eddy Axial
as magnetostatic field solutions.
Field Equation
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) Assumptions
Axisymmetric Field Simula-
tion The transient solver assumes the following conditions about the problem:
Transient Simulation If motion occurs in the model, no motion occurs outside the band object.
Assumptions Only one type of motion (translational or rotational) occurs in the model.
Time-Dependent Magnetic More than one object can be assigned identical motion within the band object.
Field Simulation
Phasor Notation
Real and Imaginary Com-
ponents

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 769 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Time-Dependent Magnetic Field Simulation
tion
Theory The time-dependent magnetic equation is expressed as:
Admittance A
A = J s v + H c + v A
Current Flow t
Eddy Axial Field Simulation
Theory where:
Deriving the Eddy Axial Hc is the coercivity of the permanent magnet.
Field Equation v is the velocity of the moving parts.
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) A is the magnetic vector potential.
Axisymmetric Field Simula- Js is the source current density.
tion
Transient Simulation EMpulse applies a reference frame that is fixed with respect to the components in the
Assumptions model by setting the velocity, v, equal to zero. Because the moving components have now
Time-Dependent Mag- been fixed to their own coordinate system, the partial time derivative becomes the total
netic Field Simulation time derivative of A. Thus, the motion equation becomes:
Phasor Notation dA
Real and Imaginary Com- A = J s v + H c
dt
ponents
which is obtainable at each time step at every node in the finite element model.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 770 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Stranded Conductors
tion Stranded conductors lack eddy current behavior and are considered to be filaments too
Theory thin to model in a practical finite element grid. Because of this, EMpulse assumes that
Admittance their contribution to the current density is averaged over the area of problem region.
Current Flow
Eddy Axial Field Simulation These filaments can be connected in parallel or series, and carry the same current based
Theory on:
Deriving the Eddy Axial
A = J s
Field Equation
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) where Js, the uniformly distributed current density is given by:
Axisymmetric Field Simula-
N fif
tion J s = d f ---------------------
Transient Simulation Sf a p
Assumptions
Time-Dependent Mag- and:
netic Field Simulation if is the total terminal current flowing into a filament coil group (or winding).
Phasor Notation Nf is the total conductor number of the filaments in the winding.
Real and Imaginary Com- A is the magnetic vector potential.
ponents
a is the number of parallel branches in the winding.
df is the polarity (+1 or -1) to represent forward or return paths.
Sf is the total area of the cross-section of the region occupied by the winding.
p is the ratio of the original full model to the field domain to be solved.
Note that the filaments in the winding may reside at several different locations as long as
they are connected in series or parallel.
The voltage seen from the terminal of the winding is the sum of the voltage across all the
More wires as well as any possible external impedance based on:
N f l dA di
d f ------------- d + R' i f + L' f + u c = u s
S f a dt dt
Go Back
and:
Contents R' = r dc + r end + r ext

L' = l end + l ext

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 771 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- where:
tion if is the total terminal current flowing into the winding.
Theory
Admittance
Nf is the total conductor number of the filaments in the winding.
Current Flow
a is the number of parallel branches in the winding.
Eddy Axial Field Simulation df is the polarity (+1 or -1) to represent forward or return paths.
Theory Sf is the total area of the cross-section of the region occupied by the winding.
Deriving the Eddy Axial p is the ratio of the original full model to the field domain to be solved.
Field Equation rdc is the total DC resistance.
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) rend is the end-turn resistance of the winding
Axisymmetric Field Simula- rext is the external resistance associated with the wire.
tion uc is the voltage drop across the capacitor.
Transient Simulation l is the thickness of the model.
Assumptions A is the magnetic vector potential.
Time-Dependent Mag-
netic Field Simulation In the global system of equations, there is one equation form for each winding. In order to
Phasor Notation avoid a second order differential equation due to the inclusion of a capacitor, EMpulse
Real and Imaginary Com- solves for the capacitor voltage, uc, based on:
ponents du c
if C = 0
dt
where:
C is the capacitance.
if is the total terminal current flowing into the winding.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 772 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Solid Conductors
tion Solid conductors are large enough to model with finite elements, where skin effects
Theory depend not only on the frequency of the system, but on the location of nearby conductors.
Admittance
Current Flow Based on Amperes Law, the total current density, Jt, in the system is given by:
Eddy Axial Field Simulation dA
Theory Jt = V
dt
Deriving the Eddy Axial
Field Equation which reduces to:
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) dA
Axisymmetric Field Simula- Jt = + ---V b
dt l
tion
Transient Simulation or:
Assumptions Jt = Je + Js
Time-Dependent Mag-
netic Field Simulation where:
Phasor Notation
Real and Imaginary Com- Vb is the voltage difference across the conductors end points.
ponents Je is the eddy current density.
Js is the source current density.

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 773 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Solid Conductors with Current Sources
tion For solid conductors with a current source, the total current is known, while the source
Theory component is unknown. EMpulse computes the current source based on the following cir-
Admittance cuit equation for the nth conductor:
Current Flow
d t + J s d = J t d = I t
dA
Eddy Axial Field Simulation
Theory c C
Deriving the Eddy Axial
Field Equation where:
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) c is the width cross-section of the nth conductor.
Axisymmetric Field Simula-
tion
It is the known total current.
Transient Simulation
Js is the source component to be solved for.
Assumptions Jt is the total current density.
Time-Dependent Mag- Solid Conductors with Voltage Sources
netic Field Simulation For solid conductors with a voltage source, the total voltage is known, while the total cur-
Phasor Notation rent density is unknown. EMpulse computes the unknown quantities based on the follow-
Real and Imaginary Com- ing circuit equation which is derived from the solid conductor equations. The resulting
ponents equation yields:

d t + J t d = --l-V b d
dA
c C

where:
c is the width cross-section of the nth conductor.
Vb is the known voltage source between the two conductors.
Jt is the total current density to be solved for.
is the conductivity.
l is the thickness of the model.
Go Back A is the magnetic vector potential.

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 774 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Translational Motion
tion The transient motion simulator generates translational motion solutions based on the fol-
Theory lowing motion equation:
Admittance
Current Flow
Eddy Axial Field Simulation ma + s = F comp + F load
Theory
Deriving the Eddy Axial where:
Field Equation
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) m is the mass of the object, in kg.
Axisymmetric Field Simula- a is the acceleration of the object, in m/s2.
tion s is the speed, in m/s.
Transient Simulation F is the force, in N.
Assumptions is the damping, in N.s/m.
Time-Dependent Mag-
netic Field Simulation
Phasor Notation
Real and Imaginary Com-
ponents

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 775 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Rotational Motion
tion The transient motion simulator generates rotational motion solutions based on the follow-
Theory ing motion equation:
Admittance
Current Flow
Eddy Axial Field Simulation J + = T comp + T load
Theory
Deriving the Eddy Axial where:
Field Equation
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) J is the inertial force, in kg.m2.
Axisymmetric Field Simula- T is the torque, in N.m.
tion is the angular speed, in rad/s.
Transient Simulation is the angular acceleration, in rad/s2.
Assumptions is the damping factor, in N.m.s.
Time-Dependent Mag-
netic Field Simulation
Phasor Notation
Real and Imaginary Com-
ponents

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 776 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Phasor Notation
tion
Theory Time varying quantities that have the form:
Admittance F ( t ) = F m cos ( t + )
Current Flow
Eddy Axial Field Simulation can be represented as rotating phasors in the complex plane. Using Eulers formula:
Theory e
j
= cos + j sin
Deriving the Eddy Axial
Field Equation If = t+, F(t) equals the real portion of ej(t+):
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) j ( t + )
F(t ) = [Fme ] = [ F m ( cos ( t + ) + j sin ( t + ) ) ] = F m cos ( t + )
Axisymmetric Field Simula-
tion Each time-varying quantity has the form F m e j e jt . The F m e j component is merely a
Transient Simulation complex constant that can be represented by a stationary phasor in the complex plane.
Assumptions The F m e jt component is a complex number that depends on t, and can be represented
Time-Dependent Magnetic as a rotating phasor in the complex plane, as shown here.
Field Simulation Imaginary
Phasor Notation
Real and Imaginary Com- Phasor rotating at
ponents an angular frequency
t of

Real

Fm cos(t+)

Go Back
The phasors projection on the real axis oscillates sinusoidally. It reaches a peak when
Contents parallel with the real axis, and crosses zero when parallel with the imaginary axis. Thus, a
phasor with =90 represents a quantity that peaks 90 degrees after a phasor with =0.
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 777 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- Real and Imaginary Components
tion
Theory Maxwell 2D expects you to enter magnitudes and phase angles when you specify volt-
Admittance ages, currents, and other boundary or source quantities in models where time-varying
Current Flow fields are to be computed (that is, eddy current, AC conduction, and eddy axial models).
Eddy Axial Field Simulation But when the magnitude and phase angle of a quantity are functions of position, it is eas-
Theory ier to specify the functions in terms of real and imaginary components x+jy rather than in
Deriving the Eddy Axial terms of magnitude and amplitude. Therefore, when you specify currents and boundary
Field Equation conditions as functions, the system expects you to describe the functions in terms of real
Current Flow (Eddy Axial) and imaginary components.
Axisymmetric Field Simula- The x+jy description of a phasor indicates that the phasor is the sum of two components
tion a sinusoid that peaks at t=0 and a sinusoid that peaks at t=90.
Transient Simulation
Assumptions The x component of the phasor is called the real component and can be represented
Time-Dependent Magnetic by a phasor that lies on the real axis of the complex plane.
Field Simulation The y component is called the imaginary component and is represented by a phasor
Phasor Notation that lies on the j-axis of the complex plane.
Real and Imaginary The real and imaginary components of a three-phase system are shown below:
Components Imaginary

Phase B = Imcos(t+120)

Imaginary component (y)

Real
More Real component (x) Phase A = Imcos(t+0)

Go Back
Phase C = Imcos(t+240)
Contents
The real and imaginary components are related to the magnitude and phase of a sinusoid
Index
Maxwell Online Help System 778 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Topics: Maxwell 2D Technical Notes
AC Conduction Field Simula- in this way:
tion 2 2
Theory Im = x +y
Admittance
Current Flow y
Eddy Axial Field Simulation = atan --
x
Theory
Deriving the Eddy Axial
Field Equation
Current Flow (Eddy Axial)
Axisymmetric Field Simula-
tion
Transient Simulation
Assumptions
Time-Dependent Magnetic
Field Simulation
Phasor Notation
Real and Imaginary
Components

Go Back

Contents

Index
Maxwell Online Help System 779 Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation
Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C A displaying
line of sight
AC Conduction measuring
D E F AC conduction solver Animate (Variables command)
admittance animating
boundary conditions for parametric setups
G H I field quantities in plane calculator selected setups
material properties in plane calculator the model
J K L phase of quantities in line calculator anisotropy
phase of quantities in number calculator conductivity (AC Conduction and Eddy Axial)
phase of quantities in plane calculator imaginary relative permeability (AC Conduc-
M N O purpose of tion and Eddy Axial)
selecting for a model imaginary relative permeability (Magneto-
sources for static and Eddy Current)
P Q R theory permeability (AC Conduction and Eddy Axi-
accessing Maxwell 2D al)
S T U active conductors permeability (Magnetostatic and Eddy Cur-
active window rent)
Adaptive Analysis permittivity (Electrostatic, AC Conduction
V W X adaptive pass number and Eddy Axial)
adaptive pass, specifying number of permittivity (Magnetostatic and Eddy Cur-
Y Z # adaptive solution rent)
Add Graphs (parametric Plot command) tensor
Add (Constraint command) Arc (Object command)
Add (Variables command) arcs
adding text to models changing number of segments in
adjacent conductors defining as line calculator registers
admittance Arrange commands
Go Back admittance, normalized values Mirror
Align (Reshape/Vertex command) Move
alignment Rotate
Contents of spline control points Arrow Display (Post/Plane commands)
of text arrow plots
of vertices density of arrows in rectangular region
Index Amperes Law displaying in a rectangle
angle of common vector field quantities

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C of field quantities in plane calculator scalar components in number calculator

redisplaying scalar components in plane calculator
Arrow Region (Post/Plane commands) specifying magnetic vector potential for
D E F Arrow (Post/Plane commands) value boundaries in
Assign commands vector components in line calculator
Boundary vector components in number calculator
G H I Source vector components in plane calculator
Assign/Boundary commands axisymmetric models, differences from carte-
J K L Balloon sian models
Impedance
Master
M N O Resistance
Slave
Symmetry
P Q R Value
Assign/Source commands
S T U Sheet
Solid
Attributes (Edit command)
V W X axes
alignment of boundary and source quantities
Y Z # with
alignment of vector material properties with
displaying
for BH-curves
axis of symmetry
axisymmetric models
and anisotropic materials
Go Back axis of symmetry
electric flux linkage
field simulation for
Contents integrating over a volume
magnetostatic flux linkage
multiplying and dividing by r
Index outside boundaries for
scalar components in line calculator

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C B of parametric problem
parametric model
B Vector
project names
background
D E F assigning material properties, boundaries
script files
setting up models for
and sources to
[Link] file
G H I automatically excluded (DC conduction)
for UNIX workstations
default material for
for Windows NT and Windows 95
definition of
J K L effect of ballooning on
BH Examine (Post commands)
BH Plot (Post commands)
excluding from model
BH-curve
M N O balloon boundaries
adding points to
and default current return path
axis settings for
assigning
changing appearance of
P Q R charge at infinity
deleting
in AC conduction models
displaying coordinates of
in DC conduction models
S T U in eddy axial models
entering
file formats for
in eddy current models
for permanent magnets
V W X in electrostatic models
from Maxwell 3D
in magnetostatic models
importing from a file
in transient models
Y Z # used as reference
magnetic coercivity of
magnetic retentivity of
voltage at infinity
modifying B and H values
Balloon (Assign/Boundary commands)
plotting saturation levels on
batch processing
saving
[Link] file (NT and Win95)
units for
[Link] file (UNIX)
Boolean commands
command line
Go Back directory paths
Intersect
Simplify
error messages (UNIX)
Subtract
error messages (Windows NT and Windows
Contents 95)
Union
boundaries
for PC (Microsoft Windows)
deleting
for UNIX workstations
Index of nominal problem
deselecting
selecting

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C boundary conditions boundary conditions, eddy axial

and field behavior balloon
and size of drawing region default (natural and Neumann)
D E F assigning matching (master and slave)
defining via math functions symmetry (even and odd)
deleting value
G H I during matrix solutions boundary conditions, eddy current
effect of grouping on balloon
J K L effect on impedance computation default (natural and Neumann)
effect on inductance computation impedance
even symmetry matching (master and slave)
M N O general procedure symmetry (even and odd)
in axisymmetric models value
master boundary conditions, electrostatic
P Q R modifying balloon
Neumann default (natural and Neumann)
S T U odd symmetry matching (master and slave)
picking edges for matching boundaries symmetry (even and odd)
resetting to default value
V W X slave boundary conditions, functional
summary of general procedure for defining
Y Z # use of identifying constant boundary quantities
value identifying functional boundary quantities
boundary conditions, AC conduction orientation of function on boundary
balloon boundary conditions, magnetostatic
default (natural and Neumann) balloon
matching (master and slave) default (natural and Neumann)
symmetry (even and odd) matching (master and slave)
Go Back value Neumann
boundary conditions, DC conduction symmetry (even and odd)
balloon value
Contents default (Neumann and natural) boundary setup, for parametric solutions
matching (master and slave) Boundary (Assign commands)
resistance buffer
Index symmetry (even and odd) copying objects and text from
value copying objects and text to

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C C seeding mesh for

solid
Calc commands
charge density
Line
D E F Number
in non-conductors
on charge sheets
Plane
charge sheet
G H I calculators
charge density
line
distribution of charge on
number
J K L plane
total charge
charge sources
Calc/Plane/Decompose
functional
M N O Calc/Plane/Export
solid
capacitance
circles
and electric field
approximated by polygons
P Q R calculating
changing number of segments
in terms of charges and voltages
circumcircle refinement
in terms of currents and time-varying voltag-
S T U es
Clear
Clear (Boundary Manager)
normalized values
Clear (Edit command)
V W X short circuit
Close (File command)
cartesian models
closed objects
differences from axisymmetric models
Y Z # cells
Closed Objects (Edit/Select command)
coarse mesh
copying
coenergy
resetting
and virtual force
centroid refinement
and virtual torque
Change View (Window command)
coercivity
changing field of view
electric
charge
Go Back and balloon boundaries
magnetic
Color (Model/Defaults command)
and reference voltage
colors
assigning to conductors
Contents assigning to non-conductors
changing
of field plots
assigning to surfaces of dielectrics
of geometric objects
on floating conductors
Index on non-conducting objects
of text (PC)
of text (workstation)

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C specifying by clicking relationship to skin depth

specifying default conductors
spectrum active
D E F complex numbers assigning AC current to
admittance assigning AC voltages to
complex conjugate assigning AC voltages to (Assign command)
G H I impedance assigning charges to
in calculator registers assigning DC current to
J K L phase assigning DC voltages to (Assign command)
phasor notation for assigning DC voltages to (DC Conduction)
real and imaginary components assigning DC voltages to (Electrostatic)
M N O computing resources, viewing charge distribution
conductance dividing
in admittance matrices floating
P Q R normalized values defining as floating charge sources
conduction current modeling thin conductors with boundaries
S T U and perfect insulators parallel
behavior on even symmetry boundaries explicitly defining (AC current source)
behavior on Neumann and natural bound- passive
V W X aries seeding skin depth of
behavior on odd symmetry boundaries skin depth in
Y Z # downloading into plane calculator (AC) stranded
downloading into plane calculator (DC) touching
downloading into plane calculator (Eddy Ax- assigning AC currents to
ial) assigning voltages to
in axisymmetric models Constraint commands
in cartesian models Add
conductivity Delete
Go Back and perfect conductors Enforce
and skin depth Modify
anisotropic (AC Conduction and Eddy Axial) constraints
Contents anisotropic (Eddy Current) adding
in plane calculator (AC) deleting
in plane calculator (DC) enforcing
Index in plane calculator (Eddy Axial) functional
in plane calculator (Eddy Current) in model

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C in parametric sweeps flux linkage

modifying number of triangles
Constraint/Add commands power loss
D E F Arc Radius remaining adaptive passes
Line-To-Line Angle target energy error
Lock X Coordinate torque
G H I Lock Y Coordinate total energy
Point-To-Point Distance viewing
J K L Rotation Convergence Display
summary Plot Current
Constraint/Delete commands Plot Flux
M N O All Plot Force
By Clicking Plot Percent Error Energy
By Name Plot Torque
P Q R summary Plot Total Energy
Constraint/Modify commands Plot Total Power Loss
S T U By Clicking Plot Triangles
Edit Variables Table
summary coordinate system
V W X Contour Display axisymmetric vs. cartesian
contour plots effect on field simulation
Y Z # of common field quantities Coordinate System (Window command)
of quantities in the plane calculator coordinate system, global
Convergence measurements
convergence resetting local coordinate system to
of field solution coordinate system, local
viewing during parametric solution for boundaries and sources
convergence data for functional and vector material properties
Go Back completed adaptive passes moving objects in
convergence criteria resetting
current flow rotating
Contents delta energy shifting
displaying as a table uv
displaying plots of coordinates
Index energy error displaying x- and y-
error energy displaying x- and y-offsets

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C Copy (Edit command) on AC current sheet

core loss solutions on AC current sheet (Assign command)
coupling coefficient on DC current sheet
D E F CPU time, required for solution tasks on DC current sheet (Assign command)
cross products plotting
in the number calculator relationship to electric field (DC conduction)
G H I in the plane calculator source current
curl, axisymmetric vs. cartesian current distribution
J K L current effect on inductance and resistance
and capacitance in eddy current simulations
and inductance in magnetostatic simulations
M N O and virtual force seeding mesh for
constraints on passive conductors Current Flow
instantaneous current flow
P Q R peak and convergence
relationship to current density (eddy current for DC conduction solver
S T U solver) for eddy axial solver
return path for eddy current (AC magnetic) solver
source in axisymmetric models
V W X time varying, and inductance in cartesian models
current density plotting for each adaptive solution
Y Z # AC viewing solution
DC (magnetostatic) current mesh
displacement currents current sheet, AC
downloading into plane calculator (AC) and eddy currents
downloading into plane calculator (Eddy Ax- current density
ial) current distribution
downloading into plane calculator (Eddy magnitude of current
Go Back Current) phase of current
eddy currents total current
functional current sheet, DC
Contents in Amperes Law current density
in eddy current problems total current
in magnetostatic problems current sources, AC
Index in solid DC sources assigning to touching conductors
in stranded AC current sources constraints on current in solid and parallel

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C sources D
current density
D Vector
current sheets
Data commands (table editor)
D E F displacement current
Fill
eddy current
Sort
magnitude and phase of
G H I multi-phase systems
summary
Sweep
parallel
DC Conduction
J K L parallel (Assign command)
DC conduction solver
perfect conductors
axisymmetric vs. cartesian models
perfect conductors (Assign command)
M N O reference for computing A-field
boundary conditions for
conductance
solid
current flow
solid current
P Q R source current
field quantities in plane calculator
purpose of
stranded
selecting for a model
S T U stranded (Assign command)
sources for
current sources, DC
theory
current density
V W X current density (Assign command)
when to use
DC Magnetic Fields package
current sheets (Assign command)
Defaults (Global commands)
Y Z # functional
Define Model
perfect conductors
Define Model commands
perfect conductors (Assign command)
Draw Model
reference for computing A-field
Group Objects
total current
Define Model, for parametric solutions
total current (Assign command)
Define (Post/Line commands)
curved lines
Delete (parametric Plot command)
Go Back approximating
Delete (Variables command)
approximating for circle
Deleting Mesh Seeding Operations
approximating for spline
delta energy
Contents making smoother
derived materials
Cut (Edit command)
adding
deleting
Index inheritance of properties

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C deriving materials dot products

Deselect All (Boundary manager) in the number calculator
Deselect All (Edit command) in the plane calculator
D E F dielectrics Draw Model
AC surface voltage on Drawing command
charge on surface of Drawing Plane
G H I charges on drawing plane
DC surface voltage on (DC Conduction) Drawing Plane (Model commands)
J K L DC surface voltage on (Electrostatic) drawing region
polarization of and background objects
specifying charge in and boundary conditions
M N O time constant specifying
dimensions use of in solution
measuring Drawing Size (Model command)
P Q R specifying units of
dipole moment
S T U displacement current
and total source current
downloading into plane calculator (AC)
V W X downloading into plane calculator (Eddy Ax-
ial)
Y Z # downloading into plane calculator (Eddy
Current)
in solid and parallel AC current sources
relationship to AC current density
relationship to AC electric field
Display (Global commands)
Display (Post/Line commands)
Go Back displaying objects
distance
between points
Contents between points in geometric model
measuring
distributed matrices
Index divergences
axisymmetric vs. cartesian

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C E impedance
phase of quantities in line calculator
E Vector
phase of quantities in number calculator
AC/DC Conduction
D E F Eddy Axial
phase of quantities in plane calculator
purpose of
Electrostatic
selecting for a model
G H I Eddy Axial
sources for
eddy axial solver
theory
boundary conditions for
J K L current flow
virtual force
virtual torque
derivation of eddy axial field equations
edge voltage
M N O field quantities in plane calculator
Edge (Reshape command)
material properties in plane calculator
edges
phase of quantities in line calculator
adding vertex points to
P Q R phase of quantities in number calculator
assigning sources to
phase of quantities in plane calculator
deleting
purpose of
S T U selecting for a model
in objects with curved lines
picking for matching boundaries
sources for
Edit commands
V W X theory
Attributes
Eddy Current
Clear
eddy current
Y Z # and skin depth
Copy
Cut
and total source current
Delete Row
downloading into plane calculator
Duplicate
effect on AC inductance and resistance
Insert Row
in solid and parallel AC current sources
Paste
relationship to AC current density
Show All
relationship to AC magnetic field
Go Back eddy current field quantities
Undo Clear
Visibility
eddy current solver
Edit commands (Boundary Manager)
axisymmetric vs. cartesian models
Contents boundary conditions for
Clear
Deselect All
current flow
Select
derivation of field equations
Index field quantities in plane calculator
Undo Clear
Edit commands (table editor)

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C Clear Edit/Select/Objects commands (Boundary Man-

Copy ager)
Cut By Area
D E F Delete Row By Clicking
Deselect All By Name
Insert Row Edit/Visibility commands
G H I Paste By Item
summary Hide Selection
J K L Edit commands (2D Modeler) electric coercivity
Deselect All relationship to permittivity, polarization and
Select electric retentivity
M N O Edit menu electric field
Edit/Attributes commands and capacitance
By Clicking and electric coercivity
P Q R Recolor behavior in floating conductors
Rename behavior in perfect conductors
S T U Edit/Deselect All commands behavior on even symmetry boundaries
All Projects behavior on matching boundaries
Current Project behavior on odd symmetry boundaries
V W X Edit/Duplicate commands downloading into plane calculator (DC)
Along Arc downloading into plane calculator (Electro-
Y Z # Along Line static)
Mirror Duplicate in axisymmetric models
Edit/Select commands in cartesian models
All Items plotting
By Area AC electric field
By Name DC electric field
Closed Objects required sources of
Go Back Model Objects static
NonModel Objects Electric Fields package
Open Objects electric flux
Contents Edit/Select commands (Boundary Manager) and polarization
Edge flux linkage
Object Intersect electric flux density
Index Objects and electric coercivity
Trace and electric retentivity

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C downloading into plane calculator (Electro- virtual force

static) when to use
plotting EMpulse
D E F AC flux density energy
DC flux density and convergence
electric potential and impedance
G H I AC/DC Conduction and virtual force (electrostatic)
downloading into plane calculator delta energy
J K L Electrostatic plotting energy error
plotting plotting total energy
AC electric potential target energy error
M N O DC electric potential energy density, and manual mesh refinement
reference for energy error
setting to a value on a boundary (AC Con- and solution accuracy
P Q R duction) current
setting to a value on a boundary (DC Con- need for manual refinement
S T U duction) plotting for each field solution
setting to a value on a boundary (Electrostat- stopping criteria
ic) target
V W X theory Entry (Post/Line commands)
electric retentivity even symmetry boundaries
Y Z # relationship to polarization, permittivity and assigning
electric coercivity behavior of electric field
electric susceptibility behavior of magnetic field
Electrostatic behavior of magnetic field in transient mod-
electrostatic solver els
axisymmetric vs. cartesian models in AC conduction models
boundary conditions for in DC conduction models
Go Back capacitance in eddy axial models
field quantities in plane calculator in eddy current models
flux linkage in electrostatic models
Contents purpose of in magnetostatic models
selecting for a model phase of AC electric field
sources for phase of AC magnetic field
Index specifying reference for potential relationship to Neumann boundaries
theory excluded objects

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C automatically excluded objects F

including in model
field of view
Executive Commands menu
adjusting
D E F Define Model
changing
Draw Model
displaying entire drawing space
Drawing
G H I Group Objects
displaying small objects
magnifying
Model
shifting
J K L Post Processor
zooming in
Profile
field quantities
Setup Boundaries/Sources
M N O Setup Executive Parameters
displaying
instantaneous values of
Setup Materials
loading into registers
Setup Solution Options
P Q R Solutions
manipulating
multiplying by material properties
Solve
plotting common quantities
S T U Solver
plotting on a line
Zoom In
plotting quantities in plane calculator
executive module
V W X executive parameters commands
values at selected points
field simulation
external fields
axial magnetic fields (AC)
Y Z # assigning
conduction currents (AC)
in axisymmetric models
conduction currents (DC)
modeling with value boundaries
eddy currents
electric potential (DC)
in cartesian and axisymmetric models
magnetic fields (AC)
magnetic fields (DC)
Go Back selecting a field solver
static electric fields
field solutions, viewing
Contents Fields
File commands
Close
Index Exit

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C Import Fill (Data command)

New fine mesh
Open finite element mesh
D E F Print and large dimensional difference
Print Setup current mesh
Revert displaying
G H I Save displaying shaded mesh
Save As displaying wireframe mesh
J K L File commands (Post Processor) information about
Exit information about (post processor)
Open initial mesh
M N O summary intermediary
Trans need for manual refinement
File commands (2D Modeler) problems in creating
P Q R file extensions size of
file formats, Maxwell 2D version 4.33 (.obs) specifying a starting mesh
S T U File menu Fit All (parametric Plot command)
files Fit All (Window/Change View command)
saving circuit models Fit Drawing (Window/Change View command)
V W X saving parametric plots Fit Selection (Window/Change View command)
files, geometry floating conductors, defining as charge sources
Y Z # closing flux density, electric flux density
creating flux lines
importing First Point
Maxwell 2D version 4.33 (.obs files) Line Color
opening Line Name
reverting to previous version Second Point
File/Print commands Flux Linkage
Go Back Active View flux linkage
Project and convergence
Rectangle electrostatic
Contents File/Trans commands (Post Processor) magnetostatic
Delete plotting for each adaptive solution
Execute units of
Index Start viewing solution
Stop Force

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C force G
magnitude
Gausss Law
plotting for each adaptive solution
general operations
D E F viewing solution
in the line calculator
virtual (Eddy Current)
in the number calculator
virtual (Electrostatic)
G H I virtual (Magnetostatic)
in the plane calculator
geometric models
x-component
adding text
J K L y-component
as a collection of closed objects
Format (parametric Plot command)
cartesian and axisymmetric
frequency
M N O and impedance
complexity and processing requirements
drawing
and skin depth
general strategy for creating
effects on impedance and admittance com-
P Q R putations
grouping objects in
in axisymmetric problems
specifying for field solutions
level of precision
S T U specifying for nominal problem
problems with large dimensional differences
Full Screen
Global commands
functional materials (for parametric solutions)
V W X functional mechanical vlaues
Defaults
Display
Functional Properties in RZ Solvers
Recolor
Y Z # Functions
Refresh
Assign/Boundary and Assign/Source com-
global parameters
mands
gradients, axisymmetric vs. cartesian
Setup Materials
Grid (Window command)
grids
cartesian
displaying
Go Back divisions in 2D
mouse
polar
Contents snapping to
spacing between points
3D
Index grounded systems, modeling with balloon

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C boundaries H
grounds
H Vector
effect of grouping on
hatches
D E F in admittance matrix
help
in capacitance matrix
hotkeys
in conductance matrix
G H I optimizing placement of
tool bars
Help commands
Group Objects
About Help
J K L exiting
Contents
general procedure
Index
grouped objects
M N O and parallel current sources
On Context
On Module
assigning materials to
On M2DFS
effect on force and torque solutions
P Q R effect on matrix computations
Shortcuts
help system
button commands
S T U document title
graphics
V W X links
menu bar
selecting text and graphics
Y Z # topics list
using
window functions
hiding objects
hotkeys
Meshmaker
parametric table
Go Back 2D Boundary Manager
2D Modeler
Contents

Index

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C I open circuit
Information
icons, tool bar
initial mesh
imaginary quantities
D E F representing with phasors
Insert (Reshape/Vertex command)
insulated systems, modeling with balloon
imaginary quantities, representing with phasors
boundaries
G H I imaginary relative permeability
insulators, perfect
anisotropic (AC Conduction and Eddy Axial)
integrating
anisotropic (Magnetostatic and Eddy Cur-
J K L rent)
over a line
over a volume (axisymmetric models)
impedance
over a 2D region
M N O and AC inductance
Intersect (Boolean command)
and AC resistance
intersecting objects
and frequency
intersecting objects, open objects
P Q R and time-varying currents
isotropic materials
and time-varying voltages
difference in AC and DC computations
S T U matrix
normalized values
V W X impedance boundaries
and skin depth
approximation of eddy currents on
Y Z # assigning
behavior of magnetic field on
relative permeability
when to use
Impedance (Assign/Boundary commands)
Import (2D Modeler)
index
Go Back inductance
AC vs. DC
and impedance
Contents in terms of magnetic flux and currents
in terms of voltages and time-varying cur-
rents
Index normalized values

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C J K
J Vector keyboard entry
keys
D E F display of
displaying (uv)
G H I grid (uv)

J K L

M N O

P Q R

S T U

V W X

Y Z #

Go Back

Contents

Index

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C L lumped matrices
licensing and non-graphical interfaces
Line
D E F line calculator
entering line segments into
G H I general operations
phase
plotting quantities from
J K L register operations
registers
M N O scalar operations
vector operations
line matching, mesh on master and slave
P Q R boundaries
line of sight
line plots
S T U changing display of
displaying coordinates of
V W X of common field quantities
of quantities in line calculator
saving
Y Z # line segments
arcs
defining for use in plots and line calculator
registers
deleting
displaying in post processor
entering into line calculator
Go Back inspecting and modifying
object edges
straight lines
Contents linear materials
logs
of batch solution tasks
Index of solution tasks

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C M in cartesian models (AC)

in cartesian models (DC)
macros
phase on even symmetry boundaries
adding
D E F defining
phase on odd symmetry boundaries
plotting DC magnetic fields
executing
relationship to electric field (eddy current
G H I in parametric solutions
solver)
removing
relationship to magnetization
Mag B
J K L Mag D
required sources of
setting to a value on a boundary
Mag E
setting to a value on a boundary (Assign
M N O AC/DC Conduction
command)
Eddy Axial
static
Electrostatic
units
P Q R Mag H
magnetic field simulation, time-dependent
Mag J
magnetic flux
magnetic coercivity
S T U in non-linear materials
magnetic flux density
and magnetic retentivity
in permanent magnets
and saturation
V W X relationship to permeability, magnetization
displaying values at selected points
and magnetic retentivity
downloading into plane calculator
magnetic field
Y Z # and magnetic coercivity
in non-linear materials
plotting
and saturation
relationship to magnetization
behavior inside perfect conductors
units
behavior on balloon boundaries
magnetic flux, and inductance
behavior on even symmetry boundaries
magnetic losses
behavior on odd symmetry boundaries
magnetic moment
displaying values at selected points
Go Back downloading into plane calculator (Eddy
magnetic retentivity
in non-linear materials
Current)
in permanent magnets
downloading into plane calculator (Magneto-
Contents static)
magnetic susceptibility
magnetic vector potential
in Amperes Law
downloading into plane calculator (Eddy
in axisymmetric models (AC)
Index in axisymmetric models (DC)
Current)
downloading into plane calculator (Magneto-

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C static) matching mesh on slave boundaries

in axisymmetric models phase of AC magnetic field
on balloon boundaries Master (Assign/Boundary commands)
D E F reference for matching boundaries
required sources of and excluded objects
setting to a value on a boundary (Eddy Cur- assigning master boundaries
G H I rent) assigning slave boundaries
setting to a value on a boundary (Magneto- in AC conduction models
J K L static) in DC conduction models
magnetization in eddy axial models
as a vector function in eddy current models
M N O as source of magnetic field in electrostatic models
direction of in magnetostatic models
relationship to permeability, magnetic coer- in transient models
P Q R civity and retentivity matching mesh points on
Magnetostatic phase of AC electric field on master and
S T U magnetostatic field quantities slave boundaries
magnetostatic solver phase of AC magnetic field on master and
axisymmetric vs. cartesian models slave boundaries
V W X boundary conditions for restrictions on master boundaries
field quantities in plane calculator restrictions on slave boundaries
Y Z # flux linkage selecting edges between vertex points
inductance material characteristics
material properties in plane calculator anisotropic
purpose of defaults
selecting for a model dependencies between electrostatic materi-
sources for al characteristics
specifying reference for potential dependencies between magnetostatic mate-
Go Back theory rial characteristics
virtual force derived (inheritance)
virtual torque editable
Contents Magnify functional
magnifying view windows isotropic
Manual Mesh linear
Index manual mesh refinement multiplying or dividing field quantities by
master boundaries need for

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C perfect conductors material characteristics, functional

vector alignment with local coordinate system
material characteristics, AC conduction assigning
D E F anisotropic conductivity dependent and independent material prop-
anisotropic permittivity erties
conductivity identifying functional and constant proper-
G H I relative permittivity ties
material characteristics, DC conduction specifying direction of
J K L conductivity specifying origin of
material characteristics, eddy axial vector functions
anisotropic conductivity material characteristics, magnetostatic
M N O anisotropic imaginary permeability anisotropic permeability
anisotropic permeability dependent and independent material char-
anisotropic permittivity acteristics
P Q R conductivity magnetic coercivity
imaginary permeability magnetic retentivity
S T U relative permeability magnetization
relative permittivity non-linear permeability
material characteristics, eddy current relative permeability
V W X anisotropic conductivity material database, global
anisotropic permeability material database, local
Y Z # anisotropic permittivity adding materials to
anisotropic relative permeability changing characteristics of materials
conductivity deleting derived materials
imaginary permeability deleting materials from
relative permeability Material Manager
relative permittivity materials
material characteristics, electrostatic adding to local material database
Go Back anisotropic permittivity changing properties of
conductivity deleting from local database
dependent and independent material char- derived
Contents acteristics effect of grouping on
electric coercivity linear
electric retentivity local vs. global
Index polarization lossy
relative permittivity non-linear

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C non-linear (Solver Residual) matrices, capacitance

permanently polarized coupling coefficient
underiving diagonal terms in
D E F materials setup (for parametric solutions) distributed
math functions grounds
orientation on boundary lumped
G H I origin on boundary matrix norm
used to define boundaries mutual capacitance
J K L used to define material properties off-diagonal terms in
used to define sources self-capacitance
math functions (for boundaries and sources) sequence of solutions
M N O alignment with x- and y-axes setup
defining signal lines
deleting units of
P Q R modifying viewing
math functions (for materials) matrices, conductance
S T U defining and current
deleting and voltage drops
modifying coupling coefficient
V W X matrices distributed
coupling coefficient grounds
Y Z # distributed lumped
lumped matrix norm
matrix norm setup
selecting signal lines
selecting conductors to include in units of
viewing viewing
matrices, admittance matrices, impedance
Go Back coupling coefficient coupling coefficient
distributed current return path
effect of frequency on diagonal terms in
Contents grounds distributed
lumped effect of frequency on
signal lines lumped
Index units of matrix norm
viewing mutual impedance

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C off-diagonal terms in importing BH-curves from

self-impedance problem types
setup relationship to Maxwell 2D
D E F solution process translating 2D geometries to 3D
theory Maxwell 3D Field Simulator
units of types of problems
G H I viewing Maxwells equations
matrices, inductance Measure (Model command)
J K L coupling coefficient Measure (Window commands)
current return path memory, and solutions
diagonal terms in menu bar for 2D Modeler
M N O distributed mesh
lumped adding points to
matrix norm area refinement
P Q R mutual inductance aspect ratios of triangles
off-diagonal terms in deleting
S T U self-inductance displaying shaded triangles
sequence of solutions displaying wireframe outlines of
setup general procedure for refining
V W X units of general procedure for seeding
viewing generating
Y Z # Matrix information on
matrix norm refining inside objects
matrix norm, versus coupling coefficient seeding object surfaces
matrix solvers viewing information about
Maxwell Control Panel viewing triangles, seed points and objects
and Ansoft software packages Mesh commands
and PlotData Delete
Go Back and 2D Modeler Display
relationship to Maxwell 2D Information
Maxwell 2D Line Match
Contents relationship to Maxwell Control Panel Make
relationship to Maxwell 3D Seed
Maxwell 2D Modeler Mesh Seeding for Parametric Sweeps
Index Maxwell 3D meshmaker
available field quantities Meshmaker hotkeys

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C Mesh/Seed commands mouse

Delete displaying coordinates
Object functions of buttons (2D Modeler)
D E F QuadTree grid snap
Skin keyboard entry mode
Surface object snap
G H I Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed snap-to behavior of
message bar (in 2D Modeler) snap-to behavior of (2D Modeler)
J K L Mirror Duplicate (Edit/Duplicate command) mouse grid
Mirror (Arrange command) Move (Arrange command)
mirroring Move (Reshape/Vertex command)
M N O and copying mutual capacitance
objects mutual impedance
text mutual inductance
P Q R Model
model
S T U defining (for parametric solutions)
viewing during parametric solution
Model commands
V W X Default Color
Defaults
Y Z # Drawing Plane
Drawing Size
Measure
Object Attributes
SnapToMode
Model Objects (Edit/Select command)
models, modifying the geometry
Go Back Model/Defaults commands
Color
modifying models
Contents motion
mechanical setup
modifying the transient motion setup
Index rotational
translational

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C N relationship to parametric model

non-graphical interfaces
names
non-linear materials
allowable characters in
D E F assigning to 2D objects
adding to database
displaying B and H values
changing
entering BH-curves for
G H I changing by clicking
identifying saturated materials
reserved (Background)
plotting saturation levels in
natural boundaries
J K L behavior of conduction current on
relationship of B and H in
nonlinear permanent magnets
behavior of electric field on
NonModel Objects (Edit/Select command)
M N O behavior of magnetic field on
number calculator
in AC conduction models
entering field values into
in DC conduction models
general operations
P Q R in eddy axial models
phase
in eddy current models
register commands
in electrostatic models
S T U in magnetostatic models
scalar operations
vector operations
Neumann boundaries
number of triangles
V W X behavior of conduction current on
number registers
behavior of electric field on
behavior of magnetic field on
Y Z # in AC conduction models
in DC conduction models
in eddy axial models
in eddy current models
in electrostatic models
in magnetostatic models
in transient models
Go Back relationship to even symmetry boundaries
New (File command)
New (parametrics Plot command)
Contents New (Window command)
nominal model
definition of
Index general procedure for creating

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C O deselecting
deselecting (for grouping)
Object commands
display options
Arc
D E F Circle
displaying
displaying as wireframe or shaded
Polyline
displaying in Meshmaker
G H I Rectangle
displaying small ones
Spiral
displaying with hatches
Spline
J K L Text
effects of deleting edges
excluding from model
object edges, defining as line calculator regis-
filling view
M N O ters
grouping
object information
hiding
Object Orientation Display
importing complex objects
P Q R objects
including excluded objects
adding points and edges
intersecting
adding vertex points to
S T U allowable characters in names
lists of
making larger or smaller
assigning materials to
mirroring
V W X attributes of
modeling thin objects
automatically excluded
moving
background
Y Z # changing colors of
names of
naming
changing scale of
non-model
changing the scale
not appearing
changing the view
number of triangles in
circles
open
closed
overlapping
colors of
Go Back complex shapes
pasting
rectangles
contained within other objects
refining interior mesh
copying
Contents between projects
refreshing
repositioning
copying along arc
reshaping
copying along line
Index deleting
rotating
saving

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C seeding interior of in eddy axial models

seeding surface of in eddy current models
selecting in electrostatic models
D E F selecting with the mouse in magnetostatic models
selecting (for grouping) phase of AC electric field
self-intersecting phase of AC magnetic field
G H I setting default color relationship to value boundaries
simplifying after boolean operation used as reference
J K L specifying the color offsets, displaying x- and y-
spirals On-Off
subtracting open circuit
M N O temporary open circuit inductance
ungrouping open objects
unioning Open Objects (Edit/Select command)
P Q R viewing dimensions of in Meshmaker Open (parametric Plot command)
visibility Open (2D Modeler)
S T U zero-area opening Maxwell 2D version 4.33 (.obs) files
Object/Arc commands Options
Clockwise Assign/Boundary and Assign/Source com-
V W X Counter-Clockwise mands
Object/Circle commands Setup Materials
Y Z # 2 Point Orientation (Assign/Boundary and Assign/
3 Point Source commands)
Object/Spiral commands
Circular
Rectangular
odd symmetry boundaries
and default current return path
Go Back and voltage
assigning
behavior of electric field
Contents behavior of magnetic field
behavior of magnetic field in transient mod-
els
Index in AC conduction models
in DC conduction models

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C P parametric setup, definition of

parametric sweep, setting up
padding percent
parametric table hotkeys
panning with scrollbars
D E F parallel current sources
passive conductors
displacement currents in
AC source current in
eddy currents in
G H I and grouped objects
Paste (Edit command)
displacement current in
perfect conductors
eddy current in
J K L Parameters
and field solutions
assigning AC currents to
parameters
assigning AC currents to (Assign command)
M N O viewing current flow
assigning DC currents to
viewing flux linkage
assigning DC currents to (Assign command)
viewing force
assigning voltages to
P Q R viewing matrices
behavior of magnetic field
viewing torque
defining
parametric analysis
S T U frequency
perfect insulators, excluding
permanent magnets
general procedure for performing
linear
V W X nominal vs. parametric models
magnetic coercivity
of boundary and source quantities
magnetic retentivity
of geometric dimensions
Y Z # of material properties
magnetization
non-linear
overview
used as source of magnetic field
Parametric Analysis module
permanent magnets, nonlinear
accessing
permeability
batch processing
anisotropic (Eddy Axial)
relationship to Maxwell 2D
anisotropic (Magnetostatic and Eddy Cur-
parametric model
Go Back batch processing (UNIX)
rent)
imaginary
batch processing (Windows NT)
in plane calculator (Eddy Axial)
definition of
Contents general procedure for creating
in plane calculator (Magnetostatic)
non-linear
relationship to nominal model
of free space (Eddy Current)
setting up solution for
Index parametric plot windows
of free space (Magnetostatic)
relationship to skin depth

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C relative (Eddy Current) vector operations

relative (Magnetostatic) planes, entering into plane calculator
permittivity Plot Options (BH plots)
D E F anisotropic (Eddy Current) Plot (parametric) commands
anisotropic (Electrostatic, AC Conduction Add Graphs
and Eddy Axial) Create Composite Plot
G H I in plane calculator (AC) Delete
in plane calculator (Eddy Axial) Fit All
J K L of free space Format
relative New
phase Open
M N O in multi-phase systems Save As
in the line calculator Show Coordinates
in the number calculator summary
P Q R in the plane calculator Zoom In
instantaneous values of field quantities Zoom Out
S T U of AC magnetic field on even symmetry plotting
boundaries convergence data
of AC magnetic field on master and slave saturation levels
V W X boundaries Plotting Complex Data
of AC magnetic field on odd symmetry Plotting Vector Data
Y Z # boundaries plotting (data files)
of plotted quantities plotting a family of curves
phasors specifying interpolation order
notation for plotting (parametric equations)
real and imaginary components specifying degree of interpolation
used to express current plotting (signals)
used to express voltage adding
Go Back phi, angle in line of sight cartesian plots
plane calculator complex numbers
downloading field quantities into creating new
Contents general operations deleting
phase formatting
plotting quantities from opening existing
Index register operations polar plots
scalar operations saving

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C tool bar used in reshaping objects

zooming in points, vertex
zooming out adding
D E F plotting, fields aligning
aborting moving
arrow plots snapping to
G H I common quantities used in reshaping objects
contour plots polarization
J K L D Vector as a vector function
E Vector direction of
entering field values into number calculator relationship to permittivity, electric retentivity
M N O field quantities and coercivity
from calculator registers used as source of electric field
from line calculator Polyline (Object command)
P Q R from plane calculator position
graphs of subwindows
S T U line plots Post commands
Mag D BH Examine
Mag E BH Plot
V W X phase Line
plot location Plane
Y Z # selecting window for Plot
shaded plots Post Process (Executive commands)
spectrum on black and white printers Nominal Problem
Plot/Format (parametric) commands Variables
Axes post processing
Graphs nominal problem
points parametric problem
Go Back and mouse selection transient motion data
displaying Post Processor
entering from the keyboard exiting
Contents measuring distance between File commands
selecting from several subwindows post processor
points, spline control post processor macros
Index aligning adding to the menu
moving executing by name

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C in parametric solutions organizing display of

removing from the menu tiling
summary versus subwindows
D E F viewing results of projects
PostScript creating
and plot quality printing
G H I Post/Line commands
Define
J K L Display
Entry
Plot
M N O Value
Post/Plane commands
Arrow
P Q R Arrow Display
Arrow Region
S T U Contour
Contour Display
Shade
V W X Value
potential
Y Z # power loss
and convergence
plotting for each field solution
precision
printing
active view
and black and white printers
Go Back effect of hidden windows
projects
setup
Contents spectrum plots
Profile
project windows
Index cascading
creating

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C Q R
Quad All Recolor
Quad Screen Recolor (Edit/Attributes command)
D E F Rectangle (Object command)
reduced matrices
G H I and matrix norm
reference for voltage and magnetic vector po-
tential
J K L refine area
Refine commands
M N O Area
Object
Point
P Q R refine number
refinement
aborting (for areas)
S T U aborting (for objects)
adaptive
V W X general procedure for adaptive refinement
general procedure for manual refinement
goals
Y Z # inside objects
inspecting the mesh
manual
overview
specifying percentage of
undoing
Refresh (current window)
Go Back Refresh (Global)
register commands
in the line calculator
Contents in the number calculator
in the plane calculator
registers
Index complex

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C in the line calculator Delete

in the plane calculator Number of Segments
number Reshape/Vertex commands
D E F reading and writing Align
real Insert
scalar Move
G H I vector resistance
relative permeability AC vs. DC
J K L and skin depth and conductance
anisotropic (Eddy Axial) and impedance
anisotropic (Magnetostatic and Eddy Cur- resistance boundaries
M N O rent) and excluded objects
entering assigning
imaginary conductivity
P Q R imaginary (anisotropic, Eddy Axial) location of
imaginary (anisotropic, Eddy Current)) thickness off
S T U non-linear voltage on
relationship to magnetization, magnetic re- Resistance (Assign/Boundary commands)
tentivity and magnetic coercivity resistive layers
V W X relative permeability (Magnetostatic) modeling with resistance boundaries
relative permittivity modeling with resistance boundaries (As-
Y Z # anisotropic (Eddy Current) sign command)
anisotropic (Electrostatic, AC Conduction restoring deleted boundaries and sources
and Eddy Axial) restoring deleted items
entering retentivity
relationship to polarization, electric coercivi- electric
ty and electric retentivity magnetic
Rename (Edit/Attributes command) return path
Go Back reserved names (Background) and boundary conditions
Reset (Window/Coordinate System/Reset com- and impedance computation
mand) and inductance computation
Contents Reshape commands default
Edge identifying an object as
Scale Selection Revert
Index Vertex root
Reshape/Edge commands running Maxwell 2D as

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C Rotate (Arrange command) S

Rotate (Window/Coordinate System command)
saturation
rotational motion
definition of
D E F rows
plotting in non-linear materials
sorting
selecting points in non-linear materials
RZ Plane
G H I Save As (parametric Plot command)
Save As (2D Modeler)
Save (2D Modeler)
J K L saving
circuit models
M N O 2D LINE definitions
scalar fields
scalar operations
P Q R in the line calculator
in the number calculator
in the plane calculator
S T U Scale Selection (Reshape command)
Scale to Window or Scale to Problem
V W X scaling
drawing region
object dimensions
Y Z # screen
refreshing (all windows)
refreshing (current window)
screen layout
scroll bars
scrolling
seed points
Go Back adding to inside of objects
adding to object surface
adding within skin depth
Contents as vertices of triangles
deleting all seed points
deleting mesh
Index displaying in meshmaker

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C even distribution of Matrix

general procedure for adding Post Processor Macro
used as vertices of triangles Torque
D E F Select commands Setup Materials
All Objects adding materials to database
By Area assigning materials to objects
G H I By Name material attributes
Select Matrix Entries modifying material assignments
J K L parametric solutions Setup Materials (Executive commands)
self-capacitance for parametric solutions
self-impedance Setup Solution
M N O self-inductance Variables
setting Setup Solution Options
printer options Setup Solution Parameters (Executive com-
P Q R Settings mands)
Setup Setup Solution (Executive commands)
S T U Setup Boundaries/Sources Options (parametric)
assigning boundaries and sources Shade
exiting Shaded Mesh
V W X general procedure for defining boundaries shaded plots
and sources of common field quantities
Y Z # modifying existing boundaries and sources of quantities in the plane calculator
tool bar sheet current
using default boundaries and sources short circuit
Setup Boundaries/Sources commands short circuit capacitance
Assign Show commands
File Mesh Information
Model Shaded Mesh
Go Back Window Wireframe Mesh
Setup Boundaries/Sources (Executive com- Show Coordinates (parametric Plot command)
mands) signal lines
Contents for parametric solutions in admittance matrix
Setup Executive Parameters in capacitance matrix
Current Flow in conductance matrix
Index Flux Linkage significant digits
Force Simplify (Boolean command)

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C sinusoidal values for nominal solution

size of subwindows for parametric solutions
skin depth solution passes
D E F and conductivity parametric solution
and eddy currents solution setup
and frequency parametric
G H I and magnetic field Solutions
and permeability solutions
J K L and skin effect aborting
effect on AC resistance accuracy
seeding mesh in and boundary conditions
M N O slave boundaries and computing resources
matching mesh on master boundaries and Maxwells Equations
phase of AC electric field convergence criteria
P Q R phase of AC magnetic field deleting mesh
Slave (Assign/Boundary commands) frequency of
S T U smoothing curved lines general procedure for generating
SnapToMode (Model command) generating with non-graphical interfaces
solenoid manipulating
V W X alternating fields in monitoring
solid current sources nominal
Y Z # AC current parametric
AC source current, displacement current and plotting
eddy current plotting convergence data
DC current reading from disk
Solid Modeler residual (error)
format, saving 2D Modeler files in setting up parametric sweep
solid modeling specifying criteria for
Go Back displaying objects superimposing
solid sources viewing convergence data
Solid (Assign/Source commands) writing to disk
Contents solution Solutions commands
and drawing region Current Flow
solution files Flux Lines
Index reading into post processor Flux Linkage
solution options Force/Torque

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C Matrix source setup

Number Registers for parametric solutions
solutions, parametric Source (Assign commands)
D E F aborting sources
displaying and field behavior
errors charge
G H I Solver charge sheet
changing field solvers current
J K L selecting a field solver current sheet
solver packages defining via math functions
AC Magnetic Fields deleting
M N O complete deselecting
Electric Fields during matrix solutions
Parametric Analysis edge voltage
P Q R solver residual effect of grouping on
solver type functional
S T U AC Conduction general procedure for assigning
DC Conduction in axisymmetric models
Eddy Axial magnetized materials
V W X Eddy Current modifying
Electrostatic polarized materials
Y Z # Magnetostatic required
Solve/Nominal Problem (Executive commands) selecting
Solve/Variables (Executive commands) sheet
sort keys solid
changing priority summary of
deleting use of
selecting voltage
Go Back Sort (Data command) sources, AC conduction
source current edge voltage
downloading into plane calculator required
Contents in active conductors solid voltage
in axisymmetric models sources, DC conduction
in cartesian models edge voltage
Index in passive conductors edge voltage (Assign command)
relationship to AC current density required

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C solid voltage orientation of function in source

solid voltage (Assign command) sources, magnetostatic
sources, eddy axial current density
D E F defining via boundary conditions current density (Assign command)
external magnetic fields current sheets
required current sheets (Assign command)
G H I sources, eddy current perfect current
active conductors perfect current (Assign command)
J K L current sheet permanent magnets
current sheet (Assign command) required
parallel current total current
M N O parallel current (Assign command) total current (Assign command)
passive sources, transient
perfect current required
P Q R perfect current (Assign command) specifying printer settings
required Spiral (Object command)
S T U solid current spirals
solid current (Assign command) circular
stranded current rectangular
V W X stranded current (Assign command) Spline (Object command)
sources, electrostatic status information
Y Z # charge cursor position
charge sheet entering data with keyboard
charge sheet (Assign command) snap-to behavior of mouse
edge voltage unit of length
edge voltage (Assign command) steady-state conditions
polarized materials stopping criteria
required adaptive passes
Go Back solid charge energy error
solid charge (Assign command) stranded conductors
solid voltage stranded current sources
Contents solid voltage (Assign command) AC source current in
sources, functional Subtract (Boolean command)
general procedure for defining subtracting objects
Index identifying constant source quantities open objects
identifying functional source quantities subwindows

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C active surface charge

active (post processor) susceptance
adding new windows Sweep (Data command)
D E F cascading symmetry
changing the field of view even
changing view of modeling via boundary conditions
G H I closing odd
creating symmetry boundaries
J K L display of octant only behavior of electric field on
displaying different views of drawing region behavior of magnetic field in transient mod-
displaying entire model in els
M N O displaying selected items in behavior of magnetic field on
expanding to fill the screen in AC conduction models
field of view in axisymmetric models
P Q R local coordinate system in DC conduction models
magnifying in eddy axial models
S T U manipulating local coordinate system in eddy current models
organizing display of in electrostatic models
positioning in magnetostatic models
V W X post processor phase of AC magnetic field
reconfiguring Symmetry (Assign/Boundary commands)
Y Z # refreshing (all)
refreshing (current window)
returning to original size
selecting for plots
selecting points from several
shifting
sizing
Go Back specifying as 2D or 3D
tiling
turning off
Contents unzooming
versus project windows
zooming
Index Suggested Values
superposition

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C T AC magnetic field (eddy current) simulation

DC conduction field simulation
table cells
DC magnetic field (magnetostatic) simula-
editing
D E F selecting
tion
eddy axial field simulation
table columns
electrostatic field simulation
G H I selecting
thermal coupling
table editor
thermal field solver
tool bar
J K L table of contents
theta, angle in line of sight
time
table rows
required for solution tasks
M N O selecting
time constant
target error
for electrostatic and DC conduction simula-
plotting
tion
P Q R text
time-stepping analysis
adding
time-varying quantities
alignment
S T U attributes of
real and imaginary components
time-varying quantities, representing with pha-
changing
sors
V W X color of
tool bar
copying
in boundary manager
deleting
Y Z # for annotating screen captures
in Meshmaker
Torque
italicizing
torque
mirroring
anchor point
moving
and convergence
pasting
objects
rotating
plotting for each adaptive solution
selecting
Go Back setting default color
units of
viewing solution
size of
virtual (Eddy Current)
unselecting
Contents visibility
virtual (Magnetostatic)
total energy
Text (Object command)
and solution accuracy
theory
Index AC conduction field simulation
plotting for each field solution
Trans commands (Post Processor)

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C Delete U
Execute
underiving materials
Start
Undo Clear
D E F Stop
Undo Clear (Boundary Manager)
transient boundary conditions
Undo Clear (Edit command)
transient field quantities
G H I transient functions
Union (Boolean command)
unioning objects
transient motion
open objects
J K L restrictions
units
transient motion module
anisotropic materials
transient motion, see motion
M N O transient operations
BH-curves
by material attributes
transient simulation
charge sheets
transient solid conductors
P Q R current sources
current sheets
electromagnetic quantities in plots
voltage sources
in the 2D Post Processor
S T U transient solver
MKS
field quantities in plane calculator
nonlinear materials
transient sources
V W X translational motion
of BH-curves
of length
translational motion equations
perfect conductors
Y Z # Translators
plotting in the Post Processor
triangles
Post Processing field quantities
aspect ratios
rescaling geometric models
displaying shaded view of
specifying
plotting for each field solution
specifying for geometric model
point refinement of
types
refining in rectangular area
used in the geometric model
Go Back size of largest and smallest in mesh
2D modeler
total number of
UnZoom
total number of vertex points
Contents viewing
wireframe display of
trigonometric functions
Index

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C V Add
Animate
value boundaries
Delete
and default current return path
D E F in AC conduction models
summary
View
in axisymmetric models
Variables (Executive commands)
G H I in DC conduction models
after solution sweep
in eddy axial models
Vector Data Type for Force
in eddy current models
J K L in electrostatic models
vector fields
vector functions
in magnetostatic models
defining
M N O in transient models
specifying vector components
phase of AC magnetic field
vector material properties
relationship to odd symmetry boundaries
aligning with a given direction
P Q R used as reference
alignment with local coordinate system
used to model external fields
assigning
Value (Assign/Boundary commands)
S T U Value (Post/Line commands)
vector functions
vector operations
Value (Post/Plane commands)
in the line calculator
V W X variables
in the number calculator
adding to the table
in the plane calculator
boundary conditions
Y Z # defining for nominal and parametric solu-
vector quantities
direction on boundary
tions
in axisymmetric models
deleting from the table
plotting common field quantities
frequency
plotting on a cross-section
geometric dimensions
plotting on a line
material properties
plotting within a rectangular area
selecting for parametric sweep
Go Back setting to different values
Vector Variable Type for Force
vertex points
sources
aligning
viewing
Contents viewing during solution
inserting
moving
Variables commands
Vertex (Reshape command)
Rearrange Columns
Index Variables commands (table editor)
viewing
field solutions

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C viewing angle and inductance

viewing parameters assigning to edges
viewing solutions downloading into plane calculator
D E F field solutions downloading into plane calculator (AC)
for current flow downloading into plane calculator (Electro-
for flux linkage static)
G H I for force functional
for matrix magnitude of
J K L for torque on conductors
virtual force on perfect conductors
and current on resistance boundaries
M N O and energy on surface of dielectric
and magnetic coenergy on surface of dielectrics
and virtual work (electrostatic) phase of
P Q R and virtual work (magnetostatic) reference
effect of grouping on required sources or
S T U instantaneous setting on boundary
theory (eddy current) time-varying
theory (electrostatic) total
V W X theory (magnetostatic) voltage sources, AC
time-averaged value of defining
Y Z # virtual torque edge voltages
and magnetic coenergy solid
and virtual force (magnetostatic) used as reference
effect of grouping on voltage sources, DC
instantaneous defining
theory (eddy current) edge voltages (DC Conduction)
theory (magnetostatic) edge voltages (Electrostatic)
Go Back time-averaged value of solid (DC Conduction)
virtual work solid (Electrostatic)
and force (electrostatic) used as reference
Contents and force (magnetostatic)
and torque (magnetostatic)
voltage
Index and balloon boundaries
and capacitance

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C W Projects
Subwindows
Window commands
Window/Change View commands
Magnify
D E F Measure
Fit All
Fit Drawing
Refresh
Fit Selection
G H I Setup
Zoom In
Shift
Zoom Out
UnZoom
J K L Zoom
Window/Coordinate System commands
Reset
Window commands (2D Modeler)
Rotate
M N O Cascade
Shift
Change View
Window/Setup commands
Close
Full Screen
P Q R Coordinate System
On-Off
Fill Solids
Quad All
Grid
S T U New
Quad Screen
Settings
Tile
Window/Tile commands
V W X Toolbar
All
Wire Frame
Projects
windows
Y Z # active
Subwindows
Wire Mesh
adjusting the view
writing
printing active
registers to disk
project
specifying default settings
subwindow
windows, project
Go Back cascading
tiling
windows, subwindows
Contents cascading
tiling
Window/Cascade commands
Index All

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C X Z
x- and y- offsets, displaying Zoom
XY Plane Zoom In (Window/Change View command)
D E F Zoom Out (Window/Change View command)

G H I

J K L

M N O

P Q R

S T U

V W X

Y Z #

Go Back

Contents

Index

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Thumbtabs: Maxwell 2D Index

A B C Numerics
2 Point (Object/Circle command)
2D Boundary Manager
D E F hotkeys
menu commands
G H I tool bar
2D Meshmaker
2D Meshmaker commands
J K L File
Mesh
M N O Model
Refine
Windows
P Q R 2D Modeler
accessing from Maxwell 2D
accessing from Utilities panel
S T U active windows
commands
V W X drawing region
general procedure
hotkeys
Y Z # menu bar
message bar
printing parameters
project windows
screen layout
status bar
subwindows
Go Back tool bar
2D modeler
3 Point (Object/Circle command)
Contents

Index

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright 1988-2001 Ansoft Corporation